OWNER'S MANUAL
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The
car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the world's safest passenger vehicles. Your
Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that
you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's
manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo
Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
2
SAFETY
This is how you find owner's information
12
General information on seatbelts
28
Two-stage booster seat* - raising
53
Digital owner's manual in the car
13
Seatbelt - putting on
29
Two-stage booster seat* - lowering
54
Volvo Cars support site
15
Seatbelt - loosening
29
Child seat - ISOFIX
55
Reading the owner's manual
16
Seatbelt - pregnancy
30
ISOFIX - size classes
56
Recording data
19
Seatbelt reminder
30
ISOFIX - types of child seat
57
Accessories and extra equipment
20
Seatbelt tensioner
31
Child seats - upper mounting points
59
Volvo ID
21
Safety - warning symbol
31
Environmental philosophy
22
Airbag system
32
The owner's manual and the environment
25
Driver airbag
34
Laminated glass
25
Passenger airbag
34
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivating*
36
Side airbag (SIPS)
37
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
38
General information on WHIPS
(whiplash protection)
39
WHIPS - seating position
40
Roll Over Protection System (ROPS)
41
General information on safety mode
41
Safety mode - attempting to start the car
42
Safety mode - moving the car
43
General information on child safety
43
Child seats
45
Child seats - location
51
Child seat - two-stage booster seat*
52
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls, left-hand
drive car - overview
62
Instruments and controls, right-hand
drive car - overview
65
Steering wheel
90
Panorama roof* - general
112
Heating* of the steering wheel
91
Panorama roof* - operation
113
Light switches
92
Menu navigation - combined instrument panel
115
93
Combined instrument panel
68
Position lamps
Analogue combined instrument
panel - overview
68
Daytime running lights
94
Menu overview - combined instrument panel
116
Tunnel detection*
95
Digital combined instrument panel overview
69
Messages
Main/dipped beam
117
95
Messages - handling
118
Active main beam*
96
MY CAR
118
Active Xenon headlamps*
98
Trip computer
119
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
99
121
Rear fog lamp
99
Trip computer - analogue combined
instrument panel
Trip computer - digital combined
instrument panel
124
Trip computer - trip statistics*
127
Eco guide & Power guide*
72
Combined instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols
73
Combined instrument cluster meaning of warning symbols
75
Outside temperature gauge
77
Trip meter
77
Clock
78
Combined instrument panel - license
agreement
78
Symbols in the display
Volvo Sensus
Key positions
79
82
83
Key positions - functions at different
levels
83
Seats, front
85
Seats, front - electrically operated*
86
Seats, rear
87
Brake lights
100
Hazard warning flashers
100
direction indicators
101
Interior lighting
102
Home safe lighting
103
Approach lighting
104
Wipers and washers
104
Power windows
106
Door mirrors
108
Windows and rearview and door mirrors - heating
109
Rearview mirror - interior
110
Compass*
111
3
CLIMATE CONTROL
4
LOADING AND STORAGE
General information on climate control
130
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - direct start
144
Actual temperature
130
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - immediate stop
145
Air quality - passenger compartment filter 131
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - timer
145
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP)*
132
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - messages
147
Air quality - IAQS*
132
Additional heater*
Air quality - material
132
Menu settings - climate control
133
Air distribution in the passenger
compartment
133
Electronic climate control - ECC
135
Heated front seats*
136
Sensors - climate control
131
Air quality
131
Heated rear seat*
137
Fan
137
Auto-regulation
138
Temperature control in the passenger compartment
138
Air conditioning
139
Demisting and defrosting the windscreen
139
Air distribution - recirculation
140
Air distribution - table
141
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater*
143
Storage spaces
152
Tunnel console
154
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter
and ashtray*
154
Glovebox
154
Inlaid mats*
155
Vanity mirror
155
149
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets
155
Fuel-driven additional heater*
149
Loading
156
Electric additional heater*
150
Loading - long load
157
Roof load
158
Load retaining eyelets
158
Loading - bag holder*
158
12 V electrical socket - cargo area*
159
Safety net*
159
Safety grille*
161
Cargo cover*
162
LOCKS AND ALARM
DRIVER SUPPORT
Remote control key
164
Remote control key - losing
164
Remote control key - personalisation*
165
Locking/unlocking - indicator
166
Immobiliser
166
Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the
key blade
176
Active chassis - Four C*
190
Adjustable steering force*
Keyless Drive* - lock settings
177
190
Keyless Drive* - antenna location
177
Electronic stability control (ESC) general
191
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
178
Locking/unlocking - from the inside
179
Electronic stability control (ESC) operation
192
Global opening
179
Electronic stability control (ESC) symbols and messages
193
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system*
167
Remote control key - functions
167
Locking/unlocking - glovebox
180
Speed limiter*
Remote control key - range
195
169
Locking/unlocking - tailgate
180
Speed limiter* - getting started
Remote control key with PCC* unique functions
195
169
Power operated tailgate*
181
Speed limiter* - changing speed
196
Remote control key with PCC* - range
170
Deadlocks*
183
196
Detachable key blade
171
Child safety locks - manual activation
184
Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation and standby mode
Detachable key blade - detaching/
attaching
171
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed
exceeded
197
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
Speed limiter* - deactivation
197
Remote control key - replacing the
battery
Cruise control*
198
Child safety locks - electrical activation*
185
Alarm*
185
172
Alarm indicator*
186
172
Alarm* - automatic re-arming
187
Alarm* - remote control key not working
187
Alarm signals*
187
Cruise control* - managing speed
199
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and standby mode
199
200
Keyless drive*
174
Keyless Drive* - remote control key
range
174
Reduced alarm level*
188
Cruise control* - resume set speed
Keyless drive* - secure handling of
the remote control key
175
Type approval - remote control key
system
188
Cruise control* - deactivate
200
Distance Warning*
201
Keyless Drive* - interference to
remote control key function
175
Distance Warning* - limitations
202
Keyless Drive* - locking
175
Distance Warning* - symbols and
messages
203
Keyless drive* - unlocking
176
5
6
Adaptive cruise control - ACC*
204
City Safety™ - laser sensor
226
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
251
Adaptive cruise control* - function
205
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
228
251
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
206
Collision warning system*
229
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) function
Adaptive cruise control* - managing
speed
207
Collision warning system* - function
230
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) operation
252
Adaptive cruise control* - set time
interval
209
Collision warning system* - detection
of cyclists
231
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) limitations
253
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
deactivation, and standby mode
209
Collision warning system* - detection
of pedestrians
232
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) symbols and messages
254
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle
210
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
211
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue
assistance
211
Adaptive cruise control* - switch
cruise control functionality
213
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and action
214
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols
and messages
215
Radar sensor
217
Radar sensor - limitations
217
Type approval - radar system
219
City Safety™
222
City Safety™ - function
223
City Safety™ - operation
223
City Safety™ - limitations
224
Collision warning system* - operation
233
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)*
255
Collision warning system* - limitations
235
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - function
256
Collision warning system* - camera
sensor limitations
236
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - operation
257
Collision warning system* - symbols
and messages
238
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - limitations
258
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - symbols
and messages
259
BLIS*
240
BLIS* - operation
241
CTA*
242
BLIS - symbols and messages
244
Road Sign Information (RSI)*
244
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
245
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
248
Driver Alert System*
248
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
248
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
249
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols
and messages
250
Park Assist*
260
Park assist syst* - function
260
Park assist syst* - backward
261
Park assist syst* - forward
262
Park assist syst* - fault indication
263
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
263
Park assist camera*
264
Park assist camera - settings
266
Park assist camera - limitations
267
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the engine
270
Foot brake
292
Towing bracket/Towbar*
310
Switching off the engine
271
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
293
Detachable towbar* - storage
311
Steering lock
271
294
Detachable towbar* - specifications
311
Remote start (ERS)*
271
Foot brake - emergency brake lights
and automatic hazard warning flashers
272
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance 294
312
Remote start (ERS) - operation
Detachable towbar* - attachment/
removal
Remote start (ERS) - symbols and
messages
273
Parking brake
295
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA
315
Driving in water
299
Towing
316
Jump starting with another battery
275
Overheating
299
Towing eye
317
Gearboxes
276
Driving with open tailgate/boot lid
300
Recovery
318
Manual gearbox
276
Overload - starter battery
300
Gear shift indicator*
277
Before a long journey
301
278
Winter driving
301
Gear selector inhibitor
281
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing
302
Hill start assist (HSA)*
282
Fuel filler flap - manual opening
302
All-wheel drive - (AWD)*
282
Filling up with fuel
302
283
Fuel - handling
303
Start/Stop*
284
Fuel - petrol
304
Start/Stop* - function and operation
285
Fuel - diesel
304
286
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
306
287
Catalytic converters
307
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic*
Hill Descent Control (HDC)*
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
Start/Stop* - the engine does not
auto-start
288
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual
gearbox
289
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
290
Economical driving
307
Driving with a trailer*
308
Driving with a trailer* - manual gearbox
309
Driving with a trailer* - automatic gearbox 310
7
WHEELS AND TYRES
8
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Tyres - maintenance
320
Tyres - direction of rotation
321
Emergency puncture repair kit* inflating the tyres
340
Volvo service programme
342
Book service and repair*
342
345
Tyres - tread wear indicators
322
Raising the car
Tyres - air pressure
322
Bonnet - opening and closing
347
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions
324
Engine compartment - overview
347
Tyres - dimensions
324
Engine compartment - checking
349
Tyres - load index
325
Engine oil - general
349
Tyres - speed ratings
325
Engine oil - checking and filling
350
Wheel bolts
326
Coolant - level
353
Winter tyres
326
Brake and clutch fluid - level
354
Changing wheels - removing wheels
327
Power steering fluid - level
354
Changing wheels - fitting
329
355
Warning triangle
330
Climate control system - fault tracing
and repair
Tools
331
Lamp replacement - general
356
Jack*
331
Lamp replacement - headlamps
357
First aid kit*
332
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs
358
Tyre pressure monitoring*
332
Lamp replacement - dipped beam
358
Tyre monitoring (TM)*
333
Lamp replacement - main beam
359
Emergency puncture repair*
335
Lamp replacement - extra main beam
360
Emergency puncture repair kit* - location
335
360
Emergency puncture repair kit* overview
336
Lamp replacement - direction indicators front
Lamp replacement - rear lamp
361
Emergency puncture repair* - operation
337
361
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
339
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps
SPECIFICATIONS
Lamp replacement - number plate
lighting
362
Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo
area
362
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
Lamps - specifications
Wiper blades
Washer fluid - filling
Starter battery - general
Battery - symbols
Starter battery - replacement
Battery - Start/Stop
Electrical system
Fuses - general
Fuses - in engine compartment
Fuses - under glovebox
362
363
364
366
367
368
369
370
373
373
375
379
Fuses - in the control module under
the glovebox
381
Fuses - in cargo area
383
Fuses - in the engine compartment's
cold zone
385
Car wash
387
Polishing and waxing
389
Water and dirt-repellent coating
389
Rustproofing
390
Cleaning the interior
390
Paint damage
392
Type designations
396
Dimensions
399
Weights
400
Towing capacity and towball load
401
Engine specifications
403
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
404
Engine oil - grade and volume
405
Coolant - grade and volume
407
Transmission fluid - grade and volume
408
Brake fluid - grade and volume
410
Power steering fluid - grade
410
Fuel tank - volume
411
Specifications for air conditioning
412
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
413
Tyres - approved tyre pressures
415
Performance
416
9
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Alphabetical Index
10
417
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This is how you find owner's
information
Owner's information is available in several different product formats, both digital and printed.
The owner's manual is available in the car's
screen, as a mobile app and on the Volvo Cars
support site. There is a Quick Guide and a supplement to the owner's manual available in the
glovebox, with specifications and fuse information, amongst other things. A printed owner's
manual can be ordered.
The car's screen1
A digital version of the owner's
manual is available in the car's
screen. Press the MY CAR button in the centre console, press
OK/MENU and select
Owner's manual. The information is searchable and can
also be subdivided into categories.
Read more in the Digital owner's manual in the
car.
Volvo Cars support site
Go to support.volvocars.com
and select your country. Here
you can find owner's manuals,
both online and in PDF format.
On the Volvo Cars support site
there are also video tutorials
and further information and
help regarding your Volvo and your car ownership. The page is available for most markets.
Read more on the Volvo Cars support site.
Printed information
Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play,
search for "Volvo Manual",
download the app to your
smartphone or tablet and select
the car.
The app contains video tutorials
as well as options for visual navigation with exterior and interior images of the car. It is easy to
navigate between the different sections in the
owner's manual and the content is searchable.
Read more about Owner's Manual in mobile devices.
There is a supplement to the
owner's manual2 in the glovebox that contains information
on fuses and specifications, as
well as a summary of important
and practical information.
There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
format that helps you to get started with the most
commonly used functions in the car.
Depending on equipment level selected, market,
etc. additional owner's information may also be
available in printed format in the car.
A printed owner's manual and associated supplement can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to
order. See how the owner's manual is structured
in Reading the owner's manual.
1A
2A
12
complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the screen.
complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the screen.
INTRODUCTION
Changing the language in the car's
screen
Changing the language in the car's display may
mean that some information does not correspond
to national or local laws and regulations. Don't
change to a language that's difficult to understand, it may then be difficult to find your way
back in the structure on the screen.
IMPORTANT
Digital owner's manual in the car
• Favourites - Quick access to favourite-
The owner's manual can be read on the screen
in the car3. The content is searchable and it is
easy to navigate between different sections.
• Quick Guide - A selection of articles for
Open the digital owner's manual - press the MY
CAR button in the centre console, press OK/
MENU and select Owner's manual.
Select the information symbol in the lower righthand corner in order to obtain information about
the digital owner's manual.
For basic navigation, see Operating the system.
See below for a more detailed description.
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that applicable laws and regulations are followed. It is
also important that the car is maintained and
handled in accordance with Volvo's recommendations in the owner's information.
bookmarked articles.
common functions.
NOTE
The digital owner's manual is not available
while driving.
Search
If there should be a difference between the
information in the screen and the printed
information then it is always the printed information that applies.
Related information
•
•
•
Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 13)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 16)
Owner's manual, start page.
There are four options for finding information in
the digital owner's manual:
• Search - Search function for finding an article.
• Categories - All articles sorted into categories.
3
Applies to certain car models.
Searching using the character wheel.
Character list.
Changing the input mode (see following
table).
}}
13
INTRODUCTION
||
Use the character wheel to enter a search term,
e.g. "seatbelt".
a|A
1.
||}
Turn TUNE to the desired letter, press OK/
MENU to confirm. The number and letter
buttons on the control panel in the centre
console can also be used.
2.
Continue with the next letter and so on.
3.
To change the input mode to numbers or
special characters, or to perform a search,
turn TUNE to one of the options (see explanation in the following table) in the list for
changing the input mode (2), press OK/
MENU.
123/AB
C
Change between letters and numbers with OK/MENU.
MORE
Change to special characters with
OK/MENU.
OK
Perform the search. Turn TUNE to
select a search result article, press
OK/MENU to go to the article.
Changes between lowercase and
uppercase letters with OK/MENU.
Changes from the character wheel
to the search field. Move the cursor with TUNE. Delete any misspelling with EXIT. To return to the
character wheel, press OK/MENU.
•
Stop with the cursor on the desired character
in order to select it - the character is shown
on the enter line.
Note that the digit and letter buttons on the control panel can be
used for editing in the search field.
•
Delete/undo using EXIT.
To enter a number, hold in the corresponding
number key.
Enter with the numerical keyboard
Favourites
Another way of entering characters is to use the
centre console's buttons 0-9, * and #.
14
Categories
The articles in the owner's manual are structured
into main categories and subcategories. The
same article can be in several appropriate categories in order to be found more easily.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the category tree and
press OK/MENU to open a category - selected
- or article - selected
. Press EXIT to go
back to the previous view.
Numerical keyboard.
4
When e.g. 9 is pressed, a bar appears with all
characters4 under the button, e.g. W, x, y, z and
9. Quick presses on the button move the cursor
through these characters.
The character for each button may vary depending on market/country/language.
Located here are the articles that are saved as
favourites. To select an article as a favourite, see
the heading "Navigating in an article" below.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the favourite list and
press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT
to go back to the previous view.
INTRODUCTION
Quick Guide
Located here is a selection of articles for getting
to know the car's most common functions. The
articles can also be accessed via categories, but
are collected here for quick access.
Turn TUNE to navigate in the Quick Guide and
press OK/MENU to open an article. Press EXIT
to go back to the previous view.
Navigating in an article
ated symbol is shown here as well as the
number of such texts in the article.
Turn TUNE to navigate between the links or
scroll in an article. When the screen has scrolled
to the start/end of an article the home and
favourite options are accessed by scrolling a further step up/down. Press OK/MENU to activate
the selection/highlighted link. Press EXIT to go
back to the previous view.
Volvo Cars support site
There is additional information regarding your
car on the Volvo Cars website and support
page. From the website, it is also possible to
navigate through to My Volvo, a personal web
page for you and your car.
Support on the Internet
Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR code
below to visit the page. The support page is available for most markets.
QR code that leads to the support page.
Home - leads to the start page for the
owner's manual.
Favourite - adds/removes an article as a
favourite. You can also press the FAV button
in the centre console to add/remove an article as a favourite.
The information on the support page is searchable and can also be subdivided into different categories. Available here is support for options related to e.g. Internet connected services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the navigation system* and
apps. Video and step-by-step instructions explain
different procedures, e.g. how the car is connected to the Internet via a mobile phone.
Highlighted link - leads to linked article.
Special texts - if the article contains warnings, important or note texts then an associ-
}}
* Option/accessory.
15
INTRODUCTION
||
Downloadable information from the
support page
Volvo Web there is also information about accessories and software adapted for your car model.
Maps
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, there
is the facility to download maps from the support
page.
•
Related information
Volvo ID (p. 21)
Reading the owner's manual
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey.
Apps
For selected Volvo models from model year 2014
and 2015, the owner's manual is available in the
form of an app. The Volvo On Call* app can also
be accessed from here.
Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
become familiar with new functions, get advice
on how best to handle the car in different situations and learn how to make the best use of all
the car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the owner's manual.
Owner's manuals from previous model years
Owner's manuals from previous model years are
available here in PDF format. The Quick Guide
and supplement can also be accessed from the
support page. Select car model and model year in
order to download the publication required.
Development work is constantly in progress to
improve our product. Modifications may mean
that information, descriptions and illustrations in
the owner's manual differ from the equipment in
the car. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice.
Contact
© Volvo Car Corporation
On the support page there is contact information
for customer support and the nearest Volvo
dealer.
My Volvo on the Internet5
From www.volvocars.com it is possible to navigate
through to My Volvo Web which is a personal
Web page for you and your car.
IMPORTANT
Do not remove this manual from the car should a problem arise then the information
required about where and how to seek professional help would be missing.
Create a personal Volvo ID, log in to My Volvo
Web and get an overview of service, agreements
and warranties, amongst other things. At My
5 Applies
16
to certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
The equipment described in the owner's manual
is not available in all cars - they have different
equipment depending on adaptations for the
needs of different markets and national or local
laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard
or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
NOTE
The Owner's manual is available for download
as a mobile application (applies for certain car
models and mobile devices), see
www.volvocars.com.
The mobile application also includes video
and searchable content and easy navigation
between different sections.
Options/accessories
All types of option/accessory are marked with an
asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, the owner's
manual also describes options (factory fitted
equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted
extra equipment).
Message texts
In the car there are displays that show menu
texts and message texts. In the owner's manual
the appearance of these texts differs from the
normal text. Examples of menu texts and message texts: Media, Sending location.
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information in a
simple and clear manner. The decals in the car
have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information.
Warning for personal injury
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of e.g. features and functions.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's manual that is located at the bottom of the page. This
information is an addition to the text that it refers
to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a
table then letters are used instead of numbers
for referral.
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white
text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning
* Option/accessory.
}}
17
INTRODUCTION
||
is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or
fatality.
Information
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual.
Risk of property damage
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corresponding
illustration.
G031592
G031593
Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series
of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if
the warning is ignored, may result in damage to
property.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and locations
in the car. The information that applies to your
particular car can be found on the decal on
the car.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered
and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the reciprocal order is of no
relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-bystep instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used in
overview images where different components
are pointed out. The number recurs in the
position list featured in connection with the
illustration that describes the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
18
INTRODUCTION
•
•
Coolant
Recording data
Engine oil
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance,
certain information about the vehicle's operation,
functionality and incidents are recorded in the
car.
Related information
Related information refers to other articles containing closely-associated information.
Images
The manual's images are sometimes schematic
and may deviate from the car's appearance
depending on equipment level and market.
To be continued
}} This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when an article continues on the following
page.
Continued from previous page
|| This symbol is located furthest up to the left
when an article continues from the previous
page.
Related information
•
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 25)
•
Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data
Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to register and record data related to traffic accidents or
collision-like situations, such as times when the
airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle
in the road. The data is recorded in order to
increase understanding of how vehicle systems
work in these types of situations. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short time,
usually 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
data related to the following in the event of traffic
accidents or collision-like situations:
•
•
How the various systems in the car worked
Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts
were fastened/tensioned
•
The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
pedal
•
The travel speed of the vehicle
This information can help us better understand
the circumstances in which traffic accidents, injuries and damage occur. The EDR only records
data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs.
The EDR does not record any data during normal
driving conditions. Similarly, the system never
registers who is driving the vehicle or the geographic location of the accident or near-miss situation. However, other parties, such as the police,
could use the recorded data in combination with
the type of personally identifiable information
routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special
equipment and access to either the vehicle or the
EDR is required to be able to interpret the registered data.
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a
number of computers designed to continually
check and monitor the function of the car. They
can record data during normal driving conditions,
but in particular register faults affecting the vehicle's operation and functionality, or upon activation of the vehicle's active driver support function
(e.g. City Safety and the auto brake function).
Some of the recorded data is required to enable
service and maintenance technicians to diagnose
and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehicle. The registered information is also needed to
enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out
in laws and by government authorities. Information registered in the vehicle is stored in its computer until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
In addition to the above, the registered information can be used in aggregate form for research
and product development with the aim of continuously improving the safety and quality of Volvo
cars.
}}
19
INTRODUCTION
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described
information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with
national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be
forced to disclose information of this nature to
the police or other authorities who may assert a
legal right to access such. Special technical
equipment which Volvo and workshops that have
entered into agreements with Volvo have access
to is required to be able to read and interpret the
recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is stored and handled in a
secure manner and that the handling complies
with applicable legal requirements. For further
information - contact a Volvo dealer.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories and extra equipment can negatively
affect the car's electronic system.
Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer
system. Volvo therefore recommends that you
always contact an authorised Volvo workshop
before installing accessories or extra equipment
which are connected to or affect the electrical
system.
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
The windscreen is equipped with a heat-reflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat radiation
into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such as
a transponder, behind a glass surface with heatreflecting film may affect its function and performance.
For the optimal function of electronic equipment,
it should be positioned on the part of the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film (see the highlighted area in the illustration).
20
Areas where IR film is not applied.
A is the distance from the top edge of the windscreen down to the start of the field. B is the distance from the top edge of the windscreen down
to the end of the field.
Dimensions
A
47 mm
B
87 mm
* Option/accessory.
INTRODUCTION
Volvo ID
Volvo ID is your personal ID that provides
access to various services6.
Examples of services:
•
My Volvo - Your personal web page for you
and your car.
•
In an Internet-connected car* - Certain functions and services require that you have registered your car to a personal Volvo ID, for
example to be able to send a new address
from a map service on the Internet directly to
the car.
•
registration. It is possible to create a Volvo ID via
one of the following services:
•
My Volvo - Enter your e-mail address and follow the instructions.
•
For an Internet-connected car* - Enter your
e-mail address in the app that requires Volvo
ID and follow the instructions. Alternatively,
in the centre
press the Connect button
console twice and select Apps Settings
and follow the instructions.
•
Volvo On Call* - Download the latest version
of the Volvo On Call app. Choose to create a
Volvo ID from the start page, enter e-mail
address and follow the instructions.
Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when logging in to the Volvo On Call app.
Advantages of Volvo ID
•
One user name and one password to access
online services, i.e. only one username and
one password to remember.
•
When changing the username/password for
a service (e.g. Volvo On Call) it will also be
changed automatically for other services (e.g.
My Volvo)
Related information
•
Volvo Cars support site (p. 15)
Create a Volvo ID
To create a Volvo ID you need to enter a personal
e-mail address. Then follow the instructions in
the e-mail message that is automatically sent to
the specified address in order to complete the
6
The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.
* Option/accessory.
21
INTRODUCTION
Environmental philosophy
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on
the development of safer and more efficient
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core values and influences all operations. The environmental work is based on the whole life cycle of
the car and takes into account the environmental
impact it has, from design to scrapping and recycling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new
product developed must have less impact on the
environment than the product it replaces.
Volvo's environmental management work has
resulted in the development of the more efficient
and less polluting Drive-E drivelines. The personal
environment is also important to Volvo - the air
22
products and solutions in order to reduce the
negative impact on the environment.
inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air
outside thanks to the climate control system.
Your Volvo complies with stringent international
environmental standards. All Volvo's manufacturing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this
supports a systematic approach to the operation's environmental issues, which leads to continuous improvement with reduced environmental
impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means
that environmental laws and regulations in force
are complied with. Volvo also requires that its
partners must also meet these requirements.
Fuel consumption
Since a large part of a car's total environmental
impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo
Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel consumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air
pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes.
Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
INTRODUCTION
Contributing to a better environment
An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only
contributes to a reduced impact on the environment, but also means reduced costs for the
owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to
reduce fuel consumption and thereby save
money and contribute to a better environment here is some advice:
•
•
Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds
above approx. 80 km/h (50 mph) and below
50 km/h (30 mph) lead to increased energy
consumption.
Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's
recommended intervals for service and maintenance of the car.
shop in the event of uncertainty about how this
type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Following this advice can save money, the planet's resources are saved, and the car's durability
is extended. For more information and further
advice see Eco guide (p. 72), Economical driving (p. 307) and Fuel consumption (p. 413).
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept
"Clean inside and out" – a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as
highly efficient emission control. In many cases
the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards.
•
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
•
Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops
and uneven speed contribute to increased
fuel consumption.
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger compartment via the air intake.
•
If the car is equipped with an engine block
heater*, use it before starting from cold - it
improves starting capacity and reduces wear
in cold weather and the engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly,
which lowers consumption and reduces
emissions.
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures
that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the
traffic outside.
Also remember to always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work-
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
The system cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles,
hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the
air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that
allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked
with the remote control key.
Interior
The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
carefully selected and has been tested in order to
be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details
are hand-made, such as the seams of the steering wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is
monitored in order not to emit strong odours or
substances that cause discomfort in the event of
e.g. high heat and bright light.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a
long service life and low fuel consumption for
your car. In this way you also contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and maintenance
of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system.
Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in
which workshop premises shall be designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. The workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good
environmental care.
Recycling
Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it
is also important that the car is recycled in an
environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is
* Option/accessory.
}}
23
INTRODUCTION
||
therefore requested to contact a dealer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility.
Related information
•
24
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 25)
INTRODUCTION
The owner's manual and the
environment
The paper pulp in a printed owner's manual
comes from Forest Stewardship Council® certified forests or other controlled sources.
The FSC® symbol shows that the paper pulp in a
printed owner's manual comes from FSC® certified forests or other controlled sources.
Laminated glass
The windscreen and panorama roof
have laminated glass. It is reinforced
which provides better protection
against break-ins and improved sound
insulation in the passenger compartment. Other
glass surfaces*.
Related information
•
Environmental philosophy (p. 22)
* Option/accessory.
25
SAFETY
SAFETY
General information on seatbelts
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all passengers are using their seatbelts during the journey.
Remember
•
•
Do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly.
The seatbelt must not be twisted or caught
on anything.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal
shoulder belt up towards the shoulder. The hip strap
must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen).
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide maximum protection. Do
not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is
designed to protect in a normal seating position.
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their (p. 29) seatbelt by means of an audio and
visual reminder (p. 30).
28
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the protective characteristics of the seatbelt
may have been lost, even if it appears to be
undamaged. In addition, replace the seatbelt if
the belt is worn or damaged. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and intended for
installation in the same position as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
•
•
•
Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 30)
Seatbelt - loosening (p. 29)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 31)
SAFETY
Seatbelt - putting on
Seatbelt - loosening
Put on the seatbelt (p. 28) before driving starts.
Loosen the seatbelt (p. 28) when the car is stationary.
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by pressing
its locking tab into the seatbelt buckle. A loud
"click" indicates that the belt has locked.
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and
then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt does not
retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not
hang loose.
Related information
•
•
Seatbelt - putting on (p. 29)
Seatbelt reminder (p. 30)
Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on the
shoulder.
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear
seat1.
Remember
Correctly fitted seatbelt.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
•
•
•
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
Related information
•
•
•
•
1
Seatbelt - pregnancy (p. 30)
Seatbelt - loosening (p. 29)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 31)
Seatbelt reminder (p. 30)
Certain markets.
29
SAFETY
position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdomen and steering wheel.
Related information
•
•
Seatbelt - putting on (p. 29)
Seatbelt reminder
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten
their (p. 29) seatbelt by means of an audio and
visual reminder.
Seatbelt - loosening (p. 29)
G020998
Seatbelt (p. 28) must always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the
correct way.
The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to
the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and
as low as possible under the abdomen. It must
never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the
slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as
close to the body as possible. In addition, check
that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
must adjust the seat (p. 85) and steering wheel
(p. 90) such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means that
they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). The aim should be to
30
G017726
Seatbelt - pregnancy
The audio reminder is speed dependent, and in
some cases time dependent. The visual reminder
is located in the roof console and in the combined instrument panel (p. 68).
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
•
Provides information on which seatbelts
(p. 28) are being used in the rear seat. A
message appears in the combined instrument panel when the seatbelts are in use, or
if one of the rear doors has been opened.
SAFETY
The message is cleared automatically after
driving for approximately 30 seconds or after
pressing the indicator stalk OK button
(p. 115).
•
Provides a warning if one of the rear seatbelts is unfastened during travel. This warning takes the form of a message in the combined instrument panel along with the audio/
visual signal. The warning stops when the
seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can also be
acknowledged manually by pressing the OK
button.
The message in the combined instrument panel
showing which seatbelts are in use is always
shown. Press the OK button to see stored messages.
Seatbelt tensioner
Safety - warning symbol
All the seatbelts (p. 28) are equipped with belt
tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for the occupants.
The warning symbol is shown if a fault is
detected during fault tracing or if a system has
been activated. Where required, the warning
symbol is shown together with a message in the
combined instrument panel (p. 68) information
display.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side.
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. Do not make
any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and
buckles would then possibly not function as
intended in the event of a collision. There is a
risk of serous injury.
Certain markets
An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind the
driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt
if either of them is not wearing one. At low speed,
the audio reminder will sound for the first 6 seconds.
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the airbag system (p. 32) in the analogue combined instrument
panel.
}}
31
SAFETY
||
appears in the display. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
Related information
•
Airbag system
In the event of a frontal collision the airbag system helps to protect the head, face and chest of
the driver and passenger.
General information on safety mode (p. 41)
The warning symbol in the combined instrument
panel illuminates when the remote control key is
in key position II (p. 83). The symbol clears
after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault-free.
G018665
Warning triangle and warning symbol for the airbag system in the digital combined instrument panel.
Airbag system viewed from above, left-hand-drive car.
If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning
triangle illuminates and SRS airbag Service
required or SRS airbag Service urgent
32
G018666
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system
remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means that the airbag system does not
have full functionality. The symbol indicates a
fault in the seatbelt tensioner system, SIPS,
the IC system or some other fault in the system. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
Airbag system viewed from above, right-hand-drive car.
SAFETY
The system consists of airbags and sensors. A
sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and
the airbag(s) are inflated and become hot. The
airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the
occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed
by the collision. When this occurs, smoke
escapes into the car. This is completely normal.
The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
If the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended:
•
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that
you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo
workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
•
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
•
Always contact a doctor.
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is located
in the centre console. If the centre console is
drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to
start the car since the airbags may deploy.
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that
you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo
workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can
make steering difficult. Other safety systems
may also be damaged. The smoke and dust
created when the airbags are deployed can
cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with
cold water. The rapid deployment sequence
and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin
burns.
Related information
•
•
•
Driver airbag (p. 34)
Passenger airbag (p. 34)
Safety - warning symbol (p. 31)
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause
malfunction and result in serious personal
injury.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending on
the nature of the collision and whether or not
the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt
positions.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none)
of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The
detectors sense the force of the collision on
the vehicle and the action is adapted accordingly so that one or more airbags are
deployed.
33
SAFETY
Driver airbag
Passenger airbag
To supplement the protection afforded by the
seatbelt (p. 28) the car is equipped on the driver's side with an airbag (p. 32).
To supplement the protection afforded by the
seatbelt (p. 28) on the passenger side, the car
is equipped with an airbag (p. 32).
This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering
wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a right-hand
drive car.
Related information
•
Label for passenger airbag
Passenger airbag (p. 34)
Location of the front passenger airbag in a left-hand
drive car.
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
34
SAFETY
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
Switch - PACOS*
The front passenger airbag can be deactivated
(p. 36) if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).
WARNING
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and backs
against the backrest. Seatbelts must be
secured.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a seat
protected by an activated airbag. Failure to
follow this advice can lead to death or serious
injury to the child.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
If the car is equipped with an airbag for the
front passenger seat, but does not have a
switch PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
Switch), then the airbag will always be activated.
Related information
•
•
Driver airbag (p. 34)
Child seats (p. 45)
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
* Option/accessory.
35
SAFETY
Passenger airbag - activating/
deactivating*
(children and adults) can sit safely on the
passenger seat.
The front passenger airbag (p. 34) can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch,
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch).
OFF - the airbag is deactivated. With the
switch in this position, children in rear-facing
child seats can sit safely on the front passenger seat.
Check that the switch is in the required position.
The remote control key's key blade (p. 171)
should be used to change position.
WARNING
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat when the passenger airbag is
activated.
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat
when the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
NOTE
Location of airbag switch.
ON- the airbag is activated. With the switch
in this position, all front-facing passengers
36
When the remote control key is in key position II (p. 83) the warning symbol (p. 31) for
the airbag is shown in the combined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds.
G017800
Switch - PACOS
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is
located on the passenger end of the instrument
panel and is accessible when the passenger door
is open.
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated.
A warning symbol in the roof console indicates
that the airbag for the front passenger seat is
activated (see preceding illustration).
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
seat if the passenger airbag is activated and
symbol in the roof console is illumithe
nated to indicate this. Failure to follow this
advice could endanger the life of the child.
Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status
for the front passenger seat airbag.
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Related information
•
2
Side airbag (SIPS)
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts
of the body. The side airbags at the driver's and
front passenger seats protect the chest area and
the hip and are an important part of the SIPS.
G017724
2
Child seats (p. 45)
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front passenger seat if the message in the roof console indicates that the airbag is deactivated,
and if the warning symbol (p. 31) for the airbag system is also displayed on the combined
instrument panel. This indicates that there has
been a severe malfunction. Visit a workshop
as soon as possible. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger the lives of passengers in the car.
G032949
A text message and a symbol in the roof console
indicate that the airbag for the front passenger
seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).
The SIPS bag system consists of two main components, side airbag and sensors. The side airbags are located in the front seat's backrests.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The
airbag deflates when compressed by the collision.
The side airbag is normally only deployed on the
side of the collision.
}}
37
SAFETY
||
WARNING
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
•
Volvo recommends that repairs are only
carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPS-bag
system could cause malfunction and
result in serious personal injury.
•
Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
panel, since this area is required by the
side airbag.
•
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat
covers may impede the operation of the
side airbags.
•
Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
SIPS and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by the side airbag.
Related information
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
38
•
•
•
Driver airbag (p. 34)
Passenger airbag (p. 34)
Inflatable Curtain (IC) (p. 38)
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver
and passengers from striking their heads on the
inside of the car during a collision.
Inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is part of
the SIPS system (p. 37) and the airbag system
(p. 32). It is fitted along both sides of the headlining and helps protect the driver and passengers
in the car's outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is
inflated.
SAFETY
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only designed
for light clothing (not for solid objects such as
umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's
headlining, door pillars or side panels. This
could compromise the intended protection.
Volvo recommends that you only ever use
Volvo genuine parts that are approved for
placement in these areas.
General information on WHIPS
(whiplash protection)
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) is a protection against whiplash injuries. The system
consists of energy absorbing backrests and
specially designed head restraints in the front
seats.
WARNING
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under
the top edge of the windows in the doors.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
•
General information on seatbelts (p. 28)
The WHIPS system is actuated by a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the collision,
}}
39
SAFETY
||
and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an
influence.
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Seat properties
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front
seat backrests are lowered backward to change
the seating position of the driver and front seat
passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash
injury.
WHIPS - seating position
For optimum protection from the WHIPS system
(p. 39) the driver and passenger must have the
correct seating position and make sure that the
system's function is not obstructed.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat's backrest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
Seating position
Set the correct seating position in the front seat
(p. 85) before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the
centre of the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
Function
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may prevent
the WHIPS system from functioning.
WHIPS and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by the WHIPS system.
WARNING
Related information
•
•
40
WHIPS - seating position (p. 40)
General information on seatbelts (p. 28)
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's
seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward
so that it does not make contact with the
folded backrest.
SAFETY
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the
WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the seat
appears to be undamaged.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked even after a minor rear-end collision.
Roll Over Protection System (ROPS)
General information on safety mode
Volvo's Roll-Over Protection System (ROPS)
has been designed to reduce the risk of the car
overturning and to provide the best possible protection in the event of such an accident.
Safety mode is a protective state that is triggered when a collision may have damaged any
of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines,
sensors for any of the safety systems, or the
brake system.
The system consists of two parts, a preventive
stabilising system and a protective system.
The stabilising system Roll Stability Control
(RSC) minimises the risk of overturning, for
example during sudden evasive manoeuvres or if
the car skids.
The RSC system uses a sensor which registers
changes in the car's lateral inclination angle. This
information is used to calculate the risk of the car
overturning. If a risk exists then the ESC system
(p. 191) engages, engine torque is reduced and
one or more wheels are braked until the car has
regained its stability.
If a rollover accident still occurs, the protective
system intervenes and, depending on the situation, may activate the car's seatbelt tensioner
(p. 31) and inflatable curtains (p. 38).
Warning triangle in the analogue combined instrument
panel.
WARNING
Under normal driving conditions, the RSC system improves the car's road safety, but this
must not be seen as an opportunity to
increase speed. Always follow the normal precautions for safe driving.
}}
41
SAFETY
||
Related information
•
Safety mode - attempting to start the car
(p. 42)
•
Safety mode - moving the car (p. 43)
Safety mode - attempting to start
the car
If the car is set in safety mode (p. 41) then an
attempt to start the car can be made if everything seems normal and the absence of fuel
leakage has been checked.
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
Warning triangle in the digital combined instrument
panel.
If the car is involved in a collision, the text Safety
mode See manual may appear in the combined
instrument panel (p. 68) information display.
This means that the car has reduced functionality.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
safety mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to check and
restore the car to normal status after Safety
mode See manual has been displayed.
42
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may
attempt to start the car.
Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to the
effect that the ignition is on, press the start button. Then close the door and reinsert the remote
control key. The car's electronics will now try to
reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to
start the car.
If the message Safety mode See manual is
still shown on the display then the car must not
be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery service
(p. 318) used instead. Even if the car appears to
be driveable, hidden damage may make the car
impossible to control once moving.
SAFETY
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See manual message is displayed. Leave the car at once.
Safety mode - moving the car
General information on child safety
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual has been reset after attempting to
start the car (p. 42) , the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions & attachment devices) which
is designed for fitting in this particular car.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
Safety mode - moving the car (p. 43)
Related information
•
General information on safety mode (p. 41)
Using Volvo's child safety equipment, the optimum conditions are obtained for the child to
travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety
equipment fits well and is simple to use.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to
sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo recommends that children travel in rearfacing child seats until as late an age as possible,
at least up to 3-4 years of age, and then in frontfacing booster cushions/child seats until the
child is 140 cm tall.
NOTE
Legal provisions about the type of child seat
that must be used for children of different
ages and heights vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer for
clearer instructions.
}}
43
SAFETY
||
Child safety locks
The rear doors and the windows in the rear
doors* can be locked manually (p. 184) or electronically (p. 185)* to prevent them being opened
from inside.
Related information
•
•
•
44
Child seats - location (p. 51)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 55)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 59)
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Child seats
Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make
sure that the child seat is being used correctly.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instructions
included.
WARNING
Do not secure the straps of the child seat to
the seat's horizontal adjustment bar, springs
or the rails and beams under the seat. Sharp
edges may damage the straps.
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
Recommended child seats2
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child
seats)
Group 0
Front seat (with activated airbag, only frontfacing child seats)
Outer rear seat
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX
fixture system.
max 10 kg
Group 0+
Type approval: E1 04301146
max 13 kg
(L)
Group 0
Centre rear seat
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant
Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant
Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Group 0+
Type approval: E1 04301146
Type approval: E1 04301146
Type approval: E1 04301146
max 13 kg
(U)
(U)
(U)
max 10 kg
2 With
regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
}}
45
SAFETY
||
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child
seats)
Group 0
Group 0+
Rear-facing child seat (Child
Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt
and straps.
max 13 kg
Type approval: E5 03135
max 10 kg
Front seat (with activated airbag, only frontfacing child seats)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Rear-facing child seat (Child
Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt
and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
(L)
Group 0
max 10 kg
Group 0+
Child seats which are universally
approved.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
(U)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
max 13 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) – rearfacing child seat, secured with
the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Child Seat) – rear-facing child seat, secured
with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
(L)
Group 1
9-18 kg
Rear-facing child seat (Child
Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt
and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
46
Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
Rear-facing child seat (Child
Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt
and straps.
Type approval: E5 03135
(L)
SAFETY
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child
seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only frontfacing child seats)
Group 1
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat,
secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and
straps.
9-18 kg
Type approval: E5 03171
(L)
Group 1
Volvo rear-facing child seat
Volvo rear-facing child seat
9-18 kg
Type approval: E5 04212
Type approval: E5 04212
(L)
(L)
Group 1
Front-facing child seats
which are universally
approved.A
9-18 kg
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
(UF)
Group 2
15-25 kg
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) – rearfacing child seat, secured with
the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Child Seat) – rear-facing child seat, secured
with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) – rearfacing child seat, secured with
the car's seatbelt and straps.
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
}}
47
SAFETY
||
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child
seats)
Group 2
15-25 kg
Front seat (with activated airbag, only frontfacing child seats)
Outer rear seat
Volvo turnable child seat
(Volvo Convertible Child
Seat) - front-facing child
seat, secured with the
car's seatbelt.
Volvo turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible
Child Seat) - front-facing child seat, secured
with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5
04191
Centre rear seat
Type approval: E5 04191
(U)
(U)
Group 2
Volvo rear-facing child seat
Volvo rear-facing child seat
15-25 kg
Type approval: E5 04212
Type approval: E5 04212
(L)
(L)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Volvo booster seat with
backrest (Volvo Booster
Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1
04301169
(UF)
48
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo
Booster Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with
backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
SAFETY
Weight
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child
seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only frontfacing child seats)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Booster cushion with
and without backrest
(Booster Cushion with
and without backrest).
Booster cushion with and without backrest
(Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion
with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5
04216
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
(UF)
Group 2/3
Volvo booster seat
Volvo booster seat
Volvo booster seat
15-36 kg
Type approval: E1
04301312
Type approval: E1 04301312
Type approval: E1 04301312
(UF, L)
(UF)
(UF)
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Integrated booster cushion (Integrated
Booster Cushion) - available as a factory fitted option.
Type approval: E5 04189
(B)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
}}
49
SAFETY
||
50
Related information
•
•
•
•
Child seats - location (p. 51)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 59)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 55)
General information on child safety (p. 43)
SAFETY
Child seats - location
Label for passenger airbag
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size.
You may place:
•
a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat when the passenger airbag is deactivated.
•
a front-facing child seat/booster cushion on
the front passenger seat when the passenger airbag is activated.
•
one or more child seats/booster cushions in
the rear seat.
WARNING
G020739
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on a seat
protected by an activated airbag. Failure to
follow this advice can lead to death or serious
injury to the child.
WARNING
Always fit rear-facing child seats (p. 45) in the
rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated
(p. 36). If a child is sitting on the front passenger
seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rearfacing child seats can be fitted on the front passenger seat.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
}}
51
SAFETY
||
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must
not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt
buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
Child seat - two-stage booster seat*
The integrated booster seats in the rear seat
allow children to sit comfortably and safely.
The booster cushions are specially designed to
provide optimum safety. In combination with the
seatbelt (p. 28) they are approved for children
who weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are
at least 95 cm in height.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to country.
Check what does apply.
Incorrect positioning, the seatbelt must not be placed
beneath the shoulder.
Check before driving that:
Related information
•
•
•
•
Child seats (p. 45)
General information on child safety (p. 43)
Child seats - upper mounting points (p. 59)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 55)
Correct position, the seatbelt should be positioned in on
the shoulder.
•
the integrated two-stage booster seat is correctly set in accordance with the table
(p. 53) and in locked position
•
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
•
the seatbelt does not lie across the child's
throat or below the shoulder (see preceding
illustrations)
•
the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned
low over the pelvis to provide optimal protection.
Adjusting the booster seat's two levels is performed by raising (p. 53) and lowering (p. 54).
52
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repair or replacement
is only carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Do not make any modifications or
additions to the booster cushion. If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to
a major load, such as in conjunction with a
collision, the entire booster cushion must be
replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears
to be undamaged, it may not afford the same
level of protection. The booster cushion must
also be replaced if it is heavily worn.
Two-stage booster seat* - raising
The integrated booster seat (p. 52) in the rear
seat can be folded up into two stages. How
many stages the cushion should be folded up
depends on the child's weight.
Weight
Stage 1
Stage 2
22-36 kg
15-25 kg
Stage 13
Press the booster cushion backwards to lock.
WARNING
If the instructions for the two-stage booster
seat are not followed then the child could
sustain serious injury in the event of an accident.
Pull the handle forward and up in order to
release the booster cushion.
3 Lower
}}
stage.
* Option/accessory.
53
SAFETY
||
Two-stage booster seat* - lowering
Stage 24
The integrated booster seat (p. 52) in the rear
seat can be folded down from the upper or
lower stage to fully lowered position in the seat
cushion. However, it is not possible to adjust the
booster cushion from the upper stage to the
lower stage.
Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge
and press it back against the backrest to
lock.
Start from the lower stage. Press the button.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the booster seat
from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be reset
by being fully folded down (p. 54) into the
seat cushion.
Pull the handle forwards to release the cushion.
Related information
•
4 Upper
54
Two-stage booster seat* - lowering (p. 54)
stage.
* Option/accessory.
SAFETY
Child seat - ISOFIX
ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats
(p. 45) that is based on an international standard.
Related information
•
•
•
ISOFIX - size classes (p. 56)
ISOFIX - types of child seat (p. 57)
General information on child safety (p. 43)
Press down with your hand in the centre of
the cushion in order to lock it.
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.
toys) left behind in the space under the cushion before lowering.
NOTE
Before the rear backrest is lowered, the
booster cushion must be lowered first.
Related information
•
Two-stage booster seat* - raising (p. 53)
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are
concealed behind the lower section of the rear
seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated
by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see preceding illustration).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
ISOFIX mounting points.
* Option/accessory.
55
SAFETY
ISOFIX - size classes
There is a size classification for child seats using
the ISOFIX (p. 55) fixture system in order to
assist users in choosing the correct type of child
seat (p. 57).
Size
class
Description
A
Full size, front-facing child seat
B
Reduced size (alt. 1), front-facing
child seat
B1
Reduced size (alt. 2), front-facing
child seat
C
Full size, rear-facing child seat
D
Reduced size, rear-facing child
seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
F
Transverse infant seat, left-hand
G
Transverse infant seat, right-hand
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
56
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classification, the car model must be included on the
vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations
about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
SAFETY
ISOFIX - types of child seat
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in different sizes. This means that not all child seats
are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Type of child seat
Infant seat transverse
Infant seat, rear-facing
Weight
max 10 kg
max 10 kg
Size class
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
F
X
X
G
X
X
E
X
OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing
max 13 kg
E
X
OK
(IL)
D
X
OK
(IL)
C
X
OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing
9-18 kg
D
X
OK
(IL)
C
X
OK
(IL)
}}
57
SAFETY
||
Type of child seat
Front-facing child seat
Weight
9-18 kg
Size class
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
B
X
OKA
B1
X
(IUL)
OKA
(IUL)
A
X
OKA
(IUL)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for a particular car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Make sure you select the right size class (p. 56)
of child seat with ISOFIX (p. 55) fixture system.
58
SAFETY
Child seats - upper mounting points
NOTE
The car is equipped with upper mounting points
for certain front-facing child seats (p. 45). These
mounting points are located on the rear of the
seat.
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage
compartment, this must be removed before
child seats can be attached to the securing
points.
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
The child seat's straps must always be drawn
through the hole in the head restraint leg
before they are tensioned at the attachment
point.
The upper mounting points are primarily intended
for use with front-facing child seats. Volvo recommends that small children should sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age as possible.
Related information
•
•
•
General information on child safety (p. 43)
Child seats - location (p. 51)
Child seat - ISOFIX (p. 55)
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate
fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats.
59
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls, left-hand
drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
62
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Overview, left-hand drive cars
}}
63
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
64
Function
See
Function
See
Function
See
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam,
trip computer
(p. 115),
(p. 118),
(p. 101),
(p. 95) and
(p. 119).
Door handle
-
Control panel
(p. 92),
(p. 302) and
(p. 180).
Seat adjustment*
(p. 86).
Manual gear changing
in an automatic gearbox*
(p. 278).
(p. 179),
(p. 185),
(p. 106) and
(p. 108).
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler
flap and tailgate
Cruise control*
(p. 198) and
(p. 204).
Horn, airbags
(p. 90) and
(p. 32).
Combined instrument
panel
(p. 68).
Menu navigation,
audio control, phone
control*
(p. 118) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
START/STOP
ENGINE button
Hazard warning flashers
(p. 100).
Control panel for infotainment system and
menu navigation
(p. 118) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Control panel for climate control
(p. 135).
Gear selector
(p. 276) or
(p. 278).
Controls for active
chassis (Four-C)*
(p. 190).
(p. 270).
Wipers and washing
(p. 104).
(p. 83).
Steering wheel
adjustment
(p. 90).
Ignition switch
Screen for infotainment system and display of menus
(p. 118) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Bonnet opener
(p. 347).
Parking brake
(p. 295).
Related information
•
•
•
Outside temperature gauge (p. 77)
Trip meter (p. 77)
Clock (p. 78)
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls, righthand drive car - overview
The overview shows where the car's displays
and controls are located.
}}
65
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
66
Overview, right-hand drive cars
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Function
See
Function
See
Function
See
Screen for infotainment system and display of menus
(p. 118) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Control panel
(p. 179),
(p. 185),
(p. 106) and
(p. 108).
Control panel for infotainment system and
menu navigation
(p. 118) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
Ignition switch
(p. 83).
Seat adjustment*
(p. 86).
(p. 100).
START/STOP
ENGINE button
(p. 270).
Manual gear changing
in an automatic gearbox*
(p. 278).
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler
flap and tailgate
(p. 92),
(p. 302) and
(p. 180).
Hazard warning flashers
Parking brake
(p. 295).
Cruise control*
(p. 198) and
(p. 204).
Bonnet opener
(p. 347).
(p. 90).
Combined instrument
panel
(p. 68).
Steering wheel
adjustment
Horn, airbags
(p. 90) and
(p. 32).
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam,
trip computer
Menu navigation,
audio control, phone
control*
(p. 118) and
the Sensus
Infotainment
supplement.
(p. 115),
(p. 118),
(p. 101),
(p. 95) and
(p. 119).
Gear selector
(p. 276) or
(p. 278).
Wipers and washing
(p. 104).
Controls for active
chassis (Four-C)*
(p. 190).
Door handle
-
Control panel for climate control
(p. 135).
Related information
•
•
•
Outside temperature gauge (p. 77)
Trip meter (p. 77)
Clock (p. 78)
* Option/accessory.
67
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Combined instrument panel
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the car's
functions, as well as messages.
•
Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 68)
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 69)
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 73)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
warning symbols (p. 75)
Analogue combined instrument
panel - overview
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the car's
functions, as well as messages.
Information display
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indicator
symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer (p. 119) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 302).
Information display, analogue instrument panel.
The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's
functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as
well as messages. The information is shown with
symbols and text. There are further descriptions
under the functions that use the display.
1
68
Gauges and indicators
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
Eco meter. The meter provides an indication
of how economically the car is being driven.
The higher the reading on the scale, the
more economically the car is driven.
Speedometer
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
Gear shift indicator2/Gear position indicator3
See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 277) or
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 278).
Indicator and warning symbols
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols, apart from
symbols in the centre of the information display,
illuminate in key position II or when the engine is
started. When the engine has started, all the
symbols should go out except the parking brake
symbol, which only goes out when the brake is
disengaged.
Digital combined instrument panel overview
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the car's
functions, as well as messages.
Information display
If the engine does not start or if the functionality
check is carried out in key position II then all
symbols go out within a few seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system
and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Related information
•
•
•
Indicator and warning symbols, analogue instrument
panel.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols4
2
3
4
Combined instrument panel (p. 68)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 73)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
warning symbols (p. 75)
Information display, digital instrument panel*.
The combined instrument panel's information display shows information on some of the car's
functions, e.g. cruise control and trip computer, as
well as messages. The information is shown with
symbols and text. There are further descriptions
under the functions that use the display.
Manual gearbox.
Automatic gearbox.
Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For more information, see
Engine oil - general (p. 349).
* Option/accessory.
}}
69
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Gauges and indicators
Theme "Elegance"
Theme "Eco"
Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".
Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".
Alternative themes can be selected for the digital
combined instrument panel. Possible themes are
"Elegance", "Eco" and "Performance".
A theme can only be selected when the engine is
running.
To select the theme, press the left-hand stalk
switch's OK button and select the Themes
menu option by turning the thumbwheel on the
lever. Press the OK button. Turn the thumbwheel
to select the theme and confirm the selection by
pressing the OK button.
On certain model variants, the appearance of the
centre console's screen follows the theme
selected for the combined instrument panel.
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking5, the yellow indicator
symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer (p. 119) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 302).
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking5, the yellow indicator
symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer (p. 119) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 302).
For more information on menu navigation, see
Menu navigation - combined instrument panel
(p. 115).
Temperature gauge for engine coolant.
Eco guide. See also Eco guide & Power
guide* (p. 72).
The choice of theme and setting of contrast
mode and colour mode can be stored for each
remote control key in the car key memory*, see
Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 165).
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
The contrast mode and colour mode for the
instrument can also be set using the left-hand
stalk switch.
5
6
7
70
Speedometer.
Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7
See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 277) or
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 278).
Speedometer.
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7.
See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 277) or
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 278).
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
Manual gearbox.
Automatic gearbox.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Theme "Performance"
Power guide. See also Eco guide & Power
guide* (p. 72).
Gear shift indicator6/Gear position indicator7.
See also Gear shift indicator* (p. 277) or
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 278).
Indicator and warning symbols
If the engine does not start or if the functionality
check is carried out in key position II then all
symbols go out within a few seconds except the
symbol for faults in the car's emissions system
and the symbol for low oil pressure.
Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking5, the yellow indicator
symbol for low level in the fuel tank is illuminated. See also Trip computer (p. 119) and
Filling up with fuel (p. 302).
Temperature gauge for engine coolant.
Speedometer.
Tachometer. The meter indicates engine
speed in thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
5
6
7
8
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols, apart from
symbols in the centre of the information display,
illuminate in key position II or when the engine is
started. When the engine has started, all the
symbols should go out except the parking brake
symbol, which only goes out when the brake is
disengaged.
Related information
•
•
Indicator and warning symbols, digital instrument panel.
Indicator symbols
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 68)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 73)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
warning symbols (p. 75)
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols8
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
Manual gearbox.
Automatic gearbox.
Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For more information, see
Engine oil - general (p. 349).
* Option/accessory.
71
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Eco guide & Power guide*
Instantaneous value
Eco guide and Power guide are two combined
instrument panel (p. 68) instruments which help
the driver to drive the car with optimum driving
economy.
Average value
The car also stores statistics of journeys made,
which can be viewed in the form of a block diagram; see Trip computer - trip statistics*
(p. 127).
Eco guide
This instrument provides an indication of how
economically the car is being driven.
To view this function, select the theme "Eco"; see
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 69).
To view this function, select the theme
"Performance"; see Digital combined instrument
panel - overview (p. 69).
Instantaneous value
The instantaneous value is shown here - the
higher the reading on the scale, the better.
The instantaneous value is calculated based on
speed, engine speed, engine power utilised plus
use of the foot brake.
Optimum speed (50-80 km/h (30-50 mph)) and
low engine speeds are encouraged. The pointers
fall during acceleration and braking.
Very low instantaneous values illuminate the red
zone on the meter (with a short delay), which
means poor driving economy and hence should
be avoided.
Average value
The average value slowly follows the instantaneous value and describes how the car has been
driven most recently. The higher the pointers on
the scale, the better the economy achieved by
the driver.
Power guide
This instrument shows the relationship between
how much power (Power) is being taken from the
engine and how much power is available.
Available engine power
Engine power utilised
Available engine power
The smaller, upper pointer shows the available
engine power9. The higher the reading on the
scale, the more power is available in the current
gear.
Engine power utilised
The larger, lower pointer shows the engine power
utilised9. The higher the reading on the scale, the
more power is being taken from the engine.
A large gap between the two pointers indicates a
large power reserve.
9
72
Power is dependent on engine speed.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Combined instrument panel meaning of indicator symbols
Symbol
Main beam On
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a function is activated, that the system is operating, or
that an error or failure has occurred.
Left-hand direction indicator
Indicator symbols
Symbol
Specification
Emissions system
Rear fog lamp on
Stability system, see Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 191)
Stability system, sport mode, see
Electronic stability control (ESC) operation (p. 192)
Engine preheater (diesel)
Low level in fuel tank
Information, read display text
If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to a
workshop to have the ABS system checked.
Volvo recommends that you seek assistance
from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Start/Stop, the engine auto-stopped; see Start/Stop* - function and
operation (p. 285)
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with
constant glow then there is a fault in the system.
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in the
ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates after the engine has
been started then it may be due to a fault in the
car's emissions system. Drive to a workshop for
checking. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the system is not
working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS function.
1.
3.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is
switched on.
Tyre pressure system , see Tyre
pressure monitoring* (p. 332)
ABS fault
Restart the engine.
Right-hand direction indicator
Specification
ABL fault
2.
Stability system, sport mode
The symbol illuminates when the sport mode is
activated. Sport mode allows for a more active
driving experience. The system then detects
whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel
movements and cornering are more active than in
normal driving and then allows controlled skidding of the rear section up to a certain level
before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
Engine preheater (diesel)
This symbol illuminates during engine preheating.
Preheating takes place mostly due to low temperature.
Low level in fuel tank
When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel
tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
}}
* Option/accessory.
73
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems does not behave
as intended, this information symbol illuminates
and a text appears on the information display.
The message text is cleared with the OK button,
see Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 115), or it disappears automatically
after a time (time depending on which function is
indicated). The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the symbol and message are cleared using the OK
button, or disappear automatically after a
time.
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
and with main beam flash.
Left/right-hand direction indicator
Both direction indicator symbols flash when the
hazard warning flashers are used.
Start/Stop
The symbol shines when the engine is auto-stopped.
10
74
Tyre pressure system
The symbol illuminates in the event of low tyre
pressure, or if a fault arises in the tyre pressure
system.
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors is not closed properly then the
information or warning symbol illuminates
together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as
soon as possible and close the door that is open.
Related information
•
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 68)
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
warning symbols (p. 75)
•
Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 68)
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 69)
If the car is driven at a speed lower than
approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the
information symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher than
approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the
warning symbol illuminates.
If the bonnet10 is not closed properly then the
warning symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display. Stop
the car in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the bonnet.
If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
information symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display. Stop
the car in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the tailgate.
Only cars with alarm*.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Combined instrument cluster meaning of warning symbols
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated, or that a serious
error or a serious failure has occurred.
Warning symbols
Symbol
Specification
Low oil pressureA
Parking brake applied (digital
instrument panel)
Parking brake applied (analogue
instrument panel)
Airbags – SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
Warning
A
Certain engine variants do not have systems to warn of oil pressure loss. In cars with these variants the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warning for low oil level is via display text. For
more information, see Engine oil - general (p. 349).
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during driving then the
engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine
immediately and check the engine oil level, top
up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the
oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault
has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a
workshop. Volvo recommends that you seek
assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
when the parking brake is applied. The symbol
flashes during application, and then changes over
to a constant glow.
A flashing symbol in any other situation means
that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the
information display.
For more information, see Parking brake
(p. 295).
Airbags – SRS
If the symbol remains illuminated or illuminates
while driving, a fault has been detected in one of
the car's safety systems. Drive to a workshop for
checking as soon as possible. Volvo recommends
that you seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol flashes if someone in a front seat
has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a
rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
}}
75
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place and
check the level in the brake fluid reservoir; see
Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 354).
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the
same time, there may be a fault in the brake
force distribution system.
1.
Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the
engine.
2.
Restart the engine.
•
If both symbols extinguish, continue driving.
•
If the symbols remain illuminated, check
the level in the brake fluid reservoir; see
Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 354). If
the brake fluid level is normal but the
symbols are still illuminated, the car can
be driven, with great care, to a workshop
to have the brake system checked. Volvo
recommends that you seek assistance
from an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated
by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors is not closed properly then the
information or warning symbol illuminates
together with an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as
soon as possible and close the door that is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower than
approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the
information symbol illuminates.
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault
has been indicated which could affect the safety
and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text
is shown on the information display at the same
time. The symbol remains visible until the fault
has been rectified but the text message can be
cleared with the OK button; see Menu navigation
- combined instrument panel (p. 115). The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with
other symbols.
If the car is driven at a speed higher than
approx. 7 km/h (approx. 4 mph) then the
warning symbol illuminates.
1.
76
Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accordance
with the message in the display. Clear the
message using the OK button.
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the
same time, there is a risk that the rear end will
skid during heavy braking.
Action:
11
2.
Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car further.
If the bonnet11 is not closed properly then the
warning symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display. Stop
the car in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the bonnet.
If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
information symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display. Stop
the car in a safe place as soon as possible and
close the tailgate.
Only cars with alarm*.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Related information
•
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 68)
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 73)
•
Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 68)
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 69)
Outside temperature gauge
Trip meter
The display for the outside temperature gauge
appears in the combined instrument panel.
The trip meter display appears in the combined
instrument panel.
Display for outside temperature gauge, digital instrument panel
Display for outside temperature gauge, analogue instrument panel
When the temperature lies between +2 °C to -5
°C a snowflake symbol illuminates in the display.
This warns of icy roads. If the car has been stationary, the gauge may display a reading that is
too high.
Related information
•
Combined instrument panel (p. 68)
Trip meter, digital instrument panel.
Display for trip meter12
Both trip meters T1 and T2 are used to measure
short distances. The distance is shown in the display.
Turn the left-hand stalk switch's thumbwheel to
show the required meter.
A long press (until the change occurs) on the
left-hand stalk switch RESET button resets the
trip meter shown. For more information, see Trip
computer (p. 119).
Related information
•
12
Combined instrument panel (p. 68)
Display appearance may differ depending on instrument variant.
77
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Clock
The clock display appears in the combined
instrument panel.
Combined instrument panel license agreement
A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone
else's entitlement according to the terms and
conditions in the agreement. The following text is
Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer/developer.
Combined Instrument Panel Software
Open Source Software Notice
Clock, digital instrument panel.
Display for showing the time13
Setting the clock
The clock can be adjusted in the menu system
MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 118).
Related information
•
13
78
Combined instrument panel (p. 68)
The time is shown in the centre of an analogue instrument panel.
This product uses certain free / open source and
other software originating from third parties, that
is subject to the GNU Lesser General Public
License version 2 (LGPLv2), The FreeType
Project License ("FreeType License") and other
different and/or additional copy right licenses,
disclaimers and notices. The links to access the
exact terms of LGPLv2, and the other open
source software licenses, disclaimers,
acknowledgements and notices are provided to
you below. Please refer to the exact terms of the
relevant License, regarding your rights under said
licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers to
provide the source code of said free/open source
software to you for a charge covering the cost of
performing such distribution, such as the cost of
media, shipping and handling, upon written
request. Please contact your nearest Volvo
Dealer.
The offer is valid for a period of at least three (3)
years from the date of the distribution of this
product by VCC / or for as long as VCC offers
spare parts or customer support.
Portions of this product uses software
copyrighted © 2007 The FreeType Project
(www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
Portions of this product uses software with
Copyright © 1994–2013 Lua.org, PUC-Rio
(http://www.lua.org/)
This product includes software under
following licenses:
LGPL v2.1: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/oldlicenses/lgpl-2.1.html
•
•
GNU FriBidi
DevIL
The FreeType Project License: http://
git.savannah.gnu.org/cgit/freetype/freetype2.git/
tree/docs/FTL.TXT
•
FreeType 2
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
MIT License: http://opensource.org/licenses/
mit-license.html
•
Lua
Symbols in the display
Symbol
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided into
warning, indicator and information symbols.
Shown below are the most common symbols with
their meanings and a reference to where in the
manual further information can be found.
- Red warning symbol, illuminates when a
fault has been indicated which could affect the
safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown in the information display in the
combined instrument panel at the same time.
- Information symbol, illuminates in combination with text in the information display in the
combined instrument panel, when a deviation in
any of the car's systems has occurred. The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction
with other symbols.
Warning symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
Specification
See
Low oil pressure
(p. 75)
Parking brake
applied
(p. 75),
(p. 295)
Specification
See
Parking brake
applied, alternative
symbol
(p. 75)
Airbags – SRS
(p. 31),
(p. 75)
Seatbelt reminder
(p. 28),
(p. 75)
Alternator not
charging
(p. 75)
Fault in brake system
(p. 75),
(p. 292)
Warning, safety
mode
(p. 31),
(p. 41),
(p. 75)
Control symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
Specification
See
ABL fault*
(p. 73),
(p. 98)
Emissions system
(p. 73)
ABS fault
(p. 73),
(p. 292)
}}
* Option/accessory.
79
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
80
Symbol
Specification
See
Rear fog lamp on
(p. 73),
(p. 99)
Stability system,
ESC (Electronic Stability Control), Hill
descent control,
Trailer stability
assist
(p. 73),
(p. 283),
(p. 193),
(p. 315)
Stability system,
sport mode
(p. 73),
(p. 193)
Engine preheater
(diesel)
(p. 73)
Low level in fuel
tank
(p. 73),
(p. 147)
Information, read
display text
(p. 73)
Main beam On
(p. 73),
(p. 95)
Left-hand direction
indicators
(p. 73)
Right-hand direction
indicators
(p. 73)
Start/Stop*, engine
auto-stopped
(p. 73),
(p. 290)
Symbol
Specification
See
Tyre pressure system*
(p. 73),
(p. 332)
Information symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
-
Specification
See
Cruise control*
(p. 198)
Adaptive cruise control*
(p. 215)
Adaptive cruise control*, time interval
(p. 204),
(p. 206)
Adaptive cruise control*, Distance Warning* (Distance Alert)
(p. 209),
(p. 201)
Radar sensor*
(p. 215),
(p. 203),
(p. 238)
-
-
Windscreen sensor*,
Camera sensor*,
Laser sensor*
(p. 96),
(p. 228),
(p. 238),
(p. 250),
(p. 254)
Symbol
Specification
See
Auto Brake*, Distance Warning* (Distance Alert), City
SafetyTM, Collision
warning system*
(p. 203),
(p. 228),
(p. 238)
ABL system*
(p. 98)
Driver Alert System*,
Time for a break
(p. 249)
Driver Alert System*,
Time for a break
(p. 250)
Parking brake
(p. 295)
Rain sensor*
(p. 104)
Active main beam,
AHB (Active High
Beam)*
(p. 96)
Start/Stop*
(p. 290)
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Symbol
Specification
See
Start/Stop*
(p. 290)
Driver Alert System*,
Lane Departure
Warning (LDW)
(p. 250),
(p. 254)
Driver Alert System*,
Lane Departure
Warning*
(p. 252)
Driver Alert System*,
Lane Departure
Warning*
(p. 254)
Recorded speed
information*
(p. 245)
Engine block and
passenger compartment heater*
(p. 147)
Engine block heater
and passenger compartment heater*
Service required
(p. 147)
Activated timer*
(p. 147)
Symbol
Specification
See
Activated timer*
(p. 147)
Low battery
(p. 147)
Fuel filler flap, righthand side
(p. 302)
Gear shift indicator
(p. 277)
Gear positions
(p. 278)
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol
Specification
See
Seatbelt reminder
(p. 30)
Airbag, passenger seat,
activated
(p. 36)
Airbag, passenger seat,
deactivated
(p. 36)
Related information
-
Measuring the oil
level
(p. 350)
-
-
•
Combined instrument panel - meaning of
indicator symbols (p. 73)
•
Combined instrument cluster - meaning of
warning symbols (p. 75)
•
Messages - handling (p. 118)
* Option/accessory.
81
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Volvo Sensus
Volvo Sensus is the heart of the personal Volvo
experience and connects you with the car and
outside world. Sensus provides information,
entertainment and assistance when it is needed.
Sensus consists of intuitive functions that both
enhance the car journey and simplifies ownership of the car.
be personalised by means of an intuitive user
interface. Settings can be made in Car settings,
Audio and media, Climate control, etc.
With the centre console buttons and controls or
the steering wheel's right-hand keypad* functions
can be activated or deactivated and many different settings can be made.
With a press on MY CAR all settings related to
the driving and control of the car are presented,
such as City Safety, locks and alarm, automatic
fan speed, setting the clock, etc.
With a press on the respective function RADIO,
*, NAV* and CAM14 other
MEDIA, TEL*,
sources, systems and functions can be activated,
e.g. AM, FM, CD, DVD*, TV*, Bluetooth®*, navigation* and park assist camera*.
An intuitive navigation structure makes it possible
to receive relevant support, information and
entertainment when it is necessary, without distracting the driver.
Sensus covers all the car's solutions that enable
connection* to the outside world and provides
you with intuitive control over all the car's capabilities.
Volvo Sensus combines and presents many functions in several of the car's systems on the centre
console's screen. With Volvo Sensus the car can
14
82
Overview
For more information about all functions/
systems, see the relevant section in the owner's
manual or its supplement.
Control panel in centre console. The figure is schematic
- the number of functions and layout of the buttons both
vary, depending on the equipment selected and the market.
Navigation* - NAV, see separate supplement
(Sensus Navigation).
Audio and media - RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, see
separate supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
Function settings - MY CAR, see MY CAR
(p. 118).
Internet-connected car *, see separate
supplement (Sensus Infotainment).
Climate control system (p. 130).
Park assist camera* (p. 264) – CAM*.
Applies to certain car models.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Key positions
Insert the remote control key
The remote control key can be used to set the
vehicle's electrical system in different modes/
levels so that different functions are available;
see Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 83).
1.
2.
Hold the end of the remote control key with
the detachable key blade and insert the
remote control key in the ignition switch.
Then press the remote control key in the
ignition switch up to its end position.
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch can
impair the function or destroy the lock.
Key positions - functions at different
levels
To enable the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off, the car's electrical system can be set in 3 different levels - 0, I
and II - with the remote control key. This owner's
manual describes these levels throughout using
the denomination "key positions".
The following table shows the functions available
in each key position/level.
Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned - hold the end with the detachable key blade, see Detachable key blade detaching/attaching (p. 171).
Remove the remote control key
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/
inserted.
Grip the remote control key and pull it out from
the ignition switch.
NOTE
For cars with the keyless start and lock system* the remote control key does not need to
be inserted into the ignition switch but can be
stored in e.g. a pocket. For more information
on the keyless start and lock system, see
Keyless drive* (p. 174).
}}
* Option/accessory.
83
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Level
Functions
0
•
Odometer, clock and temperature
gauge are illuminated.
•
Electrically operated seats can be
adjusted.
•
The audio system can be used for
a limited time - see the Sensus
Infotainment supplement.
I
•
II
Panorama roof, power windows,
12 V socket in the passenger
compartment, navigation, phone,
ventilation fan and windscreen
wipers can be used.
•
•
The headlamps come on.
•
Several other systems are activated. However, electric heating in
seat cushions and the rear window
can only be activated after starting
the engine.
84
•
Key position 0 - Unlock the car - This
means that the car's electrical system is at
level 0.
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake/clutch
pedal when these key positions are due to be
selected.
•
Key position I - With the remote control key
fully inserted into the ignition switch15 Briefly press START/STOP ENGINE.
•
Key position II - With the remote control
key fully inserted into the ignition switch15 Give a long16 press on START/STOP
ENGINE.
•
Back to key position 0 - To return to key
position 0 from position II and I - Briefly
press on START/STOP ENGINE.
Warning/indicator lamps illuminate
for 5 seconds.
This key position consumes a lot of
current from the starter battery and
should therefore be avoided!
15
16
Selecting key position/level
Starting and stopping the engine
For information about starting/stopping the
engine, see Starting the engine (p. 270).
Towing
For important information about the remote control key during towing, see Towing (p. 316).
Related information
•
Key positions (p. 83)
Audio system
For information on audio system functions with
remote control key removed, see the Sensus
Infotainment supplement.
Not required for cars with keyless start and lock system*.
Approx. 2 seconds.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Seats, front
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before
setting off, never while driving. Make sure that
the seat is in locked position in order to avoid
personal injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
4.
Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it is
properly locked after being folded up in order
to avoid personal injury in the event of sudden
braking or an accident.
Lowering the passenger seat
backrest*17
Related information
•
•
Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 86)
Seats, rear (p. 87)
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust
the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after
changing position.
Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
17
The passenger seat's backrest can be folded forward to make room for long loads.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
Move the seat as far back/down as possible.
Change the lumbar support*, press the button.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Control panel for power seat*, see Seats,
front - electrically operated* (p. 86).
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest
and fold it forward.
Only applies to comfort seats.
* Option/accessory.
85
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Seats, front - electrically operated*
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort. The power
seat can be moved forward/backward and up/
down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be
raised/lowered. The backrest angle and lumbar
support* can be changed.
Power seat
The power seats have overload protection which
is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this
should happen, set the car's electrical system in
key position I or 0 and wait a short time before
adjusting the seat again.
Store setting
Memory button
Memory button
Memory button
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down/
inward/outward) can be made at a time.
Button for storing settings
Preparations
1.
Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
The seat can be adjusted for a certain time after
unlocking the door with the remote control key
without the key in the ignition switch. Seat adjustment is normally made in key position I and can
always be made when the engine is running.
2.
Press and hold button M while pressing button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously. Hold the buttons depressed until the acoustic signal is
heard and text is shown in the combined
instrument panel.
Seat with memory function*
The seat must be adjusted again before a new
memory can be set.
The setting for lumbar support is not stored.
Using a stored setting
Press one of the memory buttons 1-3 until the
seat and the door mirrors stop. If the button is
released, the movement of the seat and door mirrors will be interrupted.
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Raise/lower seat
Key memory* in remote control key
Seat, forward/backward
Backrest rake
Lumbar support* is adjusted inward and outward
18
86
The memory function stores settings for the seat
and the door mirrors.
All remote control keys can be used by different
drivers to store the settings for the driver's seat
and door mirrors18, see Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 165).
Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and power retractable door mirrors. The setting for lumbar support is not stored.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Emergency stop
Seats, rear
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one
of the setting buttons for the seat or memory
buttons in order to stop the seat.
The rear seat backrest and the outer seat head
restraints can be folded. The centre seat head
restraint can be adjusted to suit the height of the
passenger.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
WARNING
The centre seat head restraint must be in its
lowest position when the centre seat is not
used. When the centre seat is used, the head
restraint must be correctly adjusted to the
height of the passenger so that it covers the
whole of the back of the head if possible.
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do
not play with the controls. Check that there
are no objects in front of, behind or under the
seat during adjustment. Make sure that none
of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger
of becoming trapped.
Heated seats
For heated seats, see Heated front seats*
(p. 136) and Heated rear seat* (p. 137).
Related information
•
•
Seats, front (p. 85)
Seats, rear (p. 87)
Adjust the head restraint according to passenger
height so that the whole of the back of the head
is covered if possible. Slide it up as required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button
(located in the centre between the backrest and
head restraint, see illustration) must be pressed
in while the head restraint is pressed down carefully.
}}
* Option/accessory.
87
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
The triple-section backrest can be folded in different ways.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests can
be fully folded forward.
•
Pull the locking handle closest to the head
restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
The head restraint is moved back manually until a
"click" can be heard.
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked position after being raised.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear
seat upholstery.
88
•
•
The left-hand section can be folded separately.
The centre section can be folded separately.
The right-hand section can only be folded
together with the centre section.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
If the centre backrest is being lowered release and adjust the head restraint for the
centre backrest, see the earlier section
"Head restraint, centre seat, rear".
Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints*
Related information
•
•
Seats, front (p. 85)
Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 86)
If the centre backrest is being lowered release and adjust the head restraint for the
centre backrest, see the earlier section
"Head restraint, centre seat, rear".
The outer head restraints are lowered automatically when the outer backrests are lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking handle
while folding the backrest forward at the
same time. A red indicator on the lock catch
shows that the backrest is no longer
locked in place.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it is
still showing then the backrest is not locked
in place.
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head restraints
in the rear seat are locked properly after
being folded up.
1.
The remote control key must be in key position II.
2.
Press the button to lower the rear outer head
restraints to improve rearward visibility.
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if there
are passengers in any of the outer seats.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked position after being raised.
* Option/accessory.
89
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different
positions and has controls for horn and cruise
control, as well as menu, audio and phone control.
Adjusting
3.
Push back the lever to fix the steering wheel
in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering
wheel lightly at the same time as you push
the lever back.
Keypads* and paddles*
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away.
With speed related power steering* the level of
steering force can be adjusted, see Adjustable
steering force* (p. 190).
Keypads and paddles in the steering wheel.
Cruise control* (p. 198)* and Adaptive cruise
control - ACC* (p. 204)*.
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Possible steering wheel positions
Paddle for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox, see Automatic gearbox Geartronic* (p. 278).
Audio and phone control, see supplement,
Sensus Infotainment.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
90
1.
The lever is pulled towards the driver to
release the steering wheel.
2.
Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
suits you.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Horn
Heating* of the steering wheel
The steering wheel can be heated with electric
heating.
perature is below approx. 10 °C. Activate/deactivate the function in the menu system MY CAR
(p. 118).
Function
Horn.
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
Related information
•
Heating* of the steering wheel (p. 91)
Button position may vary depending on equipment
selected and market.
Repeatedly press the button to switch
between the following functions:
Function
Indicator
Switched off
Button lamp extinguished
Heating
Button lamp illuminated
Automatic steering wheel heating
With activated automatic start of steering wheel
heating, the heating of the steering wheel starts
when the engine is started. Automatic start takes
place when the car is cold and the ambient tem-
* Option/accessory.
91
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Light switches
The headlamp control activates and adjusts the
external lighting. It is also used to adjust display
and instrument lighting and ambience lights
(p. 102).
Knob positions
Position
Daytime running lights, position
lamps rear and side marker lamps
in daylight when the car's electrical
system is in key position II or the
engine is running.
NOTE
The same lamps are used for daytime running
lights and front position lamps. The brightness is higher when the lamps are used as
daytime running lights.
Position
Dipped beam and position lamps/
side marker lamps in weak daylight
or darkness, or when the rear fog
lamp or windscreen wipers with
continuous wiping are activated.
Specification
Daytime running lightsA when the
car's electrical system is in key
position II or the engine is running.
The tunnel detection (p. 95)*
function is activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting as well as ambience lights*
Button for rear fog lamp
Knob for lighting while driving and parking
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
A car with active xenon headlamps* has automatic headlamp levelling and therefore does not
have the thumbwheel for headlamp levelling.
Specification
The Active main beam (p. 96)*
function can be used.
Daytime running lights, position
lamps rear and side marker lamps
when the car's electrical system is
in key position II or the engine is
running.
Main beam can be activated when
dipped beam is switched on.
Main beam flash can be used.
Position lamps/side marker lamps
when the car is parkedB.
Dipped beam and position lamps/
side marker lamps.
Main beam flash can be used.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
A
B
Fitted in or under the front bumper.
Also at idle when the engine is running, provided that the knob
is moved to this position from another position.
Volvo recommends that
when the car is driven.
92
mode is used
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Position lamps
WARNING
Position lamps are switched on using the headlamp control's knob.
The car's audio system is not able to determine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently
strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with a beam pattern suitable for the traffic situation and in accordance
with applicable traffic regulations.
Display and instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position; see Key
positions - functions at different levels (p. 83).
Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.
Only driver
The display lighting is automatically subdued in
darkness - the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel.
Driver and passenger in the front passenger
seat
Occupants in all seats
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle
oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the
height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is
heavily laden.
1.
Leave the engine running, or have the car's
electrical system in key position I.
2.
Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower
beam alignment.
Occupants in all seats and maximum load in
the cargo area
The driver and maximum load in the cargo
area
Related information
•
•
•
Position lamps (p. 93)
Daytime running lights (p. 94)
Main/dipped beam (p. 95)
Knob for headlamp control in the position for position
lamps.
Turn the knob to the position for
(number
plate lighting is switched on at the same time).
If the car's electrical system is in key position II or
the engine is running then the daytime running
lights are switched on instead of the front position lamps.
When it is dark outside and the tailgate is
opened the rear position lamps illuminate to alert
traffic behind. This takes place irrespective of
what position the knob is in or what key position
the car's electrical system is in.
When driving for more than 30 seconds at max.
10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed
}}
93
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime
running lights are switched on and Reset light
switch position is shown in the combined
instrument panel, which prompts you to turn to a
.
mode other than
Related information
•
Light switches (p. 92)
Daytime running lights
With the knob for headlamp control in
position, and the car's electrical system in key
position II or the engine running, the daytime
running lights are activated automatically in daylight.
when the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamp are
activated.
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is too
weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and
rain.
Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with the correct beam
pattern for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
Related information
•
•
Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.
With the knob for headlamp control in
position the daytime running lights (Daytime
Running Lights - DRL) are activated automatically when the car is driven in daylight. A light
sensor on the top of the instrument panel
changes from daytime running lights to dipped
beam at twilight or when daylight becomes too
weak. Switching to dipped beam also takes place
94
Main/dipped beam (p. 95)
Light switches (p. 92)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Tunnel detection*
Main/dipped beam
Tunnel detection changes the lighting from daytime running lights to dipped beam when the car
is driven into a tunnel.
With the knob for headlamp control in position
and the car's electrical system in key position II or the engine running, the dipped beam is
activated automatically in poor light conditions.
The tunnel detection function is available in cars
with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the
entrance to a tunnel and resets the lighting from
daytime running lights to dipped beam. Approx.
20 seconds after the car has left the tunnel, the
lighting returns to daytime running lights. If the
car is driven into another tunnel within this time
period then dipped beam is kept switched on.
This avoids repeated changes to the car's lighting.
Note that the headlamp control's knob must
remain in
position for tunnel detection to
work.
Related information
•
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 95)
Light switches (p. 92)
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering
wheel to the position for main beam flash. Main
beam comes on until the stalk switch is released.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the knob is in
19 or
. Activate/deactivate
position
main beam by moving the stalk switch towards
the steering wheel to the end position and then
releasing.
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
Dipped beam
With the knob in
position, dipped beam is
activated automatically at twilight or when daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is also
activated automatically if the windscreen wipers
or the rear fog lamps are activated.
19
20
dipped beam is
With the knob in position
always switched on when the engine is running
or when key position II is active.
When main beam has been activated the
symbol illuminates in the combined instrument
panel.
Auxiliary lamps*
If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can use
the MY CAR menu system to choose whether
they should be deactivated or switched on/off
simultaneously with the main beam20, see MY
CAR (p. 118).
Related information
•
•
Active Xenon headlamps* (p. 98)
Active main beam* (p. 96)
When dipped beam is switched on.
Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
}}
* Option/accessory.
95
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
•
•
Light switches (p. 92)
Active main beam*
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp pattern
(p. 99)
•
Tunnel detection* (p. 95)
Active main beam function detects the headlamp
beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of
vehicles in front, and switches the lighting from
main beam to dipped beam. The lighting returns
to main beam when the incoming light has stopped.
Active main beam - AHB
Active main beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is a
function which uses a camera sensor at the top
edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp
beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of
vehicles in front, and then switches from main
beam to dipped beam. The function can also take
streetlights into account.
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
If the active main beam has adaptive functionality21 then, unlike what happens during conventional dimming, the light beam continues to illuminate with main beam on both sides of oncoming traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the
light beam that points directly to the vehicle is
dimmed.
Main beam is reactivated when the camera sensor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles or
vehicles ahead.
Car with halogen headlamps
The lighting returns to main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects
the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the
rear lights from vehicles in front.
Car with active Xenon headlamps
If the active main beam has the on/off functionality21 then the lighting returns to main beam about
a second after the camera sensor no longer
21
96
Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly toward
oncoming vehicles, but continued main beam on both
sides of the vehicle.
The lighting returns to full main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
Depending on the car's equipment level.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Activating/deactivating
AHB can be activated when the headlamp con(provided that the
trol's knob is in position
function has not been deactivated in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 118)).
symbol illumiWhen AHB is activated the
nates in the instrument's information display.
When main beam is switched on the
symbol also illuminates in the combined instrument
panel. This also applies for active Xenon headlamps if the main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. as
soon as the light beam shines with slightly more
than dipped beam.
Car with digital combined instrument panel
When AHB is activated the
symbol turns
white in the instrument's information display.
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in AUTO
position.
The function can start while driving in the dark
when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h
(12 mph) or higher.
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the left-hand
stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the
end position and then releasing. Deactivation
when main beam is on means that the lights are
reset directly to dipped beam.
Car with analogue combined instrument
panel
When main beam is activated, the symbol turns
blue. This also applies for active Xenon headlamps if the main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. as
soon as the light beam shines with slightly more
than dipped beam.
Manual operation
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and
dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor as this
may reduce effectiveness or cause one or
more of the systems dependent on the camera to stop working.
If the message Active main beam Temporary
unavailable Switch manually is shown in the
combined instrument panel's information display
then you have to switch manually between main
and dipped beam. However, the knob for head.
lamp control can still remain in position
The same applies if the message Windscreen
sensors blocked See manual and the
symbol are shown. The
symbol goes out
when these messages are shown.
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When AHB
becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked, the message extinguishes and the
symbol illuminates.
WARNING
AHB is an aid for using the optimum beam
pattern when conditions are favourable.
The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped
beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require.
IMPORTANT
Examples of when manual switching between
main and dipped beam may be required:
}}
97
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
In heavy rain or dense fog
Active Xenon headlamps*
In freezing rain
Active xenon headlamps/active bending lights
are designed to provide maximum illumination in
bends and junctions and so provide increased
safety.
In snow flurries or slush
In moonlight
When driving in poorly lit built-up areas
When the traffic ahead has weak lighting
If there are pedestrians on or beside the
road
•
If there are highly reflective objects such
as signs in the vicinity of the road
•
When the lighting from oncoming traffic
is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
•
•
•
When there is traffic on connecting roads
On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
In sharp bends.
For more information on the limitations of the
camera sensor, see Collision warning system* camera sensor limitations (p. 236).
Related information
•
•
Active xenon headlamps/active
bending lights - ABL
Main/dipped beam (p. 95)
Light switches (p. 92)
tivated in the menu system MY CAR, see MY
CAR (p. 118)). In the event of a fault in the function the
symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel at the same time as the
information display shows an explanatory text and
a further illuminated symbol.
Symbol
Message
Specification
Headlamp
system
malfunction
Service
required
The system is disengaged. Visit a
workshop if the
message remains.
Volvo recommends
that you contact an
authorised Volvo
workshop.
The function is only active in twilight or darkness
and only when the car is moving.
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and
activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active xenon headlamps/active bending lights (Active Bending
Lights, ABL) the light from the headlamps follows
the steering wheel movement in order to provide
maximum lighting in bends and junctions and so
provide increased safety.
The function22 can be deactivated/activated in
the menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR
(p. 118).
The function is activated automatically when the
car is started (provided that it has not been deac22
98
Activated on delivery from the factory.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Cornering lights*
Active xenon headlamps/active bending lights
with Automatic main beam function with adaptive
functionality are equipped with cornering lights.
The cornering lights temporarily illuminate the
area diagonally in front of the car in the direction
the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or
in the direction shown by the direction indicators.
The function is activated when main beam or
dipped beam is used and the car's speed is lower
than approx. 30 km/h (20 mph).
In addition, both cornering lights are switched on
as a supplement to the reversing lamp during
reversing.
Related information
•
•
•
Main/dipped beam (p. 95)
Active main beam* (p. 96)
Light switches (p. 92)
Headlamps - adjusting headlamp
pattern
If the car is equipped with active Xenon headlamps and has the Active main beam function
then the headlamp pattern must be reset when
changing from right to left-hand traffic, and vice
versa.
Rear fog lamp
When visibility is reduced by fog the rear fog
lamp can be used so that other road users can
detect the vehicle in front at an early stage.
Active Xenon headlamps*
No adjustment of the headlamp pattern is necessary for cars without the Active main beam* function. The headlamp pattern is designed in such a
way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
Adjustment of the headlamp pattern is required
for cars with Active main beam. The car must be
stationary with the engine running when the
headlamp pattern is shifted between right and
left-hand traffic.
The headlamp pattern is changed in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 118).
Halogen headlamps
No adjustment of the headlamp pattern is necessary. The headlamp pattern is designed in such a
way that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when
key position II is active or the engine is running
and the headlamp control's knob is in position
or
.
Press the button for On/Off. The indicator symin the combined instrument panel and
bol
the light in the button both illuminate when the
rear fog lamp is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
when the START/STOP ENGINE button is
depressed or when the headlamp control's knob
is turned to position
or
.
}}
* Option/accessory.
99
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Related information
•
Light switches (p. 92)
Brake lights
Hazard warning flashers
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
The hazard warning flashers warn other road
users by means of all of the car's direction indicator lamps flashing simultaneously when this
function is activated.
The brake light is switched on when the brake
pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on
when one of driving support systems Adaptive
cruise control (p. 204), City Safety (p. 222) or
Collision warning system (p. 229) brakes the car.
Related information
•
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 294)
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in the
combined instrument panel flash when the hazard warning flashers are used.
The hazard warning flashers are activated automatically when the car has been braked so suddenly that the emergency brake lights have been
activated and speed is below approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph). The hazard warning flashers remain
active when the car has stopped and are deactivated automatically when you start driving again;
they can also be deactivated by pressing the button.
100
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Related information
•
•
direction indicators (p. 101)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 294)
direction indicators
The car's direction indicators are operated with
the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down the stalk switch is
moved.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Direction indicator symbols
For direction indicator symbols, see Combined
instrument panel - meaning of indicator symbols
(p. 73).
Related information
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 100)
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first
position and release. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times. The function can be
activated/deactivated in the menu system
MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 118).
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to its end
position.
101
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Interior lighting
Front roof lighting
The passenger compartment lighting is activated/deactivated with the buttons in the controls above the front seats and the rear seat.
The front reading lamps are switched on or off by
pressing the relevant button in the roof console.
Rear roof lighting
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing
each respective button.
Courtesy lighting
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compartment
lighting) is switched on and off respectively when
a side door is opened or closed.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
G021149
G021150
Vanity mirror lighting
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and
passenger compartment lighting.
Rear roof lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Lighting in the cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and
off respectively when the tailgate is opened or
closed.
Automatic lighting
Reading lamp, right-hand side
The switch for passenger compartment lighting
has three positions for the lighting in the passenger compartment:
Interior lighting
102
The lighting for the vanity mirror (p. 155) is
switched on and off respectively when the cover
is opened or closed.
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be
switched on and off manually within 30 minutes
from when:
•
Off – right-hand side pressed in, automatic
lighting deactivated.
•
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0
•
Neutral position – automatic lighting activated.
•
the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
•
On – left-hand side pressed in, passenger
compartment lighting switched on.
Rear roof lighting in cars with panorama roof.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Neutral position
When the button is in neutral position the passenger compartment lighting is switched on and
off automatically in accordance with the following.
The passenger compartment lighting is switched
on and remains on for 30 seconds if:
•
•
the car is unlocked with the remote control
key or key blade, see Remote control key functions (p. 167) or Detachable key blade unlocking doors (p. 172)
partments etc. during the darker hours of the day.
This lighting goes out for a little while after the
normal passenger compartment lighting when
the car is locked. The brightness is controlled
using the thumbwheel on the headlamp control
(p. 92).
Home safe lighting
Home safe lighting consists of dipped beam,
position lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting.
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked.
1.
Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2.
Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the
steering wheel to the end position and
release it. The function can be activated in
the same way as with main beam flash; see
Main/dipped beam (p. 95).
the engine is started
3.
Get out of the car and lock the door.
the car is locked.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
position lamps, lamps in the door mirrors and
number plate lighting are switched on.
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched off
when:
•
•
The passenger compartment lighting comes on
and remains on for two minutes if one of the
doors is open.
If any lighting is switched on manually and the
car is locked then it will be switched off automatically after two minutes.
Ambience lights*
When the normal passenger compartment lighting is switched off and the engine is running, a
number of LEDs illuminate, including one in the
ceiling lighting, in order to provide a low-light and
enhance the mood while driving. The light also
makes it easier to see objects in storage com-
The length of time for which the home safe lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 118).
Related information
•
Approach lighting (p. 104)
* Option/accessory. 103
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Approach lighting
Wipers and washers
Approach lighting consists of position lamps,
lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting,
interior roof lighting as well as courtesy lighting.
Wipers and washers clean the windscreen and
rear window. The headlamps are cleaned with
high-pressure washing.
Approach lighting is switched on with the remote
control key, see Remote control key - functions
(p. 167), and is used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
Windscreen wipers23
Home safe lighting (p. 103)
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers - ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any
snow or ice on the windscreen (and rear window) is scraped away.
The length of time for which the approach lighting should be kept on can be set in the menu
system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 118).
Related information
Set the number of sweeps per time
unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent wiping is selected.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
When the function is activated with the remote
control key, position lamps, lamps in the door mirrors, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps
and courtesy lighting are switched on.
•
Intermittent wiping
IMPORTANT
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, On/Off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off
Before activating the wipers during winter
ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in,
and that any snow or ice on the windscreen is
scraped away.
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
23
104
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen
must be wet when the windscreen wipers are
operating.
For replacing the wiper blades and service position wiper blades, see Wiper blades (p. 364). For filling washer fluid, see Washer fluid - filling (p. 366).
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Service position wiper blade
Deactivate
Washing the windscreen
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades and
replacement of wiper blades, see Car wash
(p. 387) and Wiper blades (p. 364).
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
sensor button
or move the stalk switch
down to another wiper program.
Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel
to start the windscreen and headlamp washers.
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when
the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch or five minutes after the engine has
been switched off.
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of the
rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel.
When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in the
button is illuminated and the rain sensor symbol
is shown in the combined instrument
panel.
Activating and setting the sensitivity
When activating the rain sensor, the car must be
running or the remote control key in position I or
II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must
be in position 0 or in the position for a single
sweep.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Switch off
the rain sensor while the car is in motion or
when the remote control key is in position I or
II. The symbol in the combined instrument
panel and the lamp in the button go out.
Washing the headlamps and windows
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sensor button
. The windscreen wipers make
one sweep.
The windscreen wipers will make several more
sweeps and the headlamps are washed once the
stalk switch has been released.
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically in
cold weather to prevent the washer fluid freezing
solid.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a
large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the
headlamps are washed automatically at every
fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in
the reservoir and the message that you should fill
the washer fluid is shown in the combined instrument panel, then the supply of washer fluid to the
headlamps is switched off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility
through it.
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make
an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An extra
sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned
upward.)
Washing function.
}}
* Option/accessory. 105
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Wiping and washing the rear window
Wiper – reversing
Power windows
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window wiping24. The function stops when reverse gear is
disengaged.
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control
panels for the other doors operate their respective power window.
If the rear window wiper is already on at continuous speed, no change is made.
NOTE
On cars with rain sensors, the rear wiper is
activated during reversing if the sensor is
activated and it is raining.
Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
Rear window wiper – continuous speed
Related information
•
Washer fluid - filling (p. 366)
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow in
the illustration above) to initiate rear window
washing and wiping.
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with overheating protection which means that the
motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear
window wiper works again after a coolingdown period.
24
106
Driver's door control panel.
Electric child safety locks that prevent children from being able to open the rear doors
from inside* and open/close the rear windows, see Child safety locks - electrical activation* (p. 185).
Controls for rear windows
Controls for front windows
This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
WARNING
Operating
Check that children or other passengers are
not trapped when the windows are closed
from the driver's door.
WARNING
Check that no children or other passengers
are trapped if/when the windows are closed
using the remote control key.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember to
always switch off the power supply to the
power windows by selecting key position 0
and then take the remote control key with you
when leaving the car. For information on key
positions - see Key positions - functions at
different levels (p. 83).
Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its movement.
It is possible to force the pinch protection when
closing has been interrupted, e.g. with ice, by
continuously holding the button up until the window is closed. The pinch protection is reactivated
after a brief pause.
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control
panels for the other doors can only operate their
respective power window. Only one control panel
can be operated at a time.
In order for the power windows to be used, the
key position must be at least I - see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 83). The
power windows can be operated for a few
minutes after the engine has been switched off
and after the remote control key has been
removed - although not after a door has been
opened.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The
power windows move up/down as long as the
control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs automatically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key or
central locking button
To operate the power windows from the outside
with the remote control key, or from inside with
the central locking button, see Remote control
key - functions (p. 167) or Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 179).
}}
107
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Resetting
Door mirrors
If the battery is disconnected then the function
for automatic opening must be reset so that it
can work correctly.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
joystick in the driver's door controls.
1.
Gently raise the front section of the button to
raise the window to its end position and hold
it there for one second.
2.
Release the button briefly.
3.
Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
Storing settings25
The settings for the door mirrors and the positions of the driver's seat can be stored for each
remote control key in the car key memory*, see
Remote control key - personalisation* (p. 165).
Angling the door mirror when parking25
WARNING
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking
for example.
A reset must take place for pinch protection
to work.
Controls for door mirrors.
Adjusting
25
108
WARNING
Both mirrors are the wide-angle type to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.
1.
Press the L button for the left-hand door mirror or the R button for the right-hand door
mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2.
Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3.
Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
–
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position after
approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the
button labelled L or R respectively.
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking25
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is
automatically angled down so that the driver can
see the side of the road when parking for example. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 86).
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
automatically returns to its original position after
a short time.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 118).
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces:
1.
Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously
(key position must be at least I).
When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote
control key the door mirrors are automatically
retracted/extended.
2.
Release them after approximately 1 second.
The mirrors automatically stop in the fully
retracted position.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 118).
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and
R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended position.
Automatic retraction when locking*
Resetting to neutral
The lamp on the door mirrors illuminates when
approach lighting (p. 104) or home safe lighting
(p. 103) is selected.
1.
Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
Related information
2.
Fold them out again with the L and R buttons.
Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Automatic dimming*
For the door mirrors to be fitted with this function
requires that the interior rearview mirror also has
automatic dimming, see Rearview mirror - interior
(p. 110).
The defroster is used to quickly remove misting
and ice from the windscreen, rear window and
door mirrors.
Heated windscreen*, rear window and
door mirrors
Home safe and approach lighting
Mirrors that have been moved out of position by
an external force must be reset electrically to the
neutral position for electric retracting/extending
to work correctly:
3.
Windows and rearview and door
mirrors - heating
•
•
Rearview mirror - interior (p. 110)
Windows and rearview and door mirrors heating (p. 109)
Heating, windscreen
Heating, rear window and door mirrors
The function is used to remove ice and misting
from the windscreen, rear window and door mirrors.
One press of the respective button starts the
heating. The light in the button indicates that the
function is active. Switch off the heating as soon
as the ice/misting is cleared in order not to load
}}
* Option/accessory. 109
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
the battery unnecessarily. However, the function
is switched off automatically after a certain time.
See also Demisting and defrosting the windscreen (p. 139).
Rearview mirror - interior
Automatic dimming*
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with
a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively,
the rearview mirror dims automatically.
Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
by the rearview mirror. The control for manual
dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming.
The door mirrors and rear window are demisted/
defrosted automatically if the car is started in an
outside temperature lower than +7 °C. Automatic
defrosting can be selected in the menu system
MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 118).
The rearview mirror contains two sensors - one
forward facing and one rearward facing - that
work together to identify and eliminate dazzling
light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient
light, while the rearward facing sensor detects
the light from vehicle headlights behind.
Using the Engine Remote Start (ERS)* function,
the heated windscreen is demisted/defrosted
automatically if the ambient temperature is lower
than +5 °C and automatic defrosting has been
selected in the menu system MY CAR.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in
the seats or in the cargo area in such a way
that light is prevented from reaching the sensors, then the dimming function of the interior
rearview and door mirrors is reduced.
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the
rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dimming with the dimming control when lights from
behind are distracting:
110
1.
Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2.
Return to normal position by moving the control towards the windscreen.
Only rearview mirror with automatic dimming can
be equipped with compass (p. 111).
Related information
•
Door mirrors (p. 108)
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror contains a display that shows the compass
direction in which the front of the car is pointing.
Operation
Calibration
The compass may need calibrating to show the
correct compass direction.
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The
compass should be calibrated if the car is moved
across several magnetic zones.
Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
1.
Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power lines.
2.
Start the car and switch off all electrical
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and
ensure that all doors are closed.
Magnetic zones.
4.
Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the compass.
5.
Wait until the display returns to showing the
character C, or hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed for
approx. 6 seconds until the character C is
shown.
6.
Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2
circles to fine-tune calibration.
NOTE
Rearview mirror with compass.
Eight different directions are shown with English
abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east),
SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W
(west) and NW (north west).
The compass is activated automatically when the
car is started or when key position II is active, see
Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 83). To deactivate/activate the compass press in the button on the underside of the mirror
using a paper clip for example.
Calibration may fail or not start at all if electrical equipment is not switched off.
3.
Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed (use a paper clip or
similar) for approx. 3 seconds. The number of
the current magnetic zone is shown.
}}
* Option/accessory. 111
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
7.
8.
Cars with heated windscreen*: If the character C is shown in the display when the
heated windscreen is activated, perform the
calibration in accordance with point 6 above
with the heated windscreen activated, see
Demisting and defrosting the windscreen
(p. 139).
Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Panorama roof* - general
The panorama roof is divided into two sections.
Only the front section can be opened - horizontally or vertically at the rear edge (ventilation
position).
The panorama roof has a sun blind made of perforated fabric and located under the glass roof to
provide extra protection from factors such as
strong sunlight.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the panorama roof's moving parts.
•
Always operate the panorama roof with
caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
•
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the panorama roof by selecting
key position 0 and then take the remote
control key/PCC* with you when leaving
the car. For information on key positions see Key positions - functions at different
levels (p. 83).
WARNING
Risk of crushing when panorama roof closes.
The panorama roof's pinch-protection function only operates during automatic closing,
not manual.
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated
with a control located in the roof. The control is
activated when the key is in position I or II, see
Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 83).
112
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Wind deflector
Panorama roof* - operation
The blind/roof is opened to maximum during
automatic operation.
In ventilation position the front section of the roof
is raised at the rear.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the panorama roof's moving parts.
The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is
folded up when the panorama roof is in the open
position.
Related information
•
Panorama roof* - operation (p. 113)
•
Always operate the panorama roof with
caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
•
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the panorama roof by selecting
key position 0 and then take the remote
control key/PCC* with you when leaving
the car. For information on key positions see Key positions - functions at different
levels (p. 83).
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
The panoramic roof and sun blind can be operated in key position I or II.
Automatic operation
1.
To fully open the sun blind - press the control back to the position for automatic opening and release.
2.
To then open the panorama roof all the way press the control rearward again to the automatic opening position and release.
Close the roof/curtain by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control
forward to the automatic closing position instead.
}}
* Option/accessory. 113
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Rapid opening/closing
The panorama roof and sun blind can be
opened/closed simultaneously:
•
To open - press the control rearward to the
automatic operation position twice and
release.
•
To close - press the control forward to the
automatic operation position twice and
release.
Manual operation
1.
To open the sun blind - press the control
backwards to the point of resistance for
manual opening. The sun blind moves to fully
open while the control is being pressed
backwards.
2.
To angle the panoramic roof - press the control rearward again to the point of resistance
for manual opening.
3.
To open the panorama roof - press the control rearward to the point of resistance for
manual opening a third time. The panoramic
roof moves to fully open while the control is
being pressed backwards.
Close the roof/curtain by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control
forward to the manual closing position instead.
NOTE
For manual opening, the sun blind must be
fully open before the panoramic roof can be
opened. When the procedure is reversed, the
panoramic roof must be fully closed before
the sun blind can be closed.
Closing using the remote control key or
central locking button
WARNING
Risk of crushing when panorama roof closes.
The panorama roof's pinch-protection function only operates during automatic closing,
not manual.
Ventilation position
Remote control key
– Give one long press on the remote control
until the panorama
key's lock button
roof and all the windows are closed and the
doors and the tailgate are locked.
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the rear edge of the control upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the control
down.
114
When the ventilation position is selected the front
section is raised at its rear edge. If the sun blind
is fully closed when ventilation position is
selected, then it opens automatically
approx. 50 mm.
To interrupt closing, press the remote control
key's lock button again.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Central locking button
The central locking button in the driver's door or
passenger door* can be used to close the panorama roof.
–
Give one long press on the central locking
until the panorama roof and all
button
the windows are closed and the doors and
the tailgate are locked.
Related information
•
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 167)
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)
Menu navigation - combined
instrument panel
The left-hand stalk controls the menus (p. 116)
shown on the information display in the combined instrument panel (p. 68). Which menus
are shown depends on the key position (p. 83).
To interrupt closing, press the central locking
button again.
WARNING
If the panorama roof is closed with the remote
control key or the central locking button,
check that no one risks being trapped.
Pinch protection
The panorama roof has pinch protection that is
triggered if the glass cover or the sun blind is
blocked by an object during closing. In the event
of blocking, the glass cover or sun blind stops
and is then opened automatically to approx. 50
mm from the blocked position (or to full ventilation position). The pinch protection is also active
when the glass cover or sun blind is opened.
There is the option to force the pinch protection
when closing has been interrupted e.g. in the
event of ice forming around the glass cover, by
continually holding the control pressed forward or
depressed until the glass cover is closed.
Display (analogue combined instrument panel) and controls for menu navigation.
}}
* Option/accessory. 115
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Menu overview - combined
instrument panel
Which menus are shown in the combined instrument panel's information display depends on the
key position (p. 83).
Some of the following menu options require the
function and hardware to be installed in the car.
Analogue combined instrument panel
Digital speed
Parking heater*
Display (digital combined instrument panel) and controls
for menu navigation.
OK – access to message list and message
confirmation.
Thumbwheel – browse between menu
options.
RESET – reset the active function. Used in
certain cases to select/activate a function,
see the explanation under each respective
function.
If there is a message (p. 117) then it must be
acknowledged with OK in order that the menus
shall be shown.
Related information
•
Messages - handling (p. 118)
Parking heater*
Trip computer reset
Related information
•
Analogue combined instrument panel - overview (p. 68)
•
Digital combined instrument panel - overview
(p. 69)
•
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 115)
Additional heater*
TC options
Service status
Oil level26
Messages (##)27
Digital combined instrument panel
Settings*
Themes
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Service status
Messages27
Oil level26
26
27
116
Certain engines.
The number of messages is indicated in brackets.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Messages
Message
Specification
Message
Specification
When a warning, information or indicator symbol
illuminates, a corresponding message appears
on the information display.
Maintenance
overdue
If the service intervals are
not followed then the warranty does not cover any
damaged parts - contact a
workshopB.
Temporarily
offA
A function has been temporarily switched off and is
reset automatically while
driving or after starting
again.
Transmission
Oil change
needed
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Low battery
charge Power
save mode
The audio system is
switched off to save energy.
Charge the battery.
Transmission
Reduced performance
The gearbox cannot handle
full capacity. Drive carefully
until the message clearsC.
Message
Stop
safelyA
Stop engineA
Specification
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a workshopB.
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a workshopB.
Service
urgentA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car immediately.
Service
requiredA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
See manualA
Read the owner's manual.
Book time for
maintenance
Time to book regular service
- contact a workshopB.
Time for regular maintenance
Time for regular service contact a workshopB. The
timing is determined by the
number of kilometres driven,
number of months since the
last service, engine running
time and oil grade.
If shown repeatedly - contact a workshopB.
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Drive more smoothly or stop
the car in a safe manner.
Disengage the gear and run
the engine at idling speed
until the message clearsC.
Transmission
hot Stop
safely Wait for
cooling
Critical fault. Stop the car
immediately in a safe manner and contact a workshopB.
A
B
C
Part of message, shown together with information on where the
problem has arisen.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
For more information regarding the automatic gearbox, see
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 278).
Related information
•
•
Messages - handling (p. 118)
Menu navigation - combined instrument
panel (p. 115)
* Option/accessory. 117
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Messages - handling
MY CAR
Use the left-hand stalk switch to acknowledge
and browse among messages (p. 117) that are
shown in the information display of the combined instrument panel.
MY CAR is a menu source that handles many of
the car's functions, e.g. City Safety™, locks and
alarm, automatic fan speed, setting the clock,
etc.
When a warning, information or indicator symbol
illuminates, a corresponding message appears in
the display at the same time. An error message is
stored in a memory list until the fault has been
rectified.
Certain functions are standard, others are
optional - the range also varies depending on the
market.
Press OK on the left-hand stalk switch to
acknowledge a message. Scroll through messages with the thumbwheel (p. 115).
Operation
Navigation in the menus is carried out using buttons in the centre console or with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad*.
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you are
using the trip computer, the message must be
read (press OK) before the previous activity
can be resumed.
Related information
•
Menu overview - combined instrument panel
(p. 116)
Control panel in centre console and steering wheel keypad. The figure is schematic - the number of functions
118
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
and layout of the buttons both vary, depending on the
equipment selected and the market.
MY CAR - opens the menu system MY CAR.
OK/MENU - press the button in the centre
console or the thumbwheel on the steering
wheel to select/tick in the highlighted menu
option or store the selected function in the
memory.
TUNE - turn the knob in the centre console
or the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to
scroll up/down through the menu options.
EXIT
EXIT functions
Depending on the function the cursor is on when
EXIT is depressed briefly, and on which menu
level, one of the following may occur:
•
•
•
•
•
phone call is rejected
current function is interrupted
input characters are deleted
most recent selections are undone
leads up in the menu system.
A long press on EXIT leads to the normal view
for MY CAR or if you are in the normal view, to
the highest menu level (main source menu).
Menu options and search paths
For a description of the menu options and search
paths in MY CAR, see the Sensus Infotainment
supplement.
Trip computer
The car's trip computer records and calculates
vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption
and average speed whilst driving.
Trip computer content and appearance varies
depending on whether the combined instrument
panel is analogue or digital:
•
Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel (p. 121)
•
Trip computer - digital combined instrument
panel (p. 124)
The information from the trip computer can be shown in
the combined instrument panel's information display28.
Trip meter
The trip computer has two trip meters and one
odometer for the total mileage.
Average
Average fuel consumption is calculated from the
last resetting.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if a fuel-driven
heater* has been used.
Average speed
The average speed is calculated for the driving
distance driven since the last reset to zero.
}}
* Option/accessory. 119
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Instantaneous
The information for current fuel consumption is
updated continuously - approximately once per
second. When the car is driven at low speed the
consumption is shown per time unit - at a higher
speed it is shown related to mileage.
Different units (km/miles) can be selected for the
display - see section "Change unit" (p. 119).
Range - distance to empty tank
Volvo Car Corporation 's Environmental Philosophy (p. 22).
Digital speed display in another unit29
If the main instrument is graduated in mph, the
equivalent digital speed is shown as km/h.
Change unit
Distance and fuel unit can be changed in the
menu system MY CAR, see MY CAR (p. 118).
The trip computer shows the approximate distance that can be driven with the fuel quantity
remaining in the tank.
NOTE
In addition to in the trip computer, these units
are also changed in Volvo's navigation system*.
No guaranteed range remains when the heading
Distance to empty shows "----".
•
In which case, refuel as soon as possible.
The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km and the remaining
driveable fuel quantity.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if the driving
style has been changed.
Related information
•
Trip computer - analogue combined instrument panel (p. 121)
•
Trip computer - digital combined instrument
panel (p. 124)
•
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 127)
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance. For more information on
how fuel consumption can be influenced, see
28
29
120
The appearance and showing of the display may vary depending on the instrument variant.
Only digital combined instrument panel and certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Trip computer - analogue combined
instrument panel
Trip comp. opt.
Controls
Choose which trip computer should be shown:
The information from the trip computer can be
shown in the combined instrument panel and
operated with the controls on the left-hand stalk
switch and with the combined instrument panel's
menu.
Checking and settings can be made immediately
after the combined instrument panel is automatically illuminated in connection with unlocking. If
none of the trip computer's controls are actuated
within approx. 30 seconds after the driver's door
has been opened then the instrument extinguishes, after which either key position II or
engine starting is required in order to operate the
trip computer.
To ensure that no control is in the middle of
a sequence - reset them first with
two presses on RESET.
2.
Turn the thumbwheel to browse between the
options and stop at the required heading.
The trip computer display in the combined instrument panel can be shifted to another option at
any time during the journey. One of the options
means that no trip computer is shown.
Information display and controls.
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the trip
computer is used then the message must first
be acknowledged before the trip computer
can be reactivated.
•
1.
OK - opens the combined instrument panel's
menu, confirms messages or menu selections.
Thumbwheel - browses between menu
options or trip computer options.
RESET - resets the current trip meter or
goes back out of the menu structure.
Acknowledge the message by briefly
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
Trip computer heading in combined instrument panel
Information
Trip meter T1 and total dist.
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Trip meter T2 and total dist.
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
}}
121
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Trip computer heading in combined instrument panel
Information
Distance to empty
For more information - see the section "Range - distance to empty tank" (p. 119).
Fuel consumption
Current consumption.
Average speed
•
No trip computer information.
This option shows a blank display and it also indicates the beginning/end of the loop.
Resetting the trip computer
1.
2.
Turn the thumbwheel and stop at the trip
computer heading to be reset: T1 and total
dist., T2 and total dist. or Average speed.
One long press on RESET resets the value
for the selected heading.
Each heading must be zeroed individually.
Functions in the combined instrument
panel's menu
The combined instrument panel's menu includes
setting options for trip computer. Open the menu
to check/adjust the functions in the table below.
1.
To ensure that no control is in the middle of
a sequence - reset them first with
two presses on RESET.
2.
Press OK.
3.
Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
4.
Finish by pressing twice on RESET after
completed checking/adjustment.
Functions
Information
Digital speed
Shows the car's speed digitally in the centre of the combined instrument panel.
•
•
•
km/h
mph
No display
Parking heater*
•
•
•
122
Long press on RESET resets Average speed.
DIRECT START
For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer (p. 145).
- Timer 1 - leads to the menu for selecting time.
- Timer 2 - leads to the menu for selecting time.
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Functions
Information
Additional heater*
For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 149).
• Auto On
• Off
TC options
•
•
•
•
•
Distance to empty tank
Fuel consumption
Here you can activate the options that you want to be available as selectable headings in
the trip computer. The symbols for the options already selected are white with a "tick" others are grey and have no "tick".
Average speed
Trip meter T1 and total dist.
Trip meter T2 and total dist.
Service status
Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.
Oil levelA
For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 350).
Messages (##)
For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 118).
A
Certain engines.
Related information
•
•
Trip computer (p. 119)
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 127)
* Option/accessory. 123
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Trip computer - digital combined
instrument panel
Trip comp. opt.
Controls
Choose which trip computer should be shown:
The information from the trip computer can be
shown in the combined instrument panel and
operated with the controls on the left-hand stalk
switch and with the combined instrument panel's
menu.
Checking and settings can be made immediately
after the combined instrument panel is automatically illuminated in connection with unlocking. If
none of the trip computer's controls are actuated
within approx. 30 seconds after the driver's door
has been opened then the instrument extinguishes, after which either key position II or
engine starting is required in order to operate the
trip computer.
NOTE
If a warning message appears when the trip
computer is used then the message must first
be acknowledged before the trip computer
can be reactivated.
•
Three trip computer options can be displayed simultaneously - one in each "window".
To ensure that no control is in the middle of
a sequence - reset them first with
two presses on RESET.
2.
Turn the thumbwheel to browse between the
heading combinations.
3.
Stop at the required combination for the constant display of this trip data in the combined
instrument panel.
The trip computer display in the combined instrument panel can be shifted to another option at
any time during the journey. One of the options
means that no trip computer is shown.
OK - opens the combined instrument panel's
menu, confirms messages or menu selections.
Thumbwheel - browses between menu
options or trip computer options.
RESET - resets the current trip meter or
goes back out of the menu structure.
Acknowledge the message by briefly
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
Heading combinations
124
1.
Information
Average
Trip meter T1 + Meter reading
Average speed
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Instantaneous
Trip meter T2 + Meter reading
Distance to empty tank
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Heading combinations
Instantaneous
Information
Meter reading
kmh<>mph
No trip computer information.
Resetting the trip computer
Trip meter
1. Turn the thumbwheel and stop at the heading combination with the trip meter to be
reset.
2.
One long press on RESET resets the value
for the selected heading.
Average speed and average consumption
1. Press OK to open the combined instrument
panel's menu.
kmh<>mph - see section Reverse digital speed display (p. 119).
This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays and it also indicates the
beginning/end of the loop.
2.
Browse to the Trip computer reset menu
option with the thumbwheel and confirm with
OK.
1.
To ensure that no control is in the middle of
a sequence - reset them first with
two presses on RESET.
3.
Choose to reset average consumption, average speed or to reset both. Confirm the
selection with OK.
2.
Press OK.
3.
Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
4.
Finish by pressing twice on RESET after
completed checking/adjustment.
4.
Finish by pressing RESET.
Functions in the combined instrument
panel's menu
The combined instrument panel's menu includes
setting options for trip computer. Open the menu
to check/adjust the functions in the table below.
Functions
Information
Trip computer reset
Reset the value of average fuel consumption and average speed.
•
•
Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2.
Average
Average speed
Messages
For more information, see Messages - handling (p. 118).
Themes
Select the theme for the appearance of the combined instrument panel (p. 68).
}}
125
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
||
Functions
Information
Settings*
Select Auto On or Off.
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.
Parking heater*
For a description of programming the timer, see Engine block heater and passenger compartment
heater* - timer (p. 145).
For more information, see Additional heater* (p. 149).
• Direct start
• - Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
•
- Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for
selecting time.
Service status
Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.
Oil levelA
For more information, see Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 350).
A
Certain engines.
Related information
•
•
126
Trip computer (p. 119)
Trip computer - trip statistics* (p. 127)
* Option/accessory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Trip computer - trip statistics*
Trip statistics from the trip computer can be
shown in the centre console's screen and provide a graphic overview of fuel consumption.
Settings
Different settings can be made for trip statistics
in the menu system MY CAR - Trip statistics.
• Reset when vehicle has been off for
minimum 4h - highlight the box by selecting ENTER and go back out of the menu by
selecting EXIT. With this option selected, all
statistics are deleted automatically after finishing driving and the car has been stationary
for more than 4 hours. Trip statistics start
again from zero the next time the engine is
started.
Function
–
Open the menu system MY CAR (p. 118)
and select Trip statistics in order to see the
bar chart.
• Start new trip - ENTER is used to delete all
previous statistics, go back out of the menu
by selecting EXIT. If a new driving cycle shall
be started before 4 hours have elapsed then
the current period must first be deleted manually with this option.
See also information on Eco guide (p. 72).
Trip statistics30
Related information
•
Trip computer (p. 119)
Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven distance, depending on the scale selected - the bar
at the far right shows the value for the current kilometre or 10 km.
Using the TUNE control, the scale for the bars
can be changed between 1 km and 10 km - the
cursor on the far right changes position between
up and down in relation to the scale selected.
30
The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
* Option/accessory. 127
CLIMATE CONTROL
CLIMATE CONTROL
General information on climate
control
The car is equipped with electronic climate control (p. 135). The climate control system cools
or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the
passenger compartment.
NOTE
Air conditioning (AC) (p. 139) can be
switched off, but to ensure the best possible
climate comfort in the passenger compartment, and to prevent the windows from misting, it should always be switched on.
To bear in mind
•
130
To ensure that the air conditioning works
optimally, the side windows, and panorama
roof* should be closed.
•
Global opening (p. 179) opens/closes all
side windows simultaneously and can be
used for example to quickly air the car during
hot weather.
•
Remove ice and snow from the climate control system air intake (the grille between the
bonnet and the windscreen).
•
In warm weather, condensation from the air
conditioning may drip under the car. This is
normal.
•
When the engine requires full power, e.g. for
full acceleration, the air conditioning can be
temporarily switched off. There may then be
a temporary increase in temperature in the
passenger compartment.
•
Remove misting on the insides of the windows primarily by using the defroster function (p. 139). To reduce the risk of misting,
keep the windows clean and use window
cleaner.
Cars with Start/Stop*
With an auto-stopped (p. 284) engine certain
equipment may have its function temporarily
reduced, e.g. climate control fan speed (p. 137).
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Actual temperature (p. 130)
Menu settings - climate control (p. 133)
Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 135)
Air distribution in the passenger compartment (p. 133)
Actual temperature
The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physical experience with reference to factors such as ambient
temperature, air speed, humidity and solar radiation etc. in and around the car at the time.
The system includes a sun sensor (p. 131) which
detects on which side the sun is shining into the
passenger compartment. This means that the
temperature can differ between the right and lefthand air vents despite the controls being set for
the same temperature on both sides.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
•
Temperature control in the passenger compartment (p. 138)
Air quality (p. 131)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Sensors - climate control
Air quality
The climate control system has a number of sensors to help control the temperature (p. 130) in
the car.
The interior in a passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even
for people with contact allergies and for asthma
sufferers.
•
The sun sensor is located on the top side of
the dashboard.
•
The temperature sensor for the passenger
compartment is located below the climate
control panel.
•
The outside temperature sensor is located in
the door mirror.
•
The humidity sensor* is located by the interior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.
•
•
Passenger compartment filter (p. 131)
Material in the passenger compartment
(p. 132)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)
(p. 132)*
•
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) (p. 132)*
Air quality - passenger
compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compartment
is cleaned with a filter.
The filter must be replaced at regular intervals.
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is
used in a severely contaminated environment, it
may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 131)
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
* Option/accessory. 131
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP)*
CZIP comprises a series of modifications that
keep the passenger compartment even clearer
from allergy and asthma-inducing substances.
The following is included:
•
•
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is disengaged
automatically after a time or when one of the
passenger compartment doors is opened.
The amount of time the fan runs is reduced
gradually due to reduced need up until the
car is 4 years old.
Air quality - IAQS*
Air quality - material
The air quality system IAQS separates gases
and particles to reduce the levels of odours and
pollution in the passenger compartment.
Tested materials have been developed in order
to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and to contribute to making the
passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
If the outside air is contaminated then the air
intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function
in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 118).
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be enabled
to ensure the best air in the passenger compartment.
•
Air quality (p. 131)
Related information
•
•
•
132
Air quality (p. 131)
In the event of misting, the air quality sensor
should be disengaged, and the defroster
functions for the windscreen and side windows, as well as the rear window, should be
used.
Related information
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
Related information
•
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as
to prevent misting.
The air quality system IAQS (p. 132) is a fully
automatic system that cleans the air in the
passenger compartment from contaminants
such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous
oxides and ground-level ozone.
•
The carpets in both the passenger compartment
and the cargo area are removable and easy to
remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car
care products recommended by Volvo to clean
the interior (p. 390).
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
Air quality (p. 131)
Air quality - Clean Zone Interior Package
(CZIP)* (p. 132)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Menu settings - climate control
It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
the default settings for six of the climate control
system's functions via the centre console.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Air distribution in the passenger
compartment
Air vents in the dashboard
The incoming air is divided between a number of
different vents in the passenger compartment.
Fan level during automatic climate control
(p. 138).
Recirculation timer (p. 140).
Automatic start of rear window defroster
(p. 109)1.
Interior air quality system* (p. 132).
Automatic start of seat heating driver
(p. 136).
Open
Automatic start of steering wheel heating
(p. 91).
Closed
More information is available in the description of
the menu system (p. 118).
The climate control system's functions can be
reset in the menu system MY CAR to the default
settings. For a description of the menu system,
see MY CAR (p. 118).
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO mode.
If necessary it can be controlled manually; see
the air distribution table (p. 141).
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to
remove misting.
Related information
•
1
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
Using the Engine Remote Start (ERS)* function, the heated windscreen is also demisted/defrosted automatically if the setting for rear window defroster is activated.
}}
* Option/accessory. 133
CLIMATE CONTROL
||
Air vents in the door pillars
Closed
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Open
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Lateral airflow
Air distribution - ventilation floor
Vertical airflow
Aim the vents at the windows to remove misting
in cold weather.
Aim the vents into the passenger compartment to
maintain a comfortable climate in the rear seat in
hot weather.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sensitive to air flows and draughts.
134
Air distribution
The figure consists of three buttons. When pressing the buttons the corresponding figure is illuminated in the screen (see following figure) and an
arrow in front of each part of the figure shows
the air distribution that is selected. For more
information, see the air distribution table
(p. 141).
The selected air distribution is shown in the centre console display screen.
Related information
•
•
•
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
Auto-regulation (p. 138)
Air distribution - recirculation (p. 140)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Electronic climate control - ECC
ECC (Electronic Climate Control) maintains the
temperature selected in the passenger compart-
Temperature control (p. 138), left-hand side
Electrically heated front seat (p. 136), left
side
Max. defroster (p. 139)
Fan (p. 137)
Air distribution (p. 133) - ventilation floor
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
ment and can be set separately for the driver's
side and passenger side.
Rear window and door mirror defrosters
(p. 109)
Electrically heated front seat (p. 136), right
side
The auto function is used to automatically control temperature, air conditioning, fan speed,
recirculation and air distribution.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
Temperature control (p. 138), right-hand
side
Recirculation (p. 140)
AUTO - Automatic climate control (p. 138)
AC - Air conditioning on/off (p. 139)
135
CLIMATE CONTROL
Heated front seats*
The front seat heating has three positions for
increasing the comfort for driver and passenger
when it is cold.
There are three heat levels that give different
heating outputs:
•
Highest heat level - three orange fields illuminate in the centre console's screen (see
figure above).
•
Lower heat level - two orange fields illuminate in the screen.
•
Lowest heat level - one orange field illuminates in the screen.
•
Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
•
Heated rear seat* (p. 137)
WARNING
Current heat level is shown in the centre console display
screen.
Press the button repeatedly to
change between the different
levels or to deactivate the function.
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
Automatic start of driver's seat heating
With the automatic start of the driver's seat heating activated, the driver's seat will have the highest heat level when the engine is started.
Automatic start takes place when the car is cold
and the ambient temperature is lower than
approx. +10 °C.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function
in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 118).
136
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Heated rear seat*
WARNING
seat's2
The heating for the rear
outer positions
has three positions for increasing the comfort for
passengers when it is cold.
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
Fan
The fan should always be activated in order to
avoid misting on the windows.
NOTE
If the fan is fully switched off then the air conditioning is not engaged - which can cause a
risk of misting on the windows.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
•
Heated front seats* (p. 136)
Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's lamps.
Press the button repeatedly to change between
the different levels or to deactivate the function.
There are three heat levels that give different
heating outputs:
•
•
•
•
2
Fan knob
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO is
selected, then the fan speed is
regulated automatically
(p. 138) - the fan speed previously set is disengaged.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
•
Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 135)
Highest heat level - three lamps illuminate.
Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.
Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.
Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.
Heated rear seat is not specified with the option for integrated two-stage booster seat (p. 52).
* Option/accessory. 137
CLIMATE CONTROL
Auto-regulation
The auto function automatically regulates temperature (p. 138), air conditioning (p. 139), fan
speed (p. 137), recirculation (p. 140) and air
distribution (p. 133).
If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled
automatically. All manual settings are disengaged when
AUTO is pressed. The display
screen shows AUTO
Temperature control in the
passenger compartment
When the car is started, the most recent temperature setting is resumed.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
CLIMATE.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in the
menu system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 118).
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
Current temperature for each side is shown in the centre
console's display screen.
The temperature can be
adjusted with the knob - separately for the driver's side and
the passenger side.
138
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
•
•
Actual temperature (p. 130)
Electronic climate control - ECC (p. 135)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air conditioning
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
incoming air as required.
When the lamp in the AC button illuminates, the air conditioning is controlled by the system's automatic function.
Demisting and defrosting the
windscreen
For cars without heated windscreen there is one
defrost level:
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster are
used to quickly remove misting and ice from the
windscreen and side windows.
•
Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illuminates in the screen.
•
Switch off the function - no symbol illuminates.
For cars with heated windscreen there are two
defrost levels:
When the lamp in the AC button is switched off the air conditioning is disconnected. Other functions are still
controlled automatically. When the max. defroster
function (p. 139) is activated, the air conditioning
is switched on automatically so that the air is
dehumidified at the maximum setting.
The selected setting is shown in the centre console's
screen.
Heated windscreen*
Max. defroster
The light in the defroster button illuminates when the function is active.
Press the button repeatedly to
change between the different
levels or to deactivate the func-
•
Start the heating for the windscreen3 - symbol (1) illuminates in the screen.
•
Start the heating for the windscreen3 and air
flow to the windows - symbols (1) and (2)
illuminate in the screen.
•
Switch off the function - no symbol illuminates.
NOTE
Heated windscreen and IR window (p. 20)
may have an impact on the performance of
transponders and other communication
equipment.
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
where de-icing may take longer.
tion.
3
If the character C is shown in the rearview mirror when the heated windscreen is activated then the compass (p. 111)* must be recalibrated.
}}
* Option/accessory. 139
CLIMATE CONTROL
||
NOTE
Electrically heated windscreen is not available
when the engine is auto-stopped (p. 284).
The following also takes place when the max.
defroster function is active in order to provide
maximum dehumidification in the passenger
compartment:
•
•
When recirculation is engaged
the orange lamp in the button
illuminates.
the air conditioning is automatically engaged
recirculation and the air quality system are
automatically disengaged.
NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is operating at max.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
Related information
•
Air distribution - recirculation
Select recirculation to shut out bad air, exhaust
gases etc. from the passenger compartment, i.e.
no outside air is taken into the car when this
function is activated.
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car is recirculated for too long
then there is a risk of misting on the insides
of the windows.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system will
exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the outside
temperature. This reduces the risk of ice, misting
and bad air.
It is possible to activate/deactivate the function
in the menu system MY CAR. For a description of
the menu system, see MY CAR (p. 118).
140
NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recirculation
is always deactivated.
Related information
•
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
•
Air distribution in the passenger compartment (p. 133)
•
Air distribution - table (p. 141)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Air distribution - table
Three buttons are used to select the distribution
(p. 133) of the air.
Air distribution
Use
Air to windows. Some air flows from the air vents. The air is not recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.
to remove ice and misting quickly.
Air to windscreen, via defroster vent, and side windows. Some air flows
from the air vents.
to avoid misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to
achieve this the fan level must not be too low).
Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in warm, dry weather.
Airflow to the head and chest from dashboard air vents.
to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.
}}
141
CLIMATE CONTROL
||
Air distribution
Use
Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dashboard air
vents.
to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold
or humid weather.
Air to floor and from dashboard air vents.
in sunny weather with cool outside temperatures.
Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows.
to direct heat or cold to the floor.
Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor.
to provide cooling along the floor in hot, dry weather or warming upwards in cold weather.
Related information
142
•
General information on climate control
(p. 130)
•
Air distribution - recirculation (p. 140)
CLIMATE CONTROL
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater*
Refuelling
Preconditioning prepares the heater, engine and
passenger compartment before departure so
that both wear and energy needs during the journey are reduced.
automatically and a message appears on the
information display. Acknowledge the message
by pressing the indicator stalk (p. 115) OK button once.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the heater combined with
short journeys leads to the battery discharging and consequential starting problems.
The heater can be started directly (p. 144) or
with a timer (p. 145).
The heater cannot start if the outside temperature exceeds 15 °C. The heater's maximum running time is 50 minutes.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven heater indoors.
Exhaust gases are secreted.
NOTE
When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is active
there may be smoke from the right-hand
wheel housing, which is perfectly normal.
The car should be driven for the same time as
the heater is used to ensure that the car's
battery is recharged adequately to replace the
energy consumed by the heater when it is
used on a regular basis. The heater is used
for a maximum of 50 minutes each time.
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch
off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater before starting to refuel.
Related information
•
Check in the combined instrument panel that
the heater is switched off. The heat symbol is
shown when it is operating.
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages (p. 147)
•
Additional heater* (p. 149)
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the
car should point downhill to ensure that there is a
supply of fuel to the fuel-driven heater.
Battery and fuel
If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel
level is too low, the heater will be switched off
* Option/accessory. 143
CLIMATE CONTROL
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - direct start
Direct start via the remote control key*
The engine block heater and passenger compartment heater can be started directly.
Direct start can be performed via:
•
•
•
information display
Status is also shown in the trip computer during
heating.
remote control key*
mobile*.
Direct start via app*
Upon direct start of the engine block and passenger compartment heater (p. 143), it will run
for 50 minutes.
Heating of the passenger compartment will begin
as soon as the engine coolant has reached the
correct temperature.
NOTE
The car can be started and driven while the
heater is running.
Direct start via the information display
144
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
3.
Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct
start in order to activate the heater and
select with OK.
4.
Exit the menu with RESET.
If the button for information
is depressed
when the heater is active then the indicator lamp
will show the status for this - at the same time
the car's lock status (p. 169) is shown. While the
status is being investigated the indicator lamp
emits a pair of short flashes followed by a constant glow if the heater is active.
Indicator lamp on remote control key with PCC*.
The engine block heater and passenger compartment heater can be activated via the remote control key:
–
Hold the button for approach lighting
depressed for 2 seconds.
Hazard warning flashers provide information
in accordance with the following:
•
5 short flashes followed by a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds - the signal
has reached the car and the heater has
been activated.
•
5 short flashes - the signal has reached
the car but the heater has not been activated.
•
Hazard warning flashers remain switched
off - the signal has not reached the car.
Activation and information on selected settings
are available via the Volvo On Call* app.
Related information
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer (p. 145)
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - immediate stop (p. 145)
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages (p. 147)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - immediate
stop
The engine block heater and passenger compartment heater can be deactivated directly via
the information display.
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
3.
Scroll forward in the next menu to Stop in
order to deactivate the heater and select with
OK.
4.
Exit the menu with RESET.
Related information
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - timer
6.
Briefly press OK to move to the flashing
minutes setting.
The timer of the engine block and passenger
compartment heater (p. 143) is connected to
the car's clock.
7.
Select the required minute using the thumbwheel.
8.
Press OK5 to confirm the setting.
9.
Go back in the menu structure using RESET.
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car
is heated and ready. The car's electronic system
calculates when heating should be started based
on the outside temperature.
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
10. Select the other time (continue from step 2)
or exit the menu with RESET.
Starting
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
3.
Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and activate with OK.
Exit the menu with RESET.
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - direct start (p. 144)
Adjusting4
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
4.
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - timer (p. 145)
2.
Switching off
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages (p. 147)
Use the thumbwheel (p. 115) to scroll to one
of the timers Parking heater and select
with OK.
4 Setting the timer is only possible with
5 Press OK again to activate the timer.
the engine switched off.
3.
Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4.
Briefly press OK to move to the lit hours setting.
5.
Select the required hour using the thumbwheel.
A timer-started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed. Proceed as
follows:
1.
Press OK to access the menu.
2.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to Parking
heater and select with OK.
> If a timer is set but not activated then a
clock icon is shown beside the set time.
}}
* Option/accessory. 145
CLIMATE CONTROL
||
3.
Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
4.
Deactivate the timer as follows:
•
•
5.
long press on OK or
short press on OK to continue in the
menu. Then select to stop the timer and
confirm with OK.
Exit the menu with RESET.
A timer-started heater can be switched off
directly (p. 145).
Related information
•
146
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* - messages (p. 147)
* Option/accessory.
CLIMATE CONTROL
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater* - messages
Symbols and display messages regarding the
engine block and passenger compartment
heater (p. 143) differ depending on whether the
combined instrument panel (p. 68) is analogue
or digital.
When one of the timers has been activated, the
symbol for activated timer illuminates in the display at the same time as the set time is shown
next to the symbol.
Symbol for activated timer in analogue
combined instrument panel.
Symbol for activated timer in digital
combined instrument panel.
The table shows symbols and display texts that
appear.
When the heater has been activated
the heat symbol illuminates in the
information display.
Symbol
Message
Specification
The heater is switched on and running.
Fuel operated heater stopped Battery saving mode
The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.
}}
* Option/accessory. 147
CLIMATE CONTROL
||
Symbol
Message
Specification
Fuel operated heater stopped Low
fuel level
Starting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate starting
the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.
Fuel operated heater Service
required
Heater not working. Contact a workshop for repair. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop.
A display text clears automatically after a time or
after one press on the indicator stalk (p. 115) OK
button.
148
CLIMATE CONTROL
Additional heater*
zones6
In cold climate
an additional heater may
be required to obtain the correct operating temperature in the engine and to obtain sufficient
heating in the passenger compartment.
A fuel-driven additional heater (p. 149) is fitted
in cars with diesel engines.
In a semi-cold6 climate zone diesel-driven cars
have an electric additional heater (p. 150)
instead of a fuel-driven version.
Cars with certain petrol engines7 have an electric
additional heater integrated into the car's climate
control system.
Related information
•
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* (p. 143)
Fuel-driven additional heater*
1.
The car is equipped with either an electric
(p. 150) or a fuel-driven additional heater
(p. 149).
Before starting the engine: Select key position I (p. 83).
2.
Press OK to access the menu.
3.
Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional
heater8 or Settings9 and select with OK.
4.
Select one of the options ON or OFF using
the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
5.
Exit the menu with RESET.
The heater starts automatically when extra heat is
required when the engine is running.
The heater is switched off automatically when the
correct temperature is reached or when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
When the additional heater is active there
may be smoke from the right-hand wheel
housing, which is perfectly normal.
Auto mode or shutdown
The additional heater's automatic start sequence
can be switched off if required.
NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key position I - any adjustments must therefore be
made before starting the engine.
Passenger compartment heater*
If the additional heater is supplemented with a
timer function then it can be used as a passenger compartment heater (p. 143).
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the fuel-driven additional heater should be switched off for short
distances.
6
7
8
9
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the geographical areas concerned.
An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding the engines concerned.
Analogue combined instrument panel.
Digital combined instrument panel.
* Option/accessory. 149
CLIMATE CONTROL
Electric additional heater*
The car is equipped with either a fuel-driven
(p. 149) or an electric additional heater (p. 149).
The heater cannot be controlled manually, but is
instead activated automatically after the engine
has been started in outside temperatures below
14 °C and is switched off after the set passenger
compartment temperature has been reached.
Related information
•
150
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater* (p. 143)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
LOADING AND STORAGE
Storage spaces
Overview of storage spaces in the passenger
compartment.
152
LOADING AND STORAGE
Storage compartment in door panel
Storage pocket* on front edge of front seat
cushions
Ticket clip
Glovebox (p. 154)
Storage compartment, cup holder (p. 154)
Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
Storage pocket
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc.
in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
* Option/accessory. 153
LOADING AND STORAGE
Tunnel console
The tunnel console is located between the front
seats.
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter
and ashtray*
Glovebox
The glovebox is located on the passenger side.
A detachable ashtray is fitted in the cup holder
under the armrest. The cigarette lighter is fitted
in the 12 V socket (p. 155) for the front seat.
The ashtray in the tunnel console (p. 154) is
detached by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. The
button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull out
the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated
coils.
Related information
•
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and
USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger.
If ashtray and cigarette lighter (p. 154) are
specified, then there is a cigarette lighter in
the 12 V socket (p. 155) for the front seat,
and a detachable ashtray in the cup holder.
Avoid storing coins, keys or similar metal objects
in the cup holder as such objects could accidentally trigger the alarm (p. 185)*.
Storage spaces (p. 152)
The owner's manual and maps can be kept in
here for example. There are also holders for pens
on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can be
locked* (p. 180) using the key blade (p. 171).
Related information
•
Storage spaces (p. 152)
Related information
•
•
154
Storage spaces (p. 152)
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ashtray* (p. 154)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
Inlaid mats*
Vanity mirror
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets
Inlay mats collect e.g. rubbish and slush. Volvo
supplies specially manufactured inlay mats.
The vanity mirror is located on the rear of the sun
visor.
The electrical sockets (12 V) are located next to
the cup holder1 and rear of the tunnel console.
Vanity mirror with lighting.
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by the
driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
the pins so that it does not get caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 390)
The lamp for the vanity mirror, on the driver's
side* and passenger side respectively, is
switched on automatically when the cover is
raised.
Related information
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 362)
G021440
•
12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
1
If ashtray and cigarette lighter are specified then there is no cup holder and adjacent 12 V socket.
}}
* Option/accessory. 155
LOADING AND STORAGE
||
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV screens,
music players and mobile phones. For the socket
to supply current, the remote control key must be
in at least key position I (p. 83).
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is
used at a time. If both sockets in the tunnel
console are used simultaneously, 7.5 A (90
W) per socket is applicable.
WARNING
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sockets,
no other current consumer must be connected to the other one.
Always leave the plug in the socket when the
socket is not in use.
NOTE
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.
display screens, music players and mobile
phones - which are connected to one of the
passenger compartment's 12V electrical
sockets, could be activated by the climate
control system, even when the remote control
key has been removed or when the car is
locked, for example, when the parking heater
is activated at a preset time.
For this reason remove the plugs from the
electrical sockets for optional equipment or
accessories when not in use because the battery could be drained in the event of such an
occurrence!
156
NOTE
Loading
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
The total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight.
For more detailed information on weights, see
Weights (p. 400).
The tailgate is opened via a button on
the lighting panel or the remote control
key, see Locking/unlocking - tailgate
(p. 180).
The compressor for emergency puncture
repair (p. 335) has been tested and approved
by Volvo.
Related information
•
Tunnel console - cigarette lighter and ashtray* (p. 154)
•
12 V electrical socket - cargo area* (p. 159)
WARNING
The car’s driving properties change depending on the weight and positioning of the load.
To bear in mind when loading
•
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Note that objects must not prevent the function
of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of
the rear seat's backrests is folded down, see
WHIPS - seating position (p. 40).
•
•
Centre the load.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests.
* Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
•
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
•
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets
with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h
(30 mph) carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Load retaining eyelets (p. 158)
Safety net* (p. 159)
Loading - long load (p. 157)
Roof load (p. 158)
Loading - long load
To simplify loading (p. 156) in the cargo area,
the rear seat backrest can be folded down. The
passenger seat2 backrest can also be folded*
for an extra long load.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
If the rear seat backrest needs to be lowered, see
Seats, rear (p. 87).
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compromised or
eliminated by high loads.
•
Never load cargo above the backrest.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy braking
the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to
the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into a
drive position - and the car could then move
off.
2
Only applies to comfort seats.
* Option/accessory. 157
LOADING AND STORAGE
Roof load
Load retaining eyelets
Loading - bag holder*
The load carriers recommended for roof loads
are the ones developed by Volvo. This is in order
to avoid damage to the car and in order to
achieve the maximum possible safety during a
journey.
The folding load retaining eyelets are used to
fasten straps in order to anchor items in the
cargo area.
The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and
prevents them from overturning and spreading
their contents across the cargo area.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers and
load are properly secured. Lash the load
securely with retaining straps.
•
Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
•
The size of the area exposed to the wind, and
therefore fuel consumption, increase with the
size of the load.
•
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy
braking and hard cornering.
G017745
Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers.
Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which protrude may cause injury under violent braking.
WARNING
Always secure large and heavy objects with a
seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads.
For information about the maximum permitted
load on the roof, including load carriers and
any space box, see Weights (p. 400).
Related information
•
1.
Fold up the holder, which is part of the floor
hatch.
2.
Fasten the bags with strap and secure the
carrying handle in the hooks.
Related information
•
Loading (p. 156)
Loading (p. 156)
Related information
•
158
Loading (p. 156)
* Option/accessory.
LOADING AND STORAGE
12 V electrical socket - cargo area*
NOTE
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. screens,
music players and mobile phones.
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the use
of Volvo's recommended temporary emergency puncture repair (TMK), see Emergency
puncture repair* (p. 335).
Safety net*3
A safety net prevents loads from being thrown
forward in the passenger compartment in the
event of sudden braking.
The safety net is fitted into four mounting points.
Related information
•
Tunnel console - 12 V-sockets (p. 155)
Lower the cover to access the electrical socket.
•
The socket also provides voltage when the
remote control key is not in the ignition
switch.
IMPORTANT
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).
NOTE
Safety net.
For safety reasons, the safety net must always be
correctly fastened and secured.
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can
be secured two different locations in the car:
•
•
Rear fitting - Behind the rear seat backrest
Front fitting - Behind the front seat backrests.
Remember that using the electrical socket
with the engine switched off involves the risk
of discharging the car's starter battery.
}}
* Option/accessory. 159
LOADING AND STORAGE
||
WARNING
2.
Loads in the luggage compartment must be
anchored well, and also using a correctly fitted safety net.
Hook the safety net's snap hooks into the
front floor eyes in the cargo area. Make sure
that the safety net's storage pockets are
turned backwards.
Attaching
2.
Hook the safety net's snap hooks into the
eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails - it is
easier if the backrests are straightened and
the seats are moved forward slightly. Make
sure that the safety net's storage pockets are
turned backwards.
NOTE
The easiest way to fit the safety net is via one
of the rear doors.
WARNING
It is necessary to ensure that the upper securing points of the safety net are fitted correctly
and that the snap hooks are hooked in properly.
Damaged nets must not be used.
Rear fitting
1. Fold out the safety net.
Rear fitting.
3.
Hook one of the net's retaining hooks into
the rear roof mounting.
4.
Hook the net's other retaining hook into the
roof mounting on the opposite side.
Take care to press forward the net's retaining hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end position.
Front fitting
1. Fold out the safety net.
3
160
Standard in certain markets.
Front fitting.
Pay attention to make sure that you do not
press the seat/backrest hard against the net
when the seat/backrest is moved back again
- only adjust until the seat/backrest makes
contact with the net.
LOADING AND STORAGE
IMPORTANT
If the seat/backrest is pressed hard backwards against the safety net then the net
and/or its roof mountings could be damaged.
Safety grille*
A safety grille prevents loads or pets from being
thrown forward in the passenger compartment in
the event of sudden braking.
cargo area is required. However, if desired, the
safety grille can be dismantled and removed from
the car.
For information about the tools required and
methods for fitting/removal, see the installation
instructions4 that were included with the initial
purchase.
3.
Hook one of the net's retaining hooks into
the front roof mounting.
4.
Hook the net's other retaining hook into the
roof mounting on the opposite side.
For safety reasons, the safety grille must always
be correctly fastened and secured when being
refitted.
Take care to press forward the net's retaining hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end position.
Related information
G031978
Removal and storage
The safety net can be easily removed and folded
up.
1.
Press in the snap hooks' spring-loaded flaps
and remove the snap hooks from the eyes.
2.
Loosen the net's retaining hooks from the
roof mountings.
3.
Fold up the net.
The folded safety net can be stored under the
cargo compartment floor.
Related information
•
•
4
Loading (p. 156)
Safety grille* (p. 161)
•
•
•
Safety net* (p. 159)
Loading (p. 156)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 158)
Folding up
Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and
pull back/up.
IMPORTANT
The protective grille cannot be folded up or
down when a cargo cover is fitted.
Fitting/removal
The safety grille is normally permanently installed
in the car because it can easily be folded up in
the roof and so be out of the way if a longer
Installation instructions no. 30715972.
* Option/accessory. 161
LOADING AND STORAGE
Cargo cover*5
Press both sides in. A "click" should be audible and the red marking should disappear.
> Check that both end pieces are locked.
Removing the cargo cover
1.
Press in one end piece button and lift it out.
2.
Carefully angle the cover up/out and the
other end piece loosens automatically.
G031977
Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing
disc
Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it
into the recesses at the cargo area's rear posts.
IMPORTANT
The protective grille cannot be folded up or
down when the cargo cover is fitted.
In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear
sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the cargo
area when it is fitted.
–
Pull the sealing disc back gently, free from
its support shelves, and lower.
Related information
•
•
Loading (p. 156)
Loading - long load (p. 157)
Attaching the cargo cover
Move one end piece of the cover into the
recess on the side panel.
Move the other end piece into the corresponding recess.
5
162
Standard in certain markets.
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key
Amongst other things, the remote control key is
used for locking/unlocking and starting the
engine.
There are two variants of remote control key Remote control key in basic version and Remote
control key with PCC (Personal Car
Communicator)*.
Functionality
Locking/unlocking and
detachable key blade
A
B
BasicA
x
All remote control keys have a detachable key
blade (p. 171) made of metal. The visible section
is available in two versions so that it is possible to
distinguish between the remote control keys.
More remote control keys can be ordered - but
not variants other than the one supplied with the
car. Up to six keys can be programmed and used
for one single car.
The car is supplied with two remote control keys.
with
PCCB
Keyless locking/unlocking
x
Keyless engine starting
x
Information button and
indicator lamps
x
If you lose a remote control key then a new one
can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The remaining remote control keys must be
taken to the Volvo workshop. The code of the
missing remote control key must be erased from
the system as a theft prevention measure.
If there are children in the car:
The current number of keys registered to the car
can be checked in the menu system MY CAR.
For a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 118).
Remember to switch off the supply to the
power windows and sunroof by removing the
remote control key if the driver leaves the car.
•
WARNING
x
Remote control key - losing
Related information
Remote control key - functions (p. 167)
Related information
•
Remote control key - functions (p. 167)
5-button key
6-button key
Remote control key with PCC has extended functionality compared with the remote control key in
the basic version - e.g. support for keyless starting and locking/unlocking (Keyless Drive
(p. 174)) as well as certain unique functions
(p. 169).
164
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key personalisation*
The key memory in the remote control key
(p. 164) means that certain settings in the car
can be individually adapted for different people.
The key memory function is available in combination with, for example, power* driver's seat.
Settings for door mirrors (p. 108), driver's seat,
steering force (p. 190) and the combined instrument panel's theme, contrast and colour mode
(p. 69) can be stored in the memory, depending
on the car's equipment level.
The function1 can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 118).
When the function is activated, the settings are
automatically linked to the key memory. This
means that a change in a setting will automatically be saved to the specific remote control key's
memory.
Storing settings
1.
Unlock the car with the remote control key in
whose memory the setting2 shall be stored.
2.
Make sure that the key memory function is
activated in the menu system MY CAR.
3.
Make the desired settings for e.g. the seat
and the door mirrors.
4.
The settings are stored in the current remote
control key's memory.
The next time the car is unlocked with the same
remote control key, the positions that are stored
in the key memory will be set automatically - providing that they have been changed since the last
time the current remote control key was used.
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press one
of the setting buttons for the seat or memory
buttons in order to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
1
2
WARNING
Proceed as follows in order to store the settings
and use the key memory in the remote control
key:
Called Car key memory in MY CAR.
This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do
not play with the controls. Check that there
are no objects in front of, behind or under the
seat during adjustment. Make sure that none
of the passengers in the rear seat is in danger
of becoming trapped.
Changing settings
If several people each with a remote control key
approach the car, then the settings for e.g. seat
and door mirrors are implemented for the person
whose remote control key unlocks the driver's
door.
If the driver's door has been opened by person A
with remote control key A, but person B with
remote control key B shall drive, then the settings
can be changed as follows:
•
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel, person B presses
the button for unlocking on his/her remote
control key, see Remote control key - functions (p. 167).
•
Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 86).
•
Adjust seat and door mirrors manually, see
Seats, front - electrically operated* (p. 86)
and Door mirrors (p. 108).
}}
* Option/accessory. 165
LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Reactivation of settings
Locking/unlocking - indicator
Immobiliser
When the car is locked or after 30 minutes if the
car is left unlocked, the key memory will be deactivated and a standard driver profile will be set. To
reactivate the key memory for the current remote
control key, the following is required.
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key (p. 164) the direction indicators confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly
performed.
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection
system that prevents an unauthorised person
from starting the car.
For cars without keyless start and lock
system
The settings that are stored in the key memory
are activated if the car is unlocked by pressing
the remote control key's unlock button.
Locking - one flash and the door mirrors are
folded3 in.
•
Unlocking - two flashes and the door mirrors
are folded3 out.
For cars with keyless start and lock system
The key memory is activated if:
After locking the indication is only given if all
locks are activated once the doors have been
closed.
1.
The car is unlocked either by pressing the
remote control key's unlock button or via
keyless unlocking.
Selecting the function
2.
If the car is unlocked, a key scan is made
when the driver's door is opened. If a unique
remote control key is found, its stored settings will be activated. If the car is locked,
see the previous point.
Related information
•
3
166
•
Each remote control key (p. 164) has a unique
code. The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key with the correct code.
The following error messages in the combined
instrument panel's information display are related
to the electronic immobiliser:
Different options for indicating locking/unlocking
with light can be set in the car's menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu system,
see MY CAR (p. 118).
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive* (p. 174)
Alarm indicator* (p. 186)
Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 169)
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Message
Insert car
key
Car key
not found
Specification
Error when reading the remote
control key during starting Remove the key from the ignition
switch, press it in again and
make a new start attempt.
Error reading the remote control
key during starting - Try to start
again.
If the error persists: Insert the
remote key into the ignition
switch and try to start again.
Immobiliser Try
to start
again
Error in immobiliser system during starting. If the error persists:
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
For starting the car, see Starting the engine
(p. 270).
Related information
•
4
Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking
system* (p. 167)
Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system*
Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system4 makes it possible to track and locate the
car, and to remotely activate the immobiliser.
Remote control key - functions
The remote control key in basic version has
functions such as locking and unlocking the
doors.
Functions
Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more information and assistance with activating the system.
Related information
•
•
Remote control key (p. 164)
Immobiliser (p. 166)
Remote control key in basic version.
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
Tailgate
Panic function
}}
* Option/accessory. 167
LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Press and hold to open all windows simultaneously. For more information, see Global opening
(p. 179).
The function can be changed from unlocking all
doors simultaneously, to unlocking the driver's
door only with one press of the button and, after
a further press of the button - within ten seconds
- unlocking the remaining doors.
Related information
•
•
•
Remote control key (p. 164)
Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 169)
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 178)
The function can be changed in the menu system
MY CAR. For a description of the menu system,
see MY CAR (p. 118).
Remote control key with PCC*( Personal Car
Communicator).
Information
Function buttons
Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate
while the alarm is activated.
Press and hold to close all the windows and sunroof* simultaneously. For more information, see
Global opening (p. 179).
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed using
the remote control key, check that nobody's
hands are trapped.
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tailgate
while the alarm is deactivated.
168
Approach light duration – Used to switch
on the car's lighting at a distance. For more information, see Approach lighting (p. 104).
Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the alarm
for the tailgate only. For more information, see
Locking/unlocking - tailgate (p. 180). On cars
with Power operated tailgate (p. 181)* the tailgate is opened after the button is kept
depressed.
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency.
Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds
or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the
direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after approx. 3 minutes.
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key - range
Remote control key functions (in its basic version) have a range of approx. 20 metres from
the car.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed move closer and try again.
Remote control key with PCC* unique functions
A remote control key with PCC (Personal Car
Communicator) has enhanced functionality compared with a remote control key in basic version
(p. 164) in the form of an information button and
indicator lamps.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
topographical conditions, etc. The car can
always be locked/unlocked with the key blade
(p. 172).
If the remote control key is removed from the car
when the engine is running or key position I or II
(p. 83) is active, and all doors are closed, then a
warning message is shown in the information display in the combined instrument panel and a
short audio reminder signal sounds at the same
time.
The message extinguishes when the remote control key is returned to the car, followed by a press
of the OK button, or when all doors are closed.
Related information
•
•
Using the information button
–
Press the information button
.
> All indicator lamps flash for approximately
7 seconds and the light travels around on
the remote control key. This indicates that
information from the car is being scanned.
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is interrupted.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates
with repeated use of the information button
and in different locations (as well as after 7
seconds and after the light has travelled
around on the PCC), contact a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Remote control key with PCC.
Information button
Indicator lamps display information in accordance
with the following illustration:
Indicator lamps
Using the information button enables access to
certain information from the car via the indicator
lamps.
Remote control key (p. 164)
Remote control key - functions (p. 167)
}}
* Option/accessory. 169
LOCKS AND ALARM
||
Remote control key with PCC* range
NOTE
If no indicator lamps illuminate when the
information button is used within range then
this may be because the last communication
between the remote control key and the car
was disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions, etc.
The range of a remote control key with PCC
(Personal Car Communicator) for locking,
unlocking the doors and tailgate is approx. 20
metres from the car - the other functions are up
to approx. 100 metres.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed move closer and try again.
NOTE
Green continuous light – the car is locked.
Yellow continuous light – the car is unlocked.
Red continuous light – the alarm has been
triggered since the car was locked.
Red light flashing alternately in both indicator
lamps – The alarm was triggered less than 5
minutes ago.
Related information
•
170
Remote control key with PCC* - range
(p. 170)
The information button function may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
topographical conditions, etc.
Related information
•
Keyless Drive* - remote control key range
(p. 174)
•
Remote control key - range (p. 169)
Outside the remote control key's range
If the remote control key is too far away from the
car for the information to be read then the status
the car was last left in is shown, without the light
in the indicator lamps travelling around on the
remote control key.
If several remote control keys are used for the
car then it is only the one last used for locking/
unlocking that shows the correct status.
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Detachable key blade
A remote control key contains a detachable key
blade of metal with which some functions can
be activated and some operations carried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades.
Detachable key blade - detaching/
attaching
Detaching/attaching the detachable key blade
(p. 171) is carried out as follows:
Removing the key blade
Related information
•
Detachable key blade - unlocking doors
(p. 172)
•
Child safety locks - manual activation
(p. 184)
•
Passenger airbag - activating/deactivating*
(p. 36)
Key blade functions
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
•
the driver's door is unlocked manually if central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key, see Detachable key
blade - unlocking doors (p. 172).
•
the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks
can be activated/deactivated (p. 184).
•
•
access to the glovebox is blocked.
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
the airbag for front passenger seat
(PACOS*) can be activated/deactivated
(p. 36).
At the same time pull the key blade straight
out backwards.
Related information
•
•
Attaching the key blade
Remote control key - functions (p. 167)
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in the
remote control key (p. 164).
Remote control key (p. 164)
1.
Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
2.
Lightly press the key blade. You should hear
a "click" when the key blade is locked in.
* Option/accessory. 171
LOCKS AND ALARM
Detachable key blade - unlocking
doors
The detachable key blade (p. 171) can be used
if central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key (p. 164), e.g. if the key's battery has run out.
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are discharged - then the driver's door is unlocked as
follows:
1.
Unlock the driver's door with the key blade in
the door handle's lock cylinder. For illustration and more information, see Keyless
Drive* - unlocking with the key blade
(p. 176).
Remote control key (p. 164)
Remote control key - replacing the
battery
Remote control key - replacing the battery
(p. 172)
The battery5 for the remote control key may need
to be replaced.
Related information
•
•
The battery for the remote control key should be
replaced if:
•
the information symbol in the combined
instrument panel illuminates and the display
shows Car key battery low See manual
and/or
•
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within 20 metres
from the car.
NOTE
When the door has been unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered.
2.
Deactivate the alarm by inserting the remote
control key in the ignition switch.
For cars with keyless start and lock system, see
Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade
(p. 176).
5
172
Remote control key with PCC has two batteries.
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the buttons facing up, this is to avoid the batteries
falling out when it is opened.
Battery type
Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V one in the remote control key, two in the remote
control key with PCC.
NOTE
IMPORTANT
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key/PCC fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, subsection 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or
replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop
fulfil the above criteria.
Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this may
impair their function.
Battery replacement
Closely study how the battery/batteries are
secured on the inside of the cover, with
regard to their (+) and (–) sides.
Remote control key (one battery)
Opening
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the hole
behind the spring-loaded catch and gently
prize the remote control key up.
1.
Carefully prize out the battery.
2.
Install a new one with the (+) side down.
Assembly
1.
Press the remote control key together.
2.
Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into its
slot.
3.
Lightly press the key blade. You should hear
a "click" when the key blade is locked in.
Remote control key with PCC* (two
batteries)
1.
Carefully prize out the batteries.
2.
First install one new one with the (+) side up.
3.
Position the white plastic tab in between and
finally install a second new battery with the
(+) side down.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are disposed of in a manner which is kind to the
environment.
Related information
•
•
Remote control key (p. 164)
Remote control key - functions (p. 167)
* Option/accessory. 173
LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless drive*
Cars equipped with Keyless Drive have a starting and locking system that can be operated
keylessly.
With the keyless start and lock system the car
can be started, locked and unlocked without the
remote control key (p. 164)6 inserted in the ignition switch. It is enough to have the remote control key with you in a pocket. The system makes it
easier and more convenient to e.g. open the car
when your hands are full.
Both of the remote control keys included with the
car have keyless functionality. It is possible to
order more remote control keys.
Keyless Drive* - remote control key
range
In order to unlock the doors or tailgate automatically without pressing a button on the remote
control key7, a remote control key must be within
approx. 1.5 metres from the car's door handle or
tailgate.
The person who wishes to lock or unlock a door
must have the remote control key with him or her.
It is not possible to lock or unlock a door if the
remote control key is on the opposite side of the
car.
or II (p. 83) is active, and if all doors are closed,
then a warning message is shown in the information display in the combined instrument panel
and an audio reminder signal sounds at the same
time.
When the remote control key has been returned
to the car, the warning message goes off and the
audible reminder ceases once either/or:
•
•
a door has been opened and closed
•
The OK button has been pressed.
the remote control key has been inserted in
the ignition switch
Related information
•
•
The car's electrical system can be set to three
different levels - key position 0, I and II (p. 83) with the remote control key.
Keyless drive* (p. 174)
Keyless Drive* - antenna location (p. 177)
Related information
•
Keyless Drive* - remote control key range
(p. 174)
•
Keyless drive* - secure handling of the
remote control key (p. 175)
•
Keyless Drive* - interference to remote control key function (p. 175)
The red rings in the above figure indicate the
range covered by the system's antennas.
If all remote control keys are removed from the
car when the engine is running or key position I
6
7
174
Only applies to Remote Control Key with PCC.
Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Keyless drive* - secure handling of
the remote control key
Keyless Drive* - interference to
remote control key function
It is important to handle the car's remote control
keys with great care.
Electromagnetic fields and screening can interfere with the remote control key's keyless functions (p. 174).
If one of the remote control keys8 has been left
in the car then the keyless functions are deactivated in case the car is e.g. locked with the other
remote control key that belongs to the car. This
prevents unauthorised entry.
The next time the car is unlocked with the other
remote control key the forgotten remote control
key is reactivated again.
IMPORTANT
Avoid leaving the remote control key with
PCC behind in the car. If someone breaks into
your car and takes the remote control key, it
will e.g. be possible to start the car by pressing the remote control key in the ignition
switch and then pressing the START/STOP
ENGINE button.
Related information
•
8
Keyless drive* (p. 174)
Applies to remote control key with PCC (Personal Car Communicator).
Keyless Drive* - locking
Cars equipped with keyless start and lock system have a button on the outside handle of the
doors for locking/unlocking.
NOTE
Do not place/store the PCC near a mobile
phone or metal object - no closer than 10-15
cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless, use
the remote control key and the key blade like a
remote control key in basic version, see Remote
control key - functions (p. 167).
Related information
•
Remote control key - replacing the battery
(p. 172)
•
Keyless drive* - secure handling of the
remote control key (p. 175)
•
Keyless Drive* - remote control key range
(p. 174)
Cars with the keyless system have a button on the outside door handles.
Lock the doors and the tailgate by pressing the
lock button on one of the door handles on the
outside.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed before
the car can be locked - otherwise the car is not
locked.
}}
* Option/accessory. 175
LOCKS AND ALARM
||
NOTE
In cars with automatic gearbox selectors, the
gear selector must be set to the P position;
otherwise the car can be neither locked nor
alarmed.
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive* (p. 174)
Alarm indicator* (p. 186)
Keyless drive* - unlocking
Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a
door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pressure
plate is actuated - open the door or tailgate as
normal.
Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the
key blade
If central locking cannot be unlocked with the
remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then the left-hand front door can be
opened using the detachable key blade.
Related information
•
•
Keyless drive* (p. 174)
Keyless Drive* - locking (p. 175)
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.
To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's
plastic cover must be removed - this is also done
with the key blade:
1.
176
Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight up
into the hole on the underside of the door
handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover loosens automatically by
means of the torque when the blade is
pushed straight up and into the opening.
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
2.
3.
Then insert the key blade in the lock cylinder
and unlock the door.
Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using the
key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered. It is switched off by inserting the PCC
in the ignition switch, see Alarm* - remote
control key not working (p. 187).
Keyless Drive* - lock settings
Keyless Drive* - antenna location
Lock settings for cars equipped with keyless
start and lock system can be adapted by indicating in the menu system MY CAR which doors
are to be unlocked.
Cars equipped with keyless start and lock system have a number of built-in antennas positioned at different locations in the car.
For a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 118).
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 174)
Related information
•
•
•
Keyless drive* (p. 174)
Detachable key blade - detaching/attaching
(p. 171)
Alarm* (p. 185)
Tailgate, by wiper motor
Door handle, left rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under the
floor
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
}}
* Option/accessory. 177
LOCKS AND ALARM
||
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should not
come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system's antennae with their pacemaker. This is
to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system.
Related information
•
Keyless drive* (p. 174)
Locking/unlocking - from the
outside
Locking/unlocking from the outside is carried
out using the remote control key (p. 164). The
remote control key can lock/unlock all doors and
the tailgate simultaneously. Different sequences
for unlocking can be selected, see Remote control key - functions (p. 167).
WARNING
In order that the lock sequence can be activated,
the driver's door must be closed - if any of the
other doors or the tailgate is open, then it/they
is/are locked and the alarm is activated only
when it/they are closed. For cars equipped with
keyless locking system* all doors and the tailgate
must be closed.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote
control key, the battery may be discharged - lock
or unlock the driver's door with the detachable
key blade, see Detachable key blade - detaching/
attaching (p. 171).
178
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is triggered when
the door is opened after being unlocked with
the key blade - the alarm is switched off when
the remote control key is inserted into the
ignition switch.
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside using
the remote control key - it is then not possible
to open any of the doors from the inside with
the door controls.
For more information, see Deadlocks*
(p. 183).
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically. This function reduces the
risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally.
(For cars with alarm, see Alarm* (p. 185).)
Related information
•
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)
Keyless drive* (p. 174)
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking/unlocking - from the inside
All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked or
unlocked simultaneously using the central locking button on the driver's door and passenger
door*.
A long press also opens all the side windows*
simultaneously (see also Global opening
(p. 179)).
•
Central locking
Pull the door handle once and release - the
door is unlocked. Pull the door handle again
to open the door.
Global opening
The global opening function opens or closes all
side windows simultaneously and can be used
for example to quickly air the car during hot
weather.
Locking
•
Press the central locking button
the front doors have been closed.
after
A long press also closes all side windows and
sunroof simultaneously (see also Global opening
(p. 179)).
All doors can also be individually locked manually
with their lock buttons - the door in question
must then be closed.
Automatic locking
Central locking.
•
Press one side
the other side
of the button to lock to unlock.
Press and hold the button
to also open all
side windows simultaneously*.
A door can be unlocked from the inside in two
different ways:
Press the central locking button
The function can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 118).
Related information
•
Unlocking
•
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically
when the car starts to move.
.
•
•
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 178)
Alarm* (p. 185)
Central locking button
A long press on the
symbol in the central
locking button or on the remote control key
opens all side windows simultaneously. The
symbol closes all
same procedure on the
side windows simultaneously.
Related information
•
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)
Power windows (p. 106)
Remote control key - functions (p. 167)
* Option/accessory. 179
LOCKS AND ALARM
Locking/unlocking - glovebox
Locking/unlocking - tailgate
The glovebox (p. 154) can only be locked/
unlocked using the remote control key's detachable key blade.
The tailgate can be opened, locked and
unlocked in several ways.
For information on the key blade, see Detachable
key blade - detaching/attaching (p. 171).
Manual opening
IMPORTANT
•
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the
rubberised panel.
•
Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contacts on the
rubber panel.
Unlocking with the remote control key
Rubber plate with electrical contact.
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock cylinder in accordance with the illustration
above.
1.
Push down gently on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle - the lock
is released.
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
2.
Lift the outside handle in order to fully open
the tailgate.
Pull out the key blade.
•
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
Related information
•
180
To open:
Remote control key (p. 164)
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed* and
the tailgate unlocked on its own by using the
remote control key's
button.
If the car is equipped with an alarm (p. 185)*
then the alarm indicator (p. 186) on the instrument panel is extinguished to show that the
alarm is not armed for the whole of the car. The
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
alarm's level and movement sensors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected.
Locking with the remote control key
–
The doors remain locked and armed.
•
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains closed press lightly on the rubberised pressure plate
under the outer handle and lift the tailgate.
If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes
then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
Power operated tailgate*
The car's tailgate can be opened using a button
on the instrument panel, using the rubberised
pressure plate under the outside handle or by
using the remote control key. Closing takes
place using the close button at the bottom of the
tailgate.
Related information
•
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 178)
G031965
Unlocking the car from inside
Press the remote control key's button for
locking
, see Remote control key - functions (p. 167).
> If the car is equipped with an alarm* the
alarm indicator on the instrument panel
starts to flash, which means that the alarm
is armed.
Close button
NOTE
Unlocking, tailgate
To unlock the tailgate:
–
Press the button (1) on the headlamp control
panel.
> The tailgate is unlocked and can be
opened within 2 minutes (if the car is
locked from the inside).
Consider the roof height when using electrical operation. Do not use electrical operation
of the tailgate under a low roof height, see
under the heading "Interrupt opening/closing
of tailgate".
}}
* Option/accessory. 181
LOCKS AND ALARM
||
NOTE
•
•
If the system has been operating continuously for a long time, it is switched off to
avoid overload. It can be used again after
about 3 minutes.
If the starter battery has been discharged
or disconnected when the tailgate has
been open then it must be closed manually in order to reset the system. This
also applies if the tailgate has been open
for more than 24 hours.
Programmable max. opening
The maximum opening height of the tailgate can
be adjusted, e.g. to suit a low ceiling height in a
garage.
To adjust max. opening:
Pinch protection
•
During opening - power tailgate operation is
deactivated and the tailgate stops.
•
During closing - the tailgate stops and then
opens fully.
WARNING
Observe the risk of trapping when opening/
closing. Before starting opening/closing,
check that there is nobody near to the tailgate
as trapping may have serious consequences.
Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the
power operated tailgate. They are pre-tensioned with high pressure and can cause
injury if opened.
Opening the tailgate
The tailgate can be opened three ways
(two of which involve this button):
•
Long press on the button located on the
headlamp control panel - hold the button
depressed until the tailgate starts to open.
•
Long press on the button on the remote control key - hold the button depressed until the
tailgate starts to open.
•
Push down gently on the rubberised pressure plate under the outer handle.
Always operate the tailgate with caution.
Pre-tensioned springs
1.
Open the tailgate - stop it in the open position.
Closing the tailgate
2.
button on the underside of
Press the
the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> The stored position is thereby saved.
•
Close using this button on the tailgate
or manually.
To reset max. opening:
–
182
WARNING
If something with sufficient resistance prevents
the tailgate from opening/closing then the pinch
protection is activated.
Manually move the tailgate to its highest
possible position - press the
button on
the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> The reset is complete. The tailgate will
then assume its max. position when
opened.
Press the button – the tailgate closes automatically.
Stop the opening/closing of the
tailgate
This can be done four ways (of which
three involve this button):
The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate.
LOCKS AND ALARM
•
•
•
•
Press the button located on the headlamp
control panel
Press the remote control key button
Press the tailgate's button
Press the rubberised pressure plate beneath
the outside handle.
- The tailgate's movement is interrupted and it
stops.
Manual tailgate operation
IMPORTANT
During manual tailgate operation, open or
close it slowly. Do not use force to open/
close it if there is resistance. It may be damaged and stop working correctly.
The system is disengaged if the opening/closing
sequence is interrupted in accordance with the
preceding section.
•
The tailgate can then be operated manually.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking - tailgate (p. 180)
Deadlocks*
Temporary deactivation
Deadlocks means that all lock buttons and door
handles are mechanically disengaged, which
prevents doors being opened from both inside
and outside.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key (p. 164) and are set after an approx. ten
seconds delay after the doors have been locked.
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time then
the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is
deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked with the remote
control key when the deadlocks function is activated. The front left door can also be unlocked
with the detachable key blade (p. 171). In addition, it is possible to unlock and open the doors
and tailgate on cars equipped with keyless start
and lock system* by touching door handles or the
handle on the tailgate.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks in order to
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
MY CAR
OK MENU
TUNE knob control
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then the
deadlocks function can be temporarily switched
off. This takes place the menu system MY CAR.
For a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 118).
}}
* Option/accessory. 183
LOCKS AND ALARM
||
NOTE
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
Child safety locks - manual
activation
NOTE
The child safety locks prevent children from
being able to open a rear door from the inside.
Activate/deactivate child safety locks
The above applies if the deadlocks have not
been deactivated temporarily.
•
Remote control key (p. 164)
•
Cars with an electric child safety lock do
not have a manual child lock.
•
Child safety locks - electrical activation*
(p. 185)
•
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)
Locking/unlocking - from the outside
(p. 178)
G021077
Keyless Drive* - unlocking with the key blade
(p. 176)
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
Related information
Related information
•
•
The child safety locks are located on the trailing
edge of the rear doors and are only accessible
when the doors are open.
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
–
Use the remote control key's detachable key
blade (p. 171) to turn the knob.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside.
184
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Child safety locks - electrical
activation*
2.
Child safety locks with electrical activation prevent children from opening the rear doors or windows from the inside.
Activation
The child safety locks can be activated/deactivated in all key positions (p. 83) higher than 0.
Activation/deactivation can be performed up to
2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided
that no door is opened.
To activate the child safety locks:
Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The combined instrument panel's information display shows the message Rear
child lock activated and the button's
lamp illuminates - the locks are active.
When the child safety lock is active then the rear:
•
windows can only be opened with the driver's
door control panel
•
doors cannot be opened from inside.
The current setting is stored when the engine is
switched off - if the child safety locks are activated at engine shutdown, the function will
remain activated the next time the engine is
started.
Related information
•
Child safety locks - manual activation
(p. 184)
•
Locking/unlocking - from the inside (p. 179)
Alarm*
The alarm is a device that warns in the event of
e.g. a break-in in the car.
Activated alarm is triggered if:
•
•
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened9
•
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with
a tilt detector*)
•
•
the starter battery's cable is disconnected
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system then the
information display in the combined instrument
panel shows a message. In which case, contact a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Control panel driver's door.
1.
9
Start the engine or choose a key position
higher than 0.
Applies to certain markets.
}}
* Option/accessory. 185
LOCKS AND ALARM
||
NOTE
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also registered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if
the car is left with a window or the sunroof
open or if the passenger compartment heater
is used.
To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof
when leaving the car. If the car's integrated
passenger compartment heater (or a portable
electric heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from the air vents so that they are not
pointing upwards in the passenger compartment. Alternatively, reduced alarm level can
be used, see Reduced alarm level* (p. 188).
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components
in the alarm system yourself. Any such
attempts may affect the terms of the insurance.
One of the alarm sensors is located beneath
the cup holder in the centre console, this sensor is sensitive to metals.
Avoid keeping coins, keys or similar metal
objects in the cup holder in the centre console as these may cause accidental alarm
activation.
186
The alarm indicator shows alarm system
(p. 185) status.
Arming the alarm
–
Press the remote control key lock button.
Deactivate the alarm
–
Press the remote control key unlock button.
Deactivating a triggered alarm
–
Press the remote control key unlock button
or insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.
Related information
NOTE
Alarm indicator*
•
•
•
Alarm indicator* (p. 186)
Alarm* - automatic re-arming (p. 187)
Alarm* - remote control key not working
(p. 187)
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the
alarm system's status:
•
•
LED not lit – Alarm not armed
•
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the
alarm (and until the remote control key is
inserted in the ignition switch and key position I is selected) – Alarm has been triggered.
The LED flashes once every other second –
Alarm is armed
* Option/accessory.
LOCKS AND ALARM
Alarm* - automatic re-arming
Automatic re-arming of the alarm (p. 185) prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed
unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key
(and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the
doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes,
then the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car
is relocked at the same time.
Alarm* - remote control key not
working
If the alarm (p. 185) cannot be deactivated with
the remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery
(p. 172) is discharged - the car can be
unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as
follows:
1.
Open the driver's door with the detachable
key blade (p. 176).
> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indicator
(p. 186) flashes rapidly and the siren
sounds.
2.
Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch.
> The alarm is deactivated and the alarm
indicator goes out.
3.
Start the engine.
Related information
•
Reduced alarm level* (p. 188)
Alarm signals*
When the alarm (p. 185) is triggered a siren
sounds and all direction indicators flash.
•
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its own
battery and works independently of the car
battery.
•
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm is switched off.
* Option/accessory. 187
LOCKS AND ALARM
Reduced alarm level*
Reduced guard means that the movement and
tilt detectors can be temporarily deactivated.
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm
(p. 185) - e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or
during transport on a car train or car ferry - temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt detectors.
Type approval - remote control key
system
Type approval for the remote control key system
can be read in the table.
Country/Area
China
Lock system, standard
Country/Area
EU, China
The procedure is the same as with the temporary
disengaging of deadlocks (p. 183)10.
Hong Kong
Related information
•
Alarm indicator* (p. 186)
Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)
Country/Area
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 164)
EU
Korea
10
188
Only in combination with alarm.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
Active chassis - Four C*
Operation
Active chassis "Four-C" (Continously Controlled
Chassis Concept), regulates the characteristics
of the shock absorbers so that the car's driving
characteristics can be adjusted. There are three
settings: Comfort, Sport and Advanced.
Speed related power steering causes the steering wheel force to increase with the speed of the
car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.
On motorways the steering feels firmer. Steering
is light and requires no extra effort when parking
and at low speed.
Comfort
This setting means that the car is perceived as
being more comfortable on rough and uneven
road surfaces. Shock absorption is soft and the
movement of the body is smooth and gentle.
Sport
This setting means that the car is perceived as
being more sporty and is recommended for more
active driving. Steering response is faster than in
the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is harder
and the body follows the road in order to reduce
rolling during cornering.
Advanced
This setting is only recommended on very even
and smooth road surfaces.
The shock absorbers are optimised for maximum
roadholding and rolling in bends is further minimised.
Adjustable steering force*
The driver can choose between three different
levels of steering force for road responsiveness
or steering sensitivity in the menu system MY
CAR (p. 118):
Control buttons.
The required chassis setting is selected using the
centre console buttons. The setting used when
the engine was switched off is re-activated when
the engine is next started.
•
Once there, search for Steering force level
and select Low, Medium or High.
This setting is not accessible when the car is
moving.
NOTE
In certain situations the power steering may
become too hot and then needs to be temporarily cooled - during this time the power
steering operates with reduced power and
turning the steering wheel may then be perceived to be slightly heavier.
In parallel with the temporarily reduced steering assistance the combined instrument panel
shows a message.
190
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
MY CAR (p. 118)
Electronic stability control (ESC) general
Stability system ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and
improves the car's traction.
The activation of the ESC system during braking may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car may accelerate
slower than expected when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
WARNING
The stability system ESC is supplementary
assistance - it cannot handle all situations in
all road conditions.
The driver always bears responsibility that the
vehicle is driven safely and that applicable
road traffic rules and regulations are followed.
Active Yaw Control
The function checks the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the
car.
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during acceleration.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and transfers
power from the driving wheel that is spinning to
the one that is not.
Engine drag control - EDC
EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involuntary
wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine
braking when driving in low gears on slippery
road surfaces.
The ESC system consists of the following functions:
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to
steer the car.
•
•
•
•
•
•
CTC compensates for understeer and allows
higher than normal acceleration in a bend without
wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on an arcing
motorway entrance road to quickly reach the prevailing traffic speed.
Active Yaw Control
Spin Control
Traction control system
Engine drag control - EDC
Corner Traction Control - CTC
Corner Traction Control - CTC*
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA
}}
* Option/accessory. 191
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Trailer Stability Assist* - TSA1
Trailer stability assist (p. 315) function is to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins
to snake. For more information, see Driving with a
trailer* (p. 308).
Electronic stability control (ESC) operation
Selection of level - Sport mode
The ESC system is always activated - it cannot be
deactivated.
NOTE
However, the driver can select
the Sport mode, which allows
for a more active driving experience.
The function is deactivated if the driver
selects Sport mode.
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation
(p. 192)
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols
and messages (p. 193)
Sport mode is selected in the
menu system MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 118).
Sport mode is indicated in the combined instrument panel by means of
this symbol illuminating with a constant
glow until the driver deselects the
function or until the engine is switched off - after
the next time the engine is started the ESC system is back in its normal mode again.
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 191)
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - symbols
and messages (p. 193)
In Sport mode the system detects whether the
accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and
cornering are more active than in normal driving
and then allows controlled skidding with the rear
section up to a certain level before it intervenes
and stabilises the car.
If, for example, the driver stops a controlled skid
by releasing the accelerator pedal, then the ESC
system intervenes and stabilises the car.
With Sport mode, maximum traction is also
obtained if the car has become stuck, or when
driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or deep
snow.
1 Trailer
192
Stability Assist is included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Electronic stability control (ESC) symbols and messages
Table
Symbol
Message
Specification
ESC Temporarily OFF
ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature - the function is reactivated
automatically when the brakes have cooled.
ESC Service required
ESC system disengaged.
•
•
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Message"
There is a text message in the combined instrument panel (p. 68) - Read it!
Constant glow for
2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light.
ESC system is being activated.
Constant glow.
Sport mode is activated.
and
NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode - it is partially reduced.
}}
193
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
194
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 191)
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - operation
(p. 192)
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed limiter*
A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but
is prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Overview
Related information
•
•
Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195)
Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 196)
•
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded
(p. 197)
•
Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 197)
Speed limiter* - getting started
Switch on and activate
When the speed limiter is active, its symbol (6) is
shown in combination with a mark (5) by the set
maximum speed in the combined instrument
panel.
Selection and storage of the highest possible
speed in the memory can be made both during a
journey and while stationary.
While driving
1.
Press the steering wheel button
to switch
on the speed limiter.
> The symbol (6) for speed limiter illuminates in the combined instrument panel.
2.
When the car is moving at the desired highest possible speed: Press one of the steering
or
until the combined
wheel buttons
instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the
desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument panel.
Speed limiter - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed
is resumed.
Standby mode.
When stationary
Activate and adjust the max. speed.
1.
Selected speed.
Press the steering wheel button
on the speed limiter.
to switch
Speed limiter active.
}}
* Option/accessory. 195
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
2.
Scroll with the
button until the combined
instrument panel shows a mark (5) by the
desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 195)
Speed limiter* - changing speed
Changing the stored speed
Stored max. speed is changed with short or long
presses on the
or
steering wheel button.
To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):
•
Use short presses - each press gives
+/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).
Speed limiter* - temporary
deactivation and standby mode
A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but
is prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set speed by the speed limiter.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):
To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter and
set it in standby mode:
•
–
Hold down the button and release it at the
required max. speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 195)
Press
.
> The mark (5) in the combined instrument
panel changes colour from GREEN to
WHITE and the driver can temporarily
exceed the set maximum speed.
The speed limiter is reactivated with one
. The mark (5) then changes
press on
colour from WHITE to GREEN and the
car's maximum speed is limited once
again.
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal
The speed limiter can also be set in standby
mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rapidly
accelerating the car out of a situation:
196
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
–
Depress the accelerator pedal fully.
> The combined instrument panel shows
the stored maximum speed with a coloured mark (5) and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum speed the mark (5) changes colour during this
time from GREEN to WHITE.
The speed limiter is automatically reactivated after the release of the accelerator
pedal and the car's speed is slowed down
to below the selected/stored maximum
speed - the display's mark (5) changes
colour from WHITE to GREEN and the
car's maximum speed is again limited.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed
exceeded
A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but
is prevented by the speed limiter from accidentally exceeding a speed that is selected/set in
advance.
On a steep downhill gradient the speed limiter's
engine braking effect may be inadequate and the
selected maximum speed is exceeded. The driver
is alerted about this with an acoustic signal.
Speed limiter* - deactivation
A Speed Limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but
is prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set speed by the speed limiter.
To deactivate the speed limiter:
–
The signal is active until the driver has slowed to
below the selected maximum speed.
The driver can then use the accelerator
pedal to choose a speed without limitation.
NOTE
Speed limiter* (p. 195)
The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds if
the speed has been exceeded by at least
3 km/h (approx. 2 mph), provided that neither
or
buttons has been depressed
of the
during the last half minute.
Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195)
Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 196)
Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 197)
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded
(p. 197)
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Speed limiter* (p. 195)
Speed limiter* - changing speed (p. 196)
Press the steering wheel button
.
> The combined instrument panel's symbol
for speed limiter (6) and the selection of
the set speed (5) both extinguish - the
set/stored speed is thus cleared and canbutton.
not then be resumed with the
Related information
•
•
•
•
Speed limiter* (p. 195)
Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195)
Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 196)
Speed limiter* - alarm for speed exceeded
(p. 197)
Speed limiter* - getting started (p. 195)
Speed limiter* - temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 196)
Speed limiter* - deactivation (p. 197)
* Option/accessory. 197
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cruise control*
WARNING
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in a
more relaxed driving on motorways and long,
straight roads in regular traffic flows.
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the cruise control is not maintaining a
suitable speed and/or suitable distance.
Overview
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Related information
The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument
panel in cars with speed limiter2.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed
is resumed.
The steering wheel buttons and combined instrument
panel in cars without speed limiter2.
•
•
•
•
•
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 199)
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 200)
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 200)
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
Standby mode.
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol (GREY
= Standby mode).
2
198
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Cruise control* - managing speed
To adjust 5 km/h (5 mph):
It is possible to activate, set and change the
stored speed.
•
Activating and setting the speed
To adjust 1 km/h (1 mph):
To start the cruise control:
•
•
Press the steering wheel button for CRUISE
(with speed
(without speed limiter) or
limiter).
>
The cruise control symbol (6) in the combined instrument panel illuminates - cruise
control is in standby mode.
To activate cruise control:
•
At the required speed - press the steering
or
.
wheel button
>
The current speed is stored in memory and
the combined instrument panel's marking (5)
illuminates at the selected speed and the
symbol (6) changes from GREY to WHITE the car then follows the stored speed.
If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal
/
button, then it is the
prior to pressing the
car's current speed when the button is pressed
that is stored.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the cruise control setting - the car returns to the
last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is
released.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are held
depressed for several minutes then it is
blocked and deactivated. To be able to reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be stopped
and the engine restarted.
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds
below 30 km/h (20 mph).
Stored speed is changed with short or long
presses on the
or
steering wheel button.
3
Hold down the button and release it at the
required speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
NOTE
Changing the stored speed
Use short presses - each press gives 5 km/h
(5 mph).
Related information
•
Cruise control* (p. 198)
Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
Cruise control* temporary
deactivation and standby mode
The function can be temporarily deactivated and
set in standby mode.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily disengage cruise control and set it
in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
>
The combined instrument panel's
marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour
from WHITE to GREY - cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
.
Standby mode due to driver
intervention
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
automatically set in standby mode if:
•
•
the foot brake is used
•
the gear lever/selector is moved to N position
•
the driver maintains speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than
1 minute3
The driver must then regulate the speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
}}
* Option/accessory. 199
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set
in standby mode if:
•
•
•
wheels lose traction
engine speed is too low/high
speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Cruise control* - resume set speed
Cruise control* - deactivate
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver to maintain an even speed.
How it is deactivated is described here.
After temporary deactivation and standby
mode (p. 199) it is possible to resume the set
speed.
To reactivate the cruise control from standby
mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
>
The combined instrument panel's
marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour
from GREY to WHITE - the car then follows
the last stored speed.
Cruise control* (p. 198)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 200)
.
Cruise control is switched off with the steering
wheel button (1) or by switching off the engine the set/stored speed is thus cleared and cannot
button.
then be resumed with the
Related information
•
•
•
•
Cruise control* (p. 198)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 199)
Cruise control* - resume set speed (p. 200)
NOTE
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 200)
A marked speed increase may occur once the
speed has been resumed by selecting the
button.
Related information
•
•
•
•
200
Cruise control* (p. 198)
Cruise control* - managing speed (p. 199)
Cruise control* temporary deactivation and
standby mode (p. 199)
Cruise control* - deactivate (p. 200)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Distance Warning*
The Distance Warning function (Distance Alert)
warns the driver if the time interval to the vehicle
ahead becomes too short.
Distance Warning is active at speeds above
30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to vehicles
driving in front of the car, in the same direction.
No distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the
time the adaptive cruise control is active.
WARNING
console - in which case, the function is operated
in the car's menu system MY CAR (p. 118) once there, search for the Distance Alert function.
Set time interval
Distance warning only reacts if the distance
to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset
value - the speed of the driver's vehicle is not
affected.
Operation
Controls and symbol for time interval.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Time interval - On.
Orange-coloured warning
lamp4.
An orange-coloured warning lamp in the windscreen illuminates with a constant glow if the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the
set time interval.
Press the button in the centre console to switch
the function on or off. The function is switched on
if one lamp is illuminated in the button.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for a button in the centre
4
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
* Option/accessory. 201
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can
be selected and shown in the combined instrument panel as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more
lines the longer the time interval. One line corresponds to approximately 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines approximately 3 seconds.
The same symbol is also shown when Adaptive
cruise control (p. 205) is activated.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time interval.
The set time interval is also used by the function adaptive cruise control (p. 205).
Only use the time intervals permitted by local
traffic regulations.
Related information
•
•
Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 202)
Distance Warning* - symbols and messages
(p. 203)
Distance Warning* - limitations
This function, which uses the same radar sensor
as Adaptive cruise control (p. 204) and Collision
warning with auto brake (p. 229), has certain limitations.
Related information
•
•
Distance Warning* (p. 201)
Distance Warning* - symbols and messages
(p. 203)
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong variations in light intensity, as well as wearing sunglasses, could mean that the warning light in
the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could affect
the radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles
in front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illuminates
at a shorter distance than the setting or that
the warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance than
that set due to limitations in sensor range.
For further information on radar sensor limitations, see Radar sensor - limitations (p. 217) and
(p. 234).
202
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Distance Warning* - symbols and
messages
panel if the function is reduced due to its limitations.
The function has certain symbols and messages
that can be shown in the combined instrument
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Radar blocked See
manual
Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush has collected
in front of the radar sensor.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 217).
Collision warning
Service required
A
Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
•
•
Distance Warning* (p. 201)
Distance Warning* - limitations (p. 202)
* Option/accessory. 203
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control - ACC*
WARNING
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver to maintain an
even speed combined with a pre-selected time
interval to the vehicle ahead.
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The adaptive cruise control provides a more
relaxing driving experience on long journeys on
motorways and long straight main roads in
smooth traffic flows.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all
traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
Read all the sections about the adaptive
cruise control in the owner's manual in order
to learn about its limitations, of which the
driver should be aware before it is used.
Adaptive cruise control* - set time interval
(p. 209)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary deactivation, and standby mode (p. 209)
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another
vehicle (p. 210)
The driver sets the desired speed (p. 207) and
time interval (p. 209) to the car in front. When
the radar detector detects a slower vehicle in
front of the car, the speed is automatically adapted to that. When the road is clear again the car
returns to the selected speed.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off or
set to standby mode (p. 209) and the car comes
too close to a vehicle in front, then the driver is
warned instead by the Distance Warning (p. 201)
function about the short distance.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
even when the adaptive cruise control is
being used.
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
Adaptive cruise control* - managing speed
(p. 207)
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 211)
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue assistance
(p. 211)
•
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Adaptive cruise control* - switch cruise control functionality (p. 213)
•
•
•
Radar sensor (p. 217)
For a limited time after the service, the ACC
function can have a somewhat limited range.
The system is calibrated whilst driving and full
function returns automatically.
•
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages (p. 215)
IMPORTANT
Radar sensor - limitations (p. 217)
Adaptive cruise control* - fault tracing and
action (p. 214)
Automatic gearbox
Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue assistance (p. 211) function.
204
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control* - function
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise control system and a coordinated spacing system.
Function overview
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the
system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small vehicles
such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low
trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles
and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water
or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in
poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip
roads.
Function
overview5.
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
Steering wheel keypad (p. 206)
Radar sensor (p. 217)
Distance to the vehicle ahead (p. 209) is measured primarily by a radar sensor (p. 217). The
cruise control function regulates the speed with
acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
brakes to emit a low sound when they are being
used by the adaptive cruise control.
WARNING
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane according to what
the driver set for time interval (p. 209). If the
radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then
the car will instead maintain the speed set and
stored by the driver. This also takes place if the
speed of the vehicle in front exceeds the stored
speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand
sudden braking the driver must brake himself/
herself. This applies with large differences in
speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily.
Due to limitations in the radar sensor (p. 217)
braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated to
follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h6
(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph). If the
speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph) or if the
engine speed becomes too low, the cruise control is set in standby mode (p. 209) at which
automatic braking ceases - the driver must then
take over himself/herself to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle in front.
The brake pedal moves when the adaptive
cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot
beneath the brake pedal - it may then
become trapped.
5
6
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
Queue Assist (p. 211) (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range 0-200 km/h (0-125 mph).
}}
* Option/accessory. 205
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Warning lamp - braking by driver
required
NOTE
Information on the windscreen may be difficult to see in strong sunlight and when wearing sunglasses.
Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity
that is equivalent to approx. 40% of the car's
braking capacity.
WARNING
The adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles which its radar unit has detected hence a warning may not be given, or it may
be given with a certain delay. Do not wait for a
warning without braking when so required.
Adaptive cruise control* - overview
Operation of the adaptive cruise control and
steering wheel keypad varies depending on
whether or not the car is equipped with speed
limiter8.
Adaptive cruise control with Speed
limiter
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a collision
risk7.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily than
the adaptive cruise control capacity and the driver
does not brake, then the warning lamp and warning sound from the Collision warning system
(p. 229) are used in order to alert the driver that
immediate intervention is required.
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on level
road surfaces. It may have difficulty in keeping
the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when
driving on steep downhill slopes, with a heavy
load or with a trailer - in which case, be extra
attentive and ready to slow down.
Related information
•
•
•
Cruise control - On/Off.
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed
is resumed.
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 211)
Standby mode
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking another
vehicle (p. 210)
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
7
8
206
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE
= standby mode).
Time distance
ACC is active at the GREEN symbol (WHITE
= standby mode).
Adaptive cruise control without Speed
limiter
Adaptive cruise control* - managing
speed
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages (p. 215)
Adaptive cruise control with Speed limiter9.
Standby mode ceases and the stored speed
is resumed.
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
(Not used)
Adaptive cruise control without Speed limiter9.
Green marking at stored speed (WHITE =
standby mode).
To start the ACC:
}}
* Option/accessory. 207
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
•
At the same time a speed
range is marked:
Press the steering wheel button
- a similar WHITE symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel (8) which shows that
the adaptive cruise control is in standby
mode (p. 209).
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
NOTE
If any of the adaptive cruise control buttons
are held depressed for several minutes then
the function is blocked and deactivated. To be
able to reactivate it, the car must be stopped
and the engine restarted.
To activate ACC:
•
At the required speed - press the steering
or
.
wheel button
>
The current speed is stored in the memory,
the combined instrument panel shows a
"magnifying glass" (6) around the stored
speed for a second or so and its marking
changes from WHITE to GREEN.
When this symbol changes colour from
WHITE to GREEN, the ACC is active
and the car maintains the stored
speed.
Only when the symbol shows
an image of another vehicle is
the distance to the vehicle in
front controlled by the ACC.
•
the higher speed with GREEN marking is the
pre-programmed speed
•
the lower speed is the speed of the vehicle
in front.
In certain situations it cannot be reactivated in which case, the combined instrument panel
(p. 215) shows Adaptive cruise control
unavailable.
Changing the stored speed
Stored speed is changed with short or long
or
steering wheel button.
presses on the
To adjust +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph):
•
Use short presses - each press gives
+/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph).
To adjust +/- 1 km/h (+/- 1 mph):
•
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
Hold down the button and release it at the
required speed.
Last press made is stored in the memory.
If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal
/
button, then it is the
prior to pressing the
car's current speed when the button is pressed
that is stored.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
9
208
An explanation of the illustration's figures is given in the section "Adaptive cruise control - overview" (p. 206).
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control* - set time
interval
NOTE
Only use the time intervals permitted by local
traffic regulations.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the combined
instrument panel as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the
longer the time interval. One
line corresponds to approximately 1 second to
the vehicle in front, 5 lines approximately
3 seconds.
If the adaptive cruise control does not appear
to react when activated, this may be because
the time distance to the vehicle in front is preventing an increase in speed.
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time interval.
To set/change the time distance:
Read more how speed is handled (p. 207).
•
Related information
Turn the thumbwheel on the steering wheel
/
buttons
keypad (p. 206) (or use the
for cars without Speed limiter).
At low speed, when the distances are short, the
adaptive cruise control increases the time interval
slightly.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain situations in order
to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front
smoothly and comfortably.
•
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control* - temporary
deactivation, and standby mode
The adaptive cruise control can be temporarily
deactivated and set in standby mode.
Temporary deactivation/standby mode
- with speed limiter
To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise
control and set it in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
This symbol and the stored speed's
marking then change colour from
GREEN to WHITE.
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
Temporary deactivation/standby mode
- without speed limiter
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise
control and set it in standby mode:
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate (p. 211)
•
Press the steering wheel button
Standby mode due to driver
intervention
The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set automatically in standby mode if:
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short time to react and take action if any
unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
The same symbol is also shown when Distance
Warning (p. 201) function is activated.
}}
* Option/accessory. 209
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
•
•
the foot brake is used
•
the gear selector is moved to N position
(automatic gearbox)
•
the driver maintains speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
the clutch pedal is depressed for longer than
1 minute10
The driver must then regulate the speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
•
•
•
•
•
speed has fallen below 30 km/h11 (20 mph)
wheels lose traction
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet snow
or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
Resume set speed
Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is reactivated with one press on the steering wheel but- the speed is then set to the last stored
ton
speed.
Automatic standby mode
Adaptive cruise control* - overtaking
another vehicle
When the car is following another vehicle and the
driver indicates an impending overtaking
manoeuvre with the direction indicator12, the
adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accelerate
the car towards the vehicle in front.
The function is active at speeds above 70 km/h
(43 mph).
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated
in more situations other than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to
indicate a change of lane or exit to another
road - the car will then accelerate briefly.
NOTE
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, e.g. Stability system ESC (p. 191).
If any of these systems stops working, the adaptive cruise control is deactivated automatically.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal will
sound and the message Adaptive cruise
control cancelled is shown in the combined
instrument panel. The driver must then intervene
and adapt the speed and distance to the vehicle
ahead.
engine speed is too low/high
A pronounced increase in speed may occur
after the cruise control has been reactivated
button.
with the
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
Cruise control* (p. 198)
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
•
•
10
11
210
the driver opens the door
the driver takes off his seatbelt
Disengaging and selecting a higher or lower gear does not involve standby mode.
Does not apply to a car with Queue assistance - it can go all the way down to 0 km/h.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control* - deactivate
Keypad with Speed limiter
The adaptive cruise control is switched off with
the steering wheel button
in the steering
wheel keypad (p. 206) - the set/stored speed is
thus cleared and cannot then be resumed with
button.
the
Keypad without Speed limiter
With a short press on the steering wheel button
the adaptive cruise control is set in standby
mode (p. 209). It is switched off with an additional short press - the set/stored speed is thus
cleared and cannot then be resumed with the
button.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages (p. 215)
Adaptive Cruise Control* - queue
assistance
Queue assistance also provides the adaptive
cruise control with enhanced functionality at
speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph).
With an automatic gearbox, the adaptive cruise
control can follow another vehicle within the
range 0-200 km/h (0-125 mph).
NOTE
A vehicle in front must be within a reasonable
distance in order to enable activation of the
adaptive cruise control at a speed lower than
30 km/h (20 mph).
In cars with automatic gearbox the adaptive
cruise control is supplemented with the queue
assistance function (also referred to as "Queue
Assist").
Queue assistance has the following functions:
•
Extended speed range - also at lower than
30 km/h (20 mph) and at stationary
•
•
•
Change of target
Automatic braking ceases when stationary
Automatic activation parking brake.
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the
adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) even though it is capable of following another
vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than
30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.
Extended speed range
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed about
3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in
front starts moving again then the Adaptive
cruise control is set in standby mode with automatic braking. The driver must then reactivate it
in one of the following ways:
•
Press the steering wheel button
...or...
•
Depress the accelerator pedal.
>
The adaptive cruise control will then resume
following the vehicle in front.
NOTE
In order to activate the adaptive cruise control,
the driver's door must be closed and the
driver must be wearing the seatbelt.
12
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
}}
* Option/accessory. 211
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
WARNING
When the adaptive cruise control is following
a vehicle in front at speeds in excess of
30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed
from a vehicle in front to a stationary vehicle,
the adaptive cruise control will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead select the stored
speed.
The Queue Assist function can hold the car
stationary for a maximum of 4 minutes - then
the parking brake is applied and the adaptive
cruise control is disengaged.
•
The parking brake must be released
before the adaptive cruise control can be
reactivated.
•
The driver must intervene him/herself and
brake.
Change of target
Automatic standby mode with change
of target
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set
in standby mode:
•
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When the adaptive cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h
(20 mph) and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the adaptive
cruise control will brake for the stationary vehicle.
212
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h (5 mph)
and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain
whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other object, e.g. a speed bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h (5 mph)
and the vehicle in front turns off so the adaptive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to
follow.
Termination of automatic braking at a
standstill
In certain situations, queue assistance stops
automatic braking at a standstill. This means that
the brakes are released and the car may start to
roll - the driver must therefore intervene and
brake the car himself/herself in order to maintain
its position.
Queue assistance releases the foot brake and
sets the adaptive cruise control in standby mode
in the following situations:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the driver sets the adaptive cruise control in
standby mode.
the gear selector is moved to P, N or R position
Automatic activation parking brake
In certain situations queue assistance applies the
parking brake in order to keep the car remaining
stationary.
This takes place if:
•
the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
seatbelt
•
ESC is changed from Normal to Sport
mode
•
Queue assistance has held the car stationary
for more than 4 minutes
•
•
the engine is switched off
the brakes have overheated.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
Adaptive cruise control* - switch
cruise control functionality
Changing from ACC to CC
A symbol for active cruise control is shown in the
combined instrument panel:
CC
ACC
Cruise Control
Adaptive Cruise Control
Cruise control
Changing back from CC to ACC
Switch off cruise control with 1-2 presses on the
button in accordance with the deactivation
instructions (p. 211). The next time the system is
switched on it is the Adaptive cruise control that
is activated.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
Adaptive cruise control
With one press of the button the adaptive part
(spacing system) in the cruise control is deactivated, at which point the car just follows the set/
stored speed.
•
Give a long press on the steering wheel button
- the combined instrument panel's
to
.
symbol changes from
>
By these means the standard cruise control
(p. 198) CC (Cruise Control) is activated.
WARNING
The car no longer brakes automatically after
switching from ACC to CC - it merely follows
the set speed.
* Option/accessory. 213
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control* - fault
tracing and action
If the combined instrument panel shows the message Radar blocked See manual then it
means that the adaptive cruise control's radar
sensor (p. 217) cannot detect other vehicles in
front of the car.
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown along
with the appropriate action:
This message indicates that neither of the functions for Distance Alert (p. 201) or Collision
Warning with Auto Brake (p. 229) are working.
Cause
Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar
signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains.
Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer
blocked.
Related information
•
•
•
214
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols and messages (p. 215)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Adaptive cruise control* - symbols
and messages
some examples - follow the recommendation
given if appropriate:
Sometimes the adaptive cruise control may display a symbol and/or text message. Here are
Symbol
Message
Specification
The symbol is GREEN
The car maintains the stored speed.
The symbol is WHITE
Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
Standard cruise control is selected manually.
Set ESC to Normal to
enable Cruise
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability system (ESC) (p. 191) has been set in Normal
mode.
Adaptive cruise control
cancelled
The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.
Adaptive cruise control
unavailable
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
•
•
Radar blocked See manual
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
•
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if
slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
The driver can then choose to switch to (p. 213) normal Cruise control (CC) - a text message provides information on appropriate alternatives.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 217).
}}
* Option/accessory. 215
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Symbol
Message
Specification
Adaptive cruise control
Service required
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.
Press brake to hold vehicle + acoustic alarmA
•
The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to take over and
hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.
•
Below 30 km/h Lead
vehicle requiredA
A
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver depresses
the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
Shown in the event of attempts to activate the adaptive cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) without a vehicle in front within the activation distance.
Only with Queue Assist.
Related information
•
•
•
216
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
Adaptive cruise control* - overview (p. 206)
Adaptive cruise control* - function (p. 205)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Radar sensor
The function of the radar sensor is to detect cars
or larger vehicles in the same direction, in the
same lane.
The radar sensor is used by the following functions:
•
•
•
Distance Warning*
Adaptive cruise control*
Collision Warning System with Auto Brake
and Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection*
IMPORTANT
In the event of visible damage to the car's
grille, or if you suspect that the radar sensor
may be damaged:
•
Contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The function may completely or partially disappear - or malfunction - if the grille, the
radar sensor or its bracket is damaged or has
loosened.
•
Distance Warning* (p. 201)
Radar sensor - limitations
A radar sensor (p. 217) has certain limitations due to its limited field of vision for example.
The capacity of the adaptive cruise control to
detect a vehicle in front is significantly reduced if:
•
the speed of vehicles in front is significantly
different from your own speed
•
its radar sensor becomes blocked - e.g. in
heavy rain or slush, or if other objects have
collected in front of the radar sensor.
NOTE
Keep the area in front of the radar sensor
clean - see subheading "Maintenance"
(p. 233).
Field of vision
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not detected,
or the detection is made later than expected.
Modification of the radar sensor could result in it
being illegal to use.
Related information
•
•
•
Radar sensor - limitations (p. 217)
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
}}
* Option/accessory. 217
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene
when the adaptive cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the
system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake for
humans or animals, and not for small vehicles
such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for
oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and
objects.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle all
traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read all the sections about the adaptive
cruise control in the owner's manual in order
to learn about its limitations, of which the
driver should be aware before it is used.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water
or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in
poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip
roads.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and speed,
even when the adaptive cruise control is
being used.
WARNING
Accessories or other objects such as auxiliary
lamps must not be fitted in front of the grille.
ACC field of vision.
Related information
•
•
•
Adaptive cruise control - ACC* (p. 204)
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
Distance Warning* (p. 201)
Sometimes the radar sensor is late at detecting vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle
that drives in between the car and vehicles in
front.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can
remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from
view.
218
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Type approval - radar system
Type approval for the car's radar units can be
seen in the following table.
Market
ACCA
BLISB
Symbol
Type approval
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo e não pode causar
interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
✓
Modelo: L2C0038TR
1071-10-3451
Brazil
EAN: 07897843800248
Modelo: L2C0055TR
✓
1500-15-8065
EAN: 07897843840978
Europe
✓
✓
Hereby, Delphi Electronics & Safety declares that L2C0038TR / L2C0055TR are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
1999/5/EC.
The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E.
Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
TRA
✓
REGISTERED No: 0018923/09
DEALER No: DA37380/15
The United Arab Emirates
TRA
✓
REGISTERED No: ER37357/15
DEALER No: DA37380/15
}}
219
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Market
Indonesia
ACCA
BLISB
✓
Symbol
Type approval
14785/POSTEL/2010 1982
✓
38806/SDPPI/2015 4927
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2009/87
✓
Equipment type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Jordan
✓
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Certification No.
✓
DPH-L2C0038TR
Korea
✓
Certification No.
MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR
AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
✓
Numero d'agrement : MR 4838 ANRT 2009
Date d'agrement : 22/05/2009
Morocco
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
✓
NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
Moldavia
220
✓
✓
1024
DRIVER SUPPORT
Market
Singapore
ACCA
BLISB
✓
✓
Complies with IDA Standards DA105753
APPROVED
South Africa
✓
✓
A
B
Type approval
TA-2009/163
✓
Taiwan
Symbol
TA-2014/2390
APPROVED
CCAB09LP4590T3
✓
CCAB15LP0680T0
ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control
BLIS = Blind Spot Information
Related information
•
Radar sensor (p. 217)
221
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety™
IMPORTANT
City Safety™ is a function for helping the driver
to avoid a collision when driving in queues,
amongst other things, when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention,
could lead to an incident.
Maintenance and replacement of City
Safety™ components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
The City Safety™ function is active at speeds
below 50 km/h (30 mph) and it helps the driver
by automatically braking the car in the event of
imminent risk of collision with vehicles in front,
should the driver not react in time by braking
and/or steering away.
City Safety™ does not engage in all driving
situations or traffic, weather or road conditions.
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles driving in a different direction from the car, to
small vehicles and motorcycles or to humans
and animals.
City Safety™ can prevent collision at a speed
difference of less than 15 km/h (9 mph) - at
a higher speed difference, it is only possible
to reduce collision speed. In order to obtain
full brake function, the driver must depress
the brake pedal.
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as late
as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse for
the driver to change his/her driving style. If the
driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do the
braking, there might be a risk of a collision
sooner or later.
If the car is also equipped with Collision Warning
with Auto Brake (p. 229)* these two systems
complement each other.
222
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 228)
WARNING
City Safety™ is activated in situations where the
driver should have started braking earlier, which
is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.
The driver or passengers normally only notice City
Safety™ if a situation arises where the car is
extremely close to being in a collision.
•
Never wait for City Safety™ to engage. The
driver always bears responsibility for maintaining the proper distance and speed.
Related information
•
•
•
•
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 224)
City Safety™ - function (p. 223)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 223)
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 226)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety™ - function
City Safety detects the traffic in front of the car
with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge of the
windscreen. If there is an imminent risk of collision, City Safety will automatically brake the car,
which may be experienced as heavy braking.
may not avoid the collision on its own - to obtain
full brake force, the driver must depress the
brake pedal and this could then make it possible
to avoid a collision, even at speed differences
above 15 km/h (9 mph).
When the function is activated and brakes, the
combined instrument panel shows a text message to the effect that the function is/has been
active.
City Safety™ - operation
City Safety™ is a function for helping the driver
to avoid a collision when driving in queues,
amongst other things, when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention,
could lead to an incident.
On and Off
NOTE
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is activated automatically when the engine is started.
When City Safety™ brakes, the brake lights
come on.
Related information
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window13.
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h (3-9 mph)
in relation to the vehicle in front then City Safety
can completely avoid a collision.
•
•
•
•
•
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 224)
City Safety™ (p. 222)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 223)
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 226)
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 228)
City Safety activates a short, sharp braking procedure and stops the car in normal circumstances,
just behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers
this is well outside normal driving style and may
be experienced as being uncomfortable.
In certain situations, it may advisable to disable
City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches could
sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.
City Safety™ handled in the menu system MY
CAR (p. 118) and after starting the engine the
function can be deactivated as follows:
•
Search in MY CAR for Driver support
system and select the Off option at City
Safety.
However, the function will be enabled the
next time the engine is started, regardless of
whether the system was enabled or disabled
when the engine was switched off.
If the difference in speed between the vehicles is
greater than 15 km/h (9 mph) then City Safety
13
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
}}
223
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
WARNING
The laser sensor also transmits laser light
when City Safety™ is disabled manually.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 222)
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 224)
City Safety™ - function (p. 223)
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 226)
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 228)
MY CAR (p. 118)
City Safety™ - limitations
The sensor in City Safety is designed to detect
cars and other large vehicles in front of the car
irrespective of whether it is day or night.
However, the function does have some limitations.
The sensor's limitations mean that City Safety
has poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g.
heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust storms or
white-out situations. Misting, dirt, ice or snow on
the windscreen may also disrupt the function.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary
lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function.
The laser beam from the sensor in City Safety
measures how the light is reflected. The sensor
cannot detect objects with low reflection capacity.
The rear sections of the vehicle generally reflect
the light sufficiently thanks to the number plate
and rear light reflectors.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is
extended, which may reduce the capacity of City
Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations the
ABS14 and ESC15 systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.
14
15
224
(Anti-lock Braking System) - Anti-lock braking system.
(Electronic Stability Control) - Stability system.
When your own car is reversing, City Safety is
temporarily deactivated.
City Safety is not activated at low speeds - below
4 km/h (3 mph), which is why the system does
not intervene in situations where a vehicle in front
is being approached very slowly, e.g. when parking.
Driver commands are always prioritised, which is
why City Safety does not intervene in situations
where the driver is steering or accelerating in a
clear manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
When City Safety has prevented a collision with a
stationary object the car remains stationary for a
maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked for
a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is
reduced to the same speed as that maintained by
the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
when City Safety has stopped the car, unless the
driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
beforehand.
DRIVER SUPPORT
NOTE
•
Keep the windscreen surface in front of
the laser sensor free from ice, snow and
dirt (see the illustration for sensor location (p. 223)).
•
Do not affix or mount anything on the
windscreen in front of the laser sensor.
•
Remove ice and snow from the bonnet snow and ice must not exceed a height
of 5 cm.
Fault tracing and action
If the message Windscreen sensors blocked
See manual is shown in the combined instrument panel it indicates that the laser sensor is
blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of the
car. This means in turn that City Safety is not
operational.
The Windscreen sensors blocked See
manual message is not shown for all situations
in which the laser sensor is blocked. The driver
must therefore be diligent about keeping the
windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor
clean.
The following table presents possible causes for
the message being shown, along with suggestions for appropriate action.
Cause
IMPORTANT
Action
The windscreen surface
in front of the laser sensor is dirty or covered
with ice or snow.
Clean the windscreen surface in
front of the sensor
from dirt, ice and
snow.
The laser sensor field of
vision is blocked.
Remove the blocking object.
If there are cracks, scratches or stone chips in
the windscreen in front of either of the laser
sensor's "windows" and they cover a surface
of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm (or larger), then a
workshop must be contacted for replacement
of the windscreen (see the illustration for
sensor location (p. 223)) - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Failure to take action may result in reduced
performance for City Safety™.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation for City Safety™, the following also applies:
•
Volvo recommends that you do not repair
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
area in front of the laser sensor - instead,
the whole windscreen should be
replaced.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted.
•
The same type or Volvo-approved windscreen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
}}
225
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Related information
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 222)
City Safety™ - function (p. 223)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 223)
City Safety™ - laser sensor
The City Safety™ function includes a sensor
which transmits laser light (see illustration
(p. 223) for sensor location). Contact a qualified
workshop in the event of a fault or if the laser
sensor needs servicing - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. It is absolutely
essential to follow the prescribed instructions
when handling the laser sensor.
The following two labels relate to the laser sensor:
The lower label in the figure describes the laser
beam's physical data:
•
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
with FDA (U.S. Food Administration) standards for laser product design with the exception of deviations in accordance with "Laser
Notice No. 50" from 26 July 2001.
Radiation data for the laser sensor
The following table specifies the laser sensor's
physical data.
Maximum pulse energy
2.64 µJ
Maximum average output
45 mW
Pulse duration
Divergence (horizontal x vertical)
The upper label in the figure describes the laser
beam's classification:
•
226
Laser radiation - Do not look into the laser
beam with optical instruments - Class 1M
laser product.
33 ns
28° × 12°
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
If any of these instructions are not followed
then there is a risk of eye injury!
•
•
Never look into the laser sensor (which
emits spreading invisible laser radiation)
at a distance of 100 mm or closer with
magnifying optics such as a magnifying
glass, microscope, lens or similar optical
instruments.
Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
and/or replacement of the laser sensor's
spare parts must only be carried out by a
qualified workshop - we recommend an
authorised Volvo workshop.
•
To avoid exposure to harmful radiation, do
not carry out any readjustments or maintenance other than those specified here.
•
The repairer must follow specially drawn
up workshop information for the laser
sensor.
•
Do not remove the laser sensor (this
includes removing the lenses). A removed
laser sensor does not fulfil laser class 3B
as per standard IEC 60825-1. Laser
class 3B is not eye-safe and therefore
entails a risk of injury.
•
The laser sensor's connector must be
unplugged before removal from the windscreen.
•
The laser sensor must be fitted onto the
windscreen before the sensor's connector is plugged in.
•
The laser sensor transmits a laser light
when the remote control key is in key
position II (p. 83) even if the engine is
switched off.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
City Safety™ (p. 222)
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 224)
City Safety™ - function (p. 223)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 223)
City Safety™ - symbols and messages
(p. 228)
227
DRIVER SUPPORT
City Safety™ - symbols and
messages
In conjunction with automatic braking by the City
Safety™ (p. 222) system, one or more symbols
Symbol
may illuminate in the combined instrument panel
and a text message may be shown. A text message can be acknowledged by briefly pressing
the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
Message
Meaning/Action
Auto braking by City Safety
City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen sensors blocked See manual
The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
•
Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about laser sensor limitations (p. 224).
City Safety Service required
City Safety™ is not operational.
•
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
228
City Safety™ (p. 222)
City Safety™ - limitations (p. 224)
City Safety™ - function (p. 223)
City Safety™ - operation (p. 223)
City Safety™ - laser sensor (p. 226)
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system*
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the
driver when there is a risk of colliding with a
pedestrian, cyclist or vehicle in front that are stationary or moving in the same direction.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver
in every situation.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention.
Pedestrian Detection" function may appear in
two variants:
•
Collision warning system* - limitations
(p. 235)
Level 1
The driver is merely warned16 of occurring obstacles by means of visual and acoustic signals - no
automatic braking intervenes, the driver must
himself brake.
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor
limitations (p. 236)
•
Collision warning system* - symbols and
messages (p. 238)
Level 2
The driver is warned of occurring obstacles by
means of visual and acoustic signals - the car is
braked automatically if the driver himself does not
act within a reasonable time.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of the internal components of
the "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" must only
be performed at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" can prevent a collision
or reduce collision speed.
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" must not be used as
an excuse for the driver to change his/her driving
style. If the driver solely relies on Collision Warning with Auto Brake to do the braking, there
might be a risk of a collision sooner or later.
Related information
•
•
Collision warning system* - function (p. 230)
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 232)
Two system levels
•
Depending on how the car is equipped, the "Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist and
Collision warning system* - detection of
cyclists (p. 231)
•
Collision warning system* - operation
(p. 233)
16
No warning for cyclists with "Level 1".
* Option/accessory. 229
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system* - function
1 - Collision warning
The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision.
The collision warning system can detect pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are stationary or
moving in the same direction as your car and are
located in front of you.
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian,
cyclist or a vehicle then the driver's attention is
attracted with a flashing red warning signal (1)
and an acoustic signal.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to
take evasive action and the risk of collision is
imminent then the automatic braking function is
deployed - this takes place irrespective of
whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then
takes place with full brake force in order to
reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force
if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. For cyclists,
the warning and full brake intervention may come
very late or simultaneously.
2 - Brake support18
Function overview17.
Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a
collision risk.
Radar sensor18
Camera sensor
This means that the brake system is prepared for
rapid braking by applying the brakes lightly, which
may feel like a slight jolt.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes
three steps in the following order:
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
quickly then full brake function is implemented.
1.
Collision warning
2.
Brake support18
Brake support also reinforces the driver's braking
if the system considers that the braking is not
sufficient to avoid a collision.
3.
Auto Brake18
The collision warning system and City Safety™
(p. 222) complement each other.
17
18
230
If the risk of collision has increased further after
the collision warning then the brake support is
activated.
3 - Auto Brake18
The automatic brake function is activated last.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
With system Level 2 only.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
WARNING
The collision warning system does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions. The collision
warning system does not react to vehicles or
cyclists driving in another direction to the car
or to animals.
Collision warning system* detection of cyclists
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are
not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a cyclist.
Warning only activated in the event of a high
risk for collision. This section "Function" and
the section "Limitations" inform about limitations that the driver must be aware of before
using the Collision Warning system with Auto
Brake.
Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle
speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph).
Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists do not work in darkness
and tunnels - not even when streetlights are
lit.
Optimal performance of the system requires that
the system function that detects a cyclist
receives as unambiguous information as possible
about the body and bicycle contours - this implies
the opportunity to identify the bicycle, head, arms,
shoulders, legs, upper and lower body combined
with a normal human pattern of movement.
The function only "sees" cyclists from behind, who are
travelling in the same direction.
The auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed. To ensure full
brake performance, the driver should always
depress the brake pedal - even when the car
auto-brakes.
Never wait for a collision warning. The driver is
always responsible that the correct distance
and speed are maintained - even when the
collision warning system with auto-brake is
used.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
Optimum examples of what the system interprets as a
cyclist - with clear body and bicycle contours, directly
from behind and in the car's centre line.
}}
* Option/accessory. 231
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
•
•
WARNING
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Cyclist
Detection is a means of assistance.
The bicycle must be equipped with a highly
visible and approved19 rearward-facing red
reflector, fitted at least 70 cm above the
roadway.
Collision warning system* detection of pedestrians
The function cannot detect:
•
all cyclists in all situations and does not
see partially obscured cyclists, for example.
•
cyclists in clothing that obscures the contours of the body or who are approaching
from the side.
•
The function can only detect cyclists directly
from behind and who are travelling in the
same direction - not at an angle from behind,
not from the side.
•
Cyclists travelling on the left or right-hand
edge of the car's imagined/extended side
lines may be detected late or not at all.
•
bicycles that have no rearward-facing red
reflector.
•
•
bicycles loaded with large objects.
The function's capacity to detect cyclists at
dusk and dawn is limited - just like the
human eye.
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
•
The function's capacity to detect cyclists is
deactivated when driving in darkness and
tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.
•
For optimum bicycle detection, the City
Safety™ function must be activated, see City
Safety™ (p. 222).
19
232
For the function to be able to detect a cyclist,
he/she must be an adult and riding an "adult
bicycle".
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body contours.
Optimal performance of the system requires that
the system function that detects pedestrians
receives as unambiguous information as possible
about the contours of the body - this implies the
opportunity to identify the head, arms, shoulders,
legs, upper and lower body combined with a normal human pattern of movement.
If large parts of the body are not visible to the
function's camera then the system cannot detect
a pedestrian.
The reflector must fulfil the recommendations and conditions of the traffic authority in the market in question.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
•
In order for a pedestrian to be detected
he/she must appear full-length and have a
height of at least 80 cm.
Collision warning system* operation
•
The camera sensor's ability to see pedestrians at dusk and dawn is limited - just like
the human eye.
Warning signals On and Off
•
The camera sensor's capacity to detect
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in
darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.
Settings for the collision warning system are
made via the centre console's screen and the
menu system MY CAR, see (p. 118).
Light and acoustic signals
When the collision warning system's light and
acoustic warnings are activated, the warning lamp
(no. [1] in previous illustration) is tested each
time the engine is started by briefly illuminating
the warning lamp's separate points of light.
WARNING
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Cyclist and Pedestrian Detection" is a means
of assistance. The function cannot detect all
pedestrians in all situations and does not see,
for example:
20
After starting the engine, both the light and
acoustic signals can be switched off:
•
partially obscured pedestrians, people in
clothing that hides their body contour or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.
You can select whether the collision warning system's acoustic and visual warning signals should
be switched on or off.
•
pedestrians who are carrying larger
objects.
When starting the engine, the setting that was
selected when the engine was switched off is
obtained automatically.
Related information
•
1. Acoustic and visual warning signal in the event of a
collision risk20.
•
The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven properly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed.
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
The illustration is schematic - car model and details may differ.
NOTE
The Brake Support and Auto Brake functions
are always enabled - they cannot be deactivated.
Search for Collision warning in Driver
support system in the menu system MY
CAR (p. 118) - and there select to uncheck
the function.
Acoustic signal
After starting the engine the warning sound can
be activated/deactivated separately:
•
Search for Warning sound in Collision
warning in the menu system MY CAR
(p. 118) - and there select On or Off.
Following which, the collision warning system is
only indicated with a light signal.
}}
* Option/accessory. 233
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Set warning distance
The warning distance regulates the distance at
which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed.
•
Search for Warning distance in Collision
warning in the menu system MY CAR
(p. 118) - and there select Long, Normal or
Short.
The warning distance determines the system's
sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an
earlier warning. First test with Long and if this
setting produces too many warnings, which could
be perceived as irritating in certain situations,
then change to warning distance Normal.
Only use warning distance Short in exceptional
cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use the
warning lamp and warning sound will be used
by the cruise control even if the collision
warning system is switched off.
NOTE
Maintenance
Even if the warning distance has been set to
Long warnings could be perceived as being
late in certain situations, e.g. when there are
large differences in speed or if vehicles in
front brake heavily.
WARNING
No automatic system can guarantee 100 %
correct function in all situations. Therefore,
never test Collision Warning with Auto Brake
by driving at people or vehicles - this may
cause severe damage and injury and risk lives.
Checking settings
The current settings can be controlled via the
centre console's screen and the menu system
(p. 118) MY CAR.
The collision warning system warns the driver
in the event of a risk of a collision, but the
function cannot shorten driver reaction time.
Camera and radar sensor21.
For the sensors to work correctly, they must be
kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned
regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
reduce their function and may prevent measurement.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
In order for the collision warning system to be
effective - always drive with Distance Warning
(p. 201) set at time interval 4–5.
21
234
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system* limitations
The function has certain limitations - for example,
it is not active until 4 km/h (3 mph).
The collision warning system's visual warning signal (see (1) in the illustration (p. 230)) may be
difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight,
reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if
the driver is not looking straight ahead. The warning sound should therefore always be activated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is
extended, which may reduce the capacity to avoid
a collision. In such situations the ABS and ESC
(p. 191) systems will provide best possible braking force with maintained stability.
NOTE
The visual warning signal can be temporarily
disengaged in the event of high passenger
compartment temperature caused by strong
sunlight for example. If this occurs then the
warning sound is activated even if it is deactivated in the menu system.
•
22
Warnings may not appear if the distance
to the vehicle in front is small or if steering wheel and pedal movements are
large, e.g. a very active driving style.
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic situation or external influences mean that the
radar or camera sensor cannot detect a
pedestrian, a vehicle or a cyclist in front correctly.
The sensor system has a limited range for
pedestrians and cyclists22 - the system can
give effective warnings and brake interventions for them at vehicle speeds up to
50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slowmoving vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h (43 mph).
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles could be disengaged due to darkness or
poor visibility.
Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle
speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as the Adaptive cruise control
(p. 204). Read more about radar sensor limitations (p. 217).
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent
or disturbing then the warning distance can be
reduced (p. 233). This would lead to the system
warning at a later stage, which reduces the total
number of warnings.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily
deactivated with reverse gear engaged.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not activated at low speeds - below 4 km/h (3 mph),
which is why the system does not intervene in situations where the car is approaching a vehicle in
front very slowly, e.g. when parking.
In situations where the driver demonstrates
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision warning may be postponed slightly in order to keep
unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision with
a stationary object the car remains stationary for
a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the car is braked
for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is
reduced to the same speed as that maintained by
the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine stops
when Auto Brake has stopped the car, unless the
driver manages to depress the clutch pedal
beforehand.
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
For cyclists, the warning and full brake intervention may come very late or simultaneously.
* Option/accessory. 235
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system* - camera
sensor limitations
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the
driver when there is a risk of colliding with a
pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are
stationary or moving in the same direction.
The function uses the car's camera sensor,
which has certain limitations.
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as well as
by Collision Warning with Auto Brake - by the
functions:
•
•
•
•
Active main beam (p. 96)
Road sign information (p. 244)
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 248)
Lane assistance (p. 251)
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and
dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor as this
may reduce effectiveness or cause one or
more of the systems dependent on the camera to stop working.
236
The camera sensors have limitations similar to
the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in darkness,
heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for example. Under such conditions the functions of camera-dependent systems could be significantly
reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road
surfaces or unclear lane markings could also significantly reduce camera sensor function when it
is used to scan the carriageway and detect
pedestrians and other vehicles.
The field of vision of the camera sensor is limited,
which is why pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles
cannot be detected in some situations, or they
are detected later than anticipated.
During very high temperatures the camera is
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes
after the engine is started in order to protect
camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action
If the display shows the message Windscreen
sensors blocked See manual then this means
that the camera sensor is blocked and cannot
detect pedestrians, cyclists, vehicles or road
markings in front of the car.
At the same time, this means that - besides Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the following
functions will not have full functionality either:
•
•
•
•
Active main beam
Driver Alert Control
Lane Keeping Aid
Road sign information
The following table presents possible causes for
a message being shown along with the appropriate action.
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the
camera is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the windscreen
surface in front of the
camera from dirt, ice
and snow.
Thick fog, heavy rain
or snow means that
the camera does not
work sufficiently well.
No action. At times
the camera does not
work during heavy rain
or snowfall.
The windscreen surface in front of the
camera has been
cleaned but the message remains.
Wait. It may take several minutes for the
camera to measure
the visibility.
Dirt has appeared
between the inside of
the windscreen and
the camera.
Visit a workshop to
have the windscreen
inside the camera
cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
* Option/accessory. 237
DRIVER SUPPORT
Collision warning system* - symbols
and messages
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake and Cyclist
and Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the
SymbolA
driver when there is a risk of colliding with a
pedestrian, bicycle or vehicle in front that are
stationary or moving in the same direction.
Message
Specification
Collision warning system OFF
Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Collision warning system Unavailable
The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto Braking was activated
Auto Brake has been active.
Windscreen sensors
blocked See manual
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
The message clears after one press of the OK button.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 236).
238
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Radar blocked See
manual
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event of heavy rain or if slush
has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about radar sensor limitations (p. 217).
Collision warning Service required
A
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
•
•
•
Collision warning system* (p. 229)
Collision warning system* - function (p. 230)
Collision warning system* - detection of
pedestrians (p. 232)
•
Collision warning system* - detection of
cyclists (p. 231)
•
Collision warning system* - operation
(p. 233)
•
Collision warning system* - limitations
(p. 235)
•
Collision warning system* - camera sensor
limitations (p. 236)
* Option/accessory. 239
DRIVER SUPPORT
BLIS*
Overview
BLIS (Blind Spot Information) is a function
designed for providing support for the driver
when driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.
BLIS is a driver's aid intended to provide a warning about:
•
•
vehicles in the car's blind spot
rapidly approaching vehicles in the left and
right-hand lanes closest to the car.
The BLIS function CTA (p. 242) (Cross Traffic
Alert) is a driver's aid intended to provide a warning about:
•
crossing traffic when the car is reversed.
Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand side.
BLIS lamp location23.
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
WARNING
BLIS is a supplementary aid and does not
work in all situations.
BLIS is no substitute for a safe driving style
and the use of rearview and door mirrors.
BLIS can never replace the driver's responsibility and attention - it is always the driver's
responsibility to change lanes in a safe manner.
23
240
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle. If
the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
•
To ensure optimal functionality the areas in
front of the sensors must be kept clean.
Related information
•
•
•
BLIS* - operation (p. 241)
BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 244)
CTA* (p. 242)
Maintenance
The sensors for the BLIS functions are located
inside the rear wing/bumper on each corner of
the car.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
BLIS* - operation
BLIS (Blind Spot Information) is a function
designed for providing support for the driver
when driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction.
Activate/deactivate BLIS
BLIS is activated when the engine is started. This
is confirmed by the indicator lamps in the door
panels flashing once.
When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp in
the button extinguishes/illuminates and the combined instrument panel confirms the change with
a text message. The door panel indicator lamps
flash once upon activation.
To extinguish the message:
•
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
or
•
Wait approx. 5 seconds - the message extinguishes.
•
the driver's vehicle is overtaken by other
vehicles
•
the driver's vehicle is rapidly caught up by
another vehicle.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a
quickly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the door
panel BLIS lamp illuminates with a constant glow.
If the driver activates the direction indicator on
the same side as the warning in this situation
then the BLIS lamp will change from a constant
glow to flashing with a more intense light.
When BLIS operates
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is being
reversed.
Limitations
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossible
to provide warnings. BLIS cannot detect hazards if it is covered.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
•
BLIS is deactivated when a trailer is connected to the car's electrical system.
Button for activating/deactivating.
The BLIS function can be deactivated/activated
by pressing the BLIS button on the centre console.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for a button in the centre
console - in which case the function is handled
by the car's menu system MY CAR (p. 118).
Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone for rapidly approaching vehicle.
The BLIS function is active at speeds above
10 km/h (6 mph).
The system is designed to react when:
}}
* Option/accessory. 241
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
BLIS* (p. 240)
BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 244)
CTA*
CTA is a supplementary aid and does not
work in all situations.
Activate/deactivate CTA
CTA can never replace the driver's responsibility and attention - it is always the driver's
responsibility to reverse in a safe manner.
CTA is activated when the engine is started. This
is confirmed by the indicator lamps for BLIS in
the door panels flashing once.
CTA is no substitute for a safe driving style
and the use of rearview and door mirrors.
When CTA operates
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.
The CTA function can be deactivated/activated
separately with the Parking assistance (p. 260)
On/Off button. The BLIS lamps flash once on
reactivation.
However, the BLIS function remains activated
after the CTA has been deactivated.
242
WARNING
The BLIS function CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is a
driver aid intended to warn about crossing traffic
when the car is reversing. CTA is a supplement
to BLIS (p. 240).
Principle for CTA.
CTA supplements the BLIS function by being
able to see crossing traffic from the side during
reversing, such as when reversing out of a parking space.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In
favourable conditions, it may also be able to
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and
pedestrians.
cle/object that is blocking, at which the blind
sector rapidly decreases.
CTA is only active during reversing and is activated automatically when the gearbox's reverse
position is selected.
Examples of further limitations:
•
•
•
If CTA detects something approaching from
the side, an acoustic warning signal sounds.
The signal comes from either the left or the
right-hand speaker, depending on the direction from which the object is approaching.
CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS
lamps.
An additional warning is provided in the form
of an illuminated icon in the display screen's
PAS graphics (p. 260).
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
Blind CTA sector.
Sector where CTA can detect/"see".
Limitations
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors can
reduce functionality and make it impossible
to provide warnings. CTA cannot detect hazards if it is covered.
•
CTA is deactivated when a trailer is connected to the car’s electrical system.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Maintenance
CTA does not perform optimally in all situations,
but has a certain limitation - for example, the CTA
sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructing objects.
The sensors for the BLIS and CTA functions are
located inside the rear wing/bumper on each
corner of the car.
Here are some examples of when CTA's "field of
vision" may be limited from the beginning and
approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely "blind"
on one side.
However, when the driver is slowly reversing the
car, the angle is changed in relation to the vehi-
}}
243
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
BLIS - symbols and messages
Road Sign Information (RSI)*
In situations where the BLIS (Blind Spot
Information) (p. 240) and CTA (Cross Traffic
Alert) (p. 242) functions fail or are interrupted,
the combined instrument panel may show a symbol, supplemented by an explanatory message.
Follow any recommendation given.
The road sign information function (RSI – Road
Sign Information) helps the driver to remember
which speed-related road signs the car has
passed.
Message examples:
Keep this surface clean - also on the left-hand side.
•
To ensure optimal functionality the areas in
front of the sensors must be kept clean.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
Related information
•
•
BLIS* (p. 240)
BLIS - symbols and messages (p. 244)
Message
Specification
CTA OFF
CTA is manually switched off BLIS is active.
BLIS and
CTA OFF
Trailer
attached
BLIS and CTA are temporarily
non-operational because a
trailer is connected to the
car's electrical system.
BLIS and
CTA Service
required
BLIS and CTA are non-operational.
•
Visit a workshop if the
message remains - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be acknowledged by briefly
pressing the OK button on the direction indicator
stalk.
Related information
•
244
BLIS* (p. 240)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Related information
•
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 245)
•
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 248)
Road sign information (RSI)* operation
The road sign information function (RSI – Road
Sign Information) helps the driver to remember
which speed-related road signs the car has
passed.
The function is operated as follows:
Examples of readable speed related signs24.
The RSI function gives information on current
speed, e.g. that a motorway or road is starting/
ending and when overtaking is prohibited.
If both a sign for motorway/road for motorised
traffic and a sign showing the maximum permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to show the
sign symbol for maximum permitted speed.
WARNING
RSI does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
Recorded speed information25.
When RSI has recorded a road sign with an
imposed speed, the combined instrument panel
displays the sign as a symbol.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely
and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed.
24
25
Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
}}
* Option/accessory. 245
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Together with the symbol for
the current speed limit, a sign
showing that overtaking is prohibited may also be displayed
where appropriate.
Following which, the sign information is hidden
until the next speed-related sign is detected.
Additional signs
The speed applicable on an exit
is indicated in certain markets
by means of an additional sign
containing an arrow.
Speed signs linked to this type
of additional sign are displayed
only if the driver is using the direction indicator.
End of restriction or motorway
A corresponding road sign is shown in the combined instrument panel for approx. 10 seconds in
situations where RSI detects a sign that involves
the end of a speed limit - or other speed-related
information, e.g. end of a motorway.
Examples of such signs are:
Examples of additional
End of all restrictions.
signs25.
Sometimes different speed limits are signposted
for the same road - an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply. The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or
fog, for example.
Some speeds are applicable only after e.g. a specific distance or at a certain time of day. The driver's attention is drawn to the situation by means
of a symbol for an additional sign under the symbol showing speed.
Display of additional information
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
End of motorway.
25
246
Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
A symbol for additional sign in the form of an
empty frame under the combined instrument
panel's speed symbol means that the RSI has
DRIVER SUPPORT
detected an additional sign with supplementary
information for the current speed limit.
Speed warning
Related information
Setting in MY CAR
•
•
There are options for RSI in the MY CAR menu
system; see MY CAR (p. 118).
•
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 244)
Road sign information (RSI)* - limitations
(p. 248)
MY CAR (p. 118)
Road sign information On/Off
The combined instrument panel's speed symbol
display can be disabled. The function can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR.
For a description of the menu system, see MY
CAR (p. 118).
26
The driver can opt to receive a warning when the
applicable speed limit is exceeded by 5 km/h
(5 mph) or more. This warning is given by the
symbol showing the applicable maximum speed
temporarily flashing when this speed is exceeded.
The function can be activated/deactivated in the
menu system MY CAR. For a description of the
menu system, see MY CAR (p. 118).
Sensus Navigation
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation,
speed information is read from the navigation
unit in the following cases:
•
On detecting signs that indirectly indicate a
speed limit26, such as motorway and
expressway.
•
If a previously detected sign is assumed not
to apply any longer, but no new sign has
been detected.
Variations may occur in different markets.
* Option/accessory. 247
DRIVER SUPPORT
Road sign information (RSI)* limitations
The road sign information function (RSI – Road
Sign Information) helps the driver to remember
which speed-related road signs the car has
passed. The function has the following limitations.
The RSI function's camera sensor has limitations
just like the human eye - read more about camera sensor limitations (p. 236)).
Signs which indirectly provide information on a
prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for towns/
districts, are not recorded by the RSI function.
Here are several examples of what can disrupt
the function:
•
•
•
•
•
Faded signs
Signs positioned on bends
Rotated or damaged signs
Driver Alert System*
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or who
are inadvertently leaving the lane they are driving
on.
The DAC function is intended to attract the driver's attention when he/she starts to drive less
consistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted
or starts to fall asleep.
The Driver Alert System consists of different
functions which can either be switched on at the
same time or individually:
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for
major roads. The function is not intended for city
traffic.
•
•
Lane Departure Warning - LDW (p. 251).
A switched-on function is set in standby mode
and is not activated automatically until speed
exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph).
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h (37 mph).
Both functions use a camera which is dependent
on the lane having side markings painted on
each side.
Concealed or poorly positioned signs
WARNING
Signs completely or partly covered with frost,
snow and/or dirt.
Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid.
Related information
•
•
Driver Alert Control - DAC (p. 249).
Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 244)
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Road sign information (RSI)* - operation
(p. 245)
Related information
•
•
248
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 248)
A camera detects the side markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the section of the
road with the driver's steering wheel movements.
The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow
the carriageway evenly.
In some cases driving ability is not affected
despite driver fatigue. In which case there may
not be any warning issued for the driver. For this
reason it is always important to stop and take a
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 251)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
break in the event of any signs of driver fatigue,
irrespective of whether or not DAC issues a
warning.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a
period of driving. Always plan breaks at regular intervals, and make sure you are well
rested.
Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example:
•
•
in strong side winds
on rutted road surfaces.
NOTE
The camera sensor has certain limitations
(p. 236).
Related information
•
•
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 248)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* operation
WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously, as a
sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her
own condition.
Settings are made from the centre console display screen and its menu system.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as soon
as possible and rest.
On/Off
The Driver Alert function can be set in standby
mode via the menu system MY CAR (p. 118):
•
•
Studies have shown that it is equally as dangerous to drive while tired as it is under the
influence of alcohol.
Checked box - function activated.
Unchecked box - the function is deactivated.
Function
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as
the speed is above 60 km/h (37 mph).
Related information
•
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 248)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 248)
If the vehicle is being driven erratically,
the driver is notified by an acoustic signal plus the text message Driver Alert
Time for a break - the linked symbol
is illuminated in the combined instrument panel
at the same time. The warning is repeated after a
time if driving ability does not improve.
The warning symbol can go off:
•
Press the left stalk switch OK button.
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
(p. 249)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - symbols and
messages (p. 250)
* Option/accessory. 249
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* symbols and messages
the centre console's display screen in different
situations.
DAC (p. 248) can show symbols and text messages on the combined instrument panel or in
Here are some examples:
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Driver Alert Time for a break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen sensors blocked See
manual
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 236).
Driver Alert system Service required
The system is disengaged.
•
A
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Related information
•
•
•
250
Driver Alert System* (p. 248)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* (p. 248)
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - operation
(p. 249)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
WARNING
The purpose of Lane Departure Warning (Lane
Departure Warning) is to help the driver to
reduce the risk of the vehicle accidentally leaving
its own lane in certain situations on motorways
and similar major routes.
Lane assistance is merely a driver aid and
does not engage in all driving situations or
traffic, weather or road conditions.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely
and that applicable laws and road traffic regulations are followed.
Principle for LDW
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) function
Certain settings can be made for the Lane
Departure Warning (Lane Departure Warning)
function.
Off & On
Related information
(The figure is schematic - not model specific.)
A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
If the car crosses one of the side lines the driver
is alerted with an acoustic signal.
NOTE
The driver is only warned once each time the
wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic
alarm when there is a line between the car's
wheels.
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function
(p. 251)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - operation
(p. 252)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - limitations
(p. 253)
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - symbols
and messages (p. 254)
•
Driver Alert System* (p. 248)
Press the centre console's button to activate or
deactivate the function. The button's lamp illuminates when the function is switched on.
This function is complemented in the combined
instrument panel with intuitive graphics in different situations.
Personal preferences
Settings are made from the centre console's
screen via the menu system in MY CAR. For a
description of the menu system, see MY CAR
(p. 118).
}}
* Option/accessory. 251
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Select from the options:
• On at startup - The function is set in
standby mode each time the engine is
started. Otherwise the same value as when
the engine was switched off is obtained.
• Increased sensitivity - The sensitivity
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) operation
Lane Departure Warning (Lane Departure
Warning) is complemented in the combined
instrument panel with intuitive graphics in different situations. Here are some examples:
increases, an alarm is triggered earlier and
fewer limitations apply.
•
The LDW symbol has GREY side lines - the
function is in standby mode because the
speed is below 65 km/h (40 mph).
•
The LDW symbol has no side lines - the
function is deactivated.
Related information
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 251)
Related information
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 251)
LDW function side lines.
•
The LDW symbol has WHITE side lines - the
function is active and detects/"sees" one
side line, or both.
•
The LDW symbol has GREY side lines - the
function is active but detects neither left nor
right side line.
or
252
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) limitations
Lane Departure Warning (Lane Departure
Warning) camera sensor has limitations in a similar way to the human eye.
For more information, read about camera sensor
limitations (p. 236).
NOTE
There are some situations where LDW does
not give any warning, such as:
•
•
Direction indicators are switched on
•
In the event of rapid depression of the
accelerator pedal27
•
In the event of rapid steering wheel
movements27
•
If turning is so sharp that the car rolls.
The driver has his/her foot on the brake
pedal27
Related information
•
27
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 251)
When "Increased sensitivity" is selected a warning is still given, see Lane Departure Warning (LDW) - function (p. 251).
* Option/accessory. 253
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) symbols and messages
In situations where there is no Lane assistance
function, a symbol may be shown in the comSymbol
bined instrument panel in combination with an
explanatory message - follow the recommendation given if appropriate.
Message
Specification
Lane Departure Warning ON/Lane Departure Warning OFF
The function is switched on/off.
Message examples:
Shown at switch-on/off.
The text disappears after approx. 5 seconds.
Windscreen sensors blocked See manual
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera sensor.
Read about camera sensor limitations (p. 236).
Driver Alert system Service required
The system is disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
254
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 251)
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)*
Principle for LKA
The purpose of Lane Departure Warning is to
help the driver to reduce the risk of the vehicle
accidentally leaving its own lane in certain situations on motorways and similar major routes.
•
•
•
Lane Departure Warning LDW or LKA
There are two versions of Lane assistance:
•
•
LDW - Lane Departure Warning - alerts
the driver with an acoustic signal or vibration
in the steering wheel.
LKA - Lane Keeping Aid
(Lane Keeping Aid) - steers the car back into
its lane and/or alerts the driver with an
acoustic signal or vibration in the steering
wheel.
The car is supplied with one of these two systems - market and engine alternative determine
which of the systems the car is equipped with.
In the event of uncertainty whether the car has
LDW or LKA:
•
Open the menu system MY CAR and locate
Driver support system - which specifies
Lane Departure Warning if the car has
LDW or Lane Keeping Aid for LKA.
Related information
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - function (p. 256)
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - operation (p. 257)
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - limitations
(p. 258)
•
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - symbols and messages (p. 259)
•
•
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 251)
Driver Alert System* (p. 248)
(The figure is schematic - not model specific.)
A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
If the car is about to cross a side line then Lane
Keeping Aid will actively steer the car back into
the lane with a slight steering torque in the steering wheel.
If the car reaches or crosses a side line then
Lane Keeping Aid will also alert the driver with
vibration in the steering wheel.
WARNING
Lane assistance is merely a driver aid and
does not engage in all driving situations or
traffic, weather or road conditions.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely
and that applicable laws and road traffic regulations are followed.
* Option/accessory. 255
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - function
Certain settings can be made for the Lane Keeping Aid (Lane Keeping Aid) function.
Off & On
Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed
range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with
clearly visible side lines. The function is temporarily deactivated on narrow roads with less than 2.6
metres between the lane's side lines.
CAR. For a description of the menu system, see
MY CAR (p. 118).
In addition, the following selections can be made
in MY CAR:
•
Warning with vibration in the steering wheel:
Vibration only - On or Off.
•
Active steering: Steering assist only- On or
Off.
•
Both Warning with vibration in the steering
wheel and Active steering: Full function On or Off.
If the car approaches the left or right side line of
the lane and the direction indicator is not activated, the car is steered back into the lane.
Warning with vibration in steering wheel
Active steering
Lane Keeping Aid strives to keep the car within
the side lines for the lane.
LKA steers and alerts with steering wheel vibration28.
If the car crosses a side line then Lane Keeping
Aid will alert the driver with vibration in the steering wheel29. This occurs regardless of whether
the car is actively steered back by applying a
slight steering torque.
Press the centre console's button to activate or
deactivate the function. The button's lamp illuminates when the function is switched on.
Some combinations of the selected equipment
leave no vacant space for an On/Off button in
the centre console - in which case the function is
instead handled in the car's menu system MY
28
29
256
LKA intervenes and steers away.
The figure shows 3 vibrations when the side line is crossed.
Steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the time for which the car has crossed the side line, the more pulses there are.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Dynamic cornering
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - operation
Lane Keeping Aid (Lane Keeping Aid) is complemented in the combined instrument panel with
intuitive graphics in different situations. Here are
some examples:
NOTE
LKA is temporarily deactivated for as long as
the direction indicator is switched on.
LKA intervenes on the right-hand side.
LKA does not intervene in sharp inside bends.
Lane Keeping Aid intervenes and steers away
from the side line - this is indicated with:
In certain cases Lane assistance will allow the
car to cross lane lines without engaging active
steering or activating a warning. Using an adjacent lane for cutting a corner when there is a
clear line of vision is an example of this.
•
Related information
•
•
Related information
•
•
RED line for the side in question.
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 255)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 251)
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 255)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 251)
LKA "sees" and follows the side lines.
If Lane Keeping Aid is active and detects/"sees"
the side lines, the LKA symbol indicates this with
WHITE lines.
•
GREY side line - Lane Keeping Aid does not
see a line on that side of the car.
* Option/accessory. 257
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - limitations
Lane Keeping Aid (Lane Keeping Aid) camera
sensor has limitations in a similar way to the
human eye.
For more information, read about camera sensor
limitations (p. 236) and see Collision warning
system* - operation (p. 233).
standby mode and will remain in this mode until
the driver begins to steer the car again.
Related information
•
•
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 255)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 251)
NOTE
In certain demanding situations Lane assistance may have difficulty assisting the driver
in the right way - in which case it is recommended to deactivate the function.
Examples of such situations may be:
•
•
•
•
•
roadworks
winter road conditions
poor road surface
very sporty driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility.
Hands on the steering wheel
In order for Lane Keeping Aid to operate, the
driver must have his/her hands on the steering
wheel. LKA continually monitors this. If hands are
not detected on the steering wheel then a text
message is shown, prompting the driver to
actively steer the car.
If the driver does not follow the request to begin
steering then Lane Keeping Aid goes into
258
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) - symbols
and messages
In situations where there is no Lane assistance
function, a symbol may be shown in the comSymbol
bined instrument panel in combination with an
explanatory message - follow the recommendation given if appropriate.
Message
Specification
Windscreen sensors
blocked See manual
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Message examples:
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see Collision warning system* - camera sensor limitations
(p. 236) and Collision warning system* - operation (p. 233).
Lane Keeping Aid Service required
The system is disengaged.
Lane Keeping Aid Interrupted
LKA has been set to standby mode. The lines of the LKA symbol indicate when the function is active again.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 255)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)* (p. 251)
* Option/accessory. 259
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park Assist*
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's screen indicate the distance to
the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance sound level can be adjusted
during the ongoing acoustic signal using the centre console's VOL knob. The sound level can also
be adjusted in the audio settings menu, which is
accessed by pressing SOUND or in the car's
menu system (p. 118) MY CAR30.
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
•
•
Rear only
Both front and rear.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar
is included when the function measures the
parking space.
30
260
WARNING
Park assist syst* - function
•
Parking assistance does not relinquish
the driver's own responsibility during
parking.
•
The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
The parking assistance system is automatically
activated when the engine is started - the
switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking
assistance is switched off with the button, the
lamp goes out.
•
Be aware of e.g. people or animals near
the car.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park assist syst* - function (p. 260)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 262)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 261)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 263)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 263)
Park assist camera* (p. 264)
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA*.
If the car is equipped with CTA (p. 242) the indicator lamps flash for BLIS (p. 240) once, then
parking assistance is activated using the button.
Depending on the audio and media system.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low
barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and
are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the
expected constant tone.
Park assist syst* - backward
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's screen indicate the distance to
the detected obstacle.
The sensors cannot detect high objects, such
as projecting loading docks.
•
Display screen view - showing an obstacle left front and
right rear.
The centre console's display screen shows an
overview of the relationship between the car and
detected obstacle.
Marked sectors show which of the four sensor(s)
detected an obstacle. The closer to the car symbol a selected sector box is, the shorter the distance between the car and a detected obstacle.
The frequency of the signal increases the shorter
the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind
the car. Other sound from the audio system is
muted automatically.
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
constant and the active sensor's field nearest the
car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is within
the distance for the constant tone both behind
and in front of the car, then the tone sounds
alternately from the loudspeakers.
In such situations, pay extra attention and
manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly
slowly or stop the current parking
manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of
damage to vehicles or other objects since
information from the sensors is not
always reliable in such situations.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 260)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 262)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 261)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 263)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 263)
Park assist camera* (p. 264)
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles behind comes from one of the rear loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the towbar,
rear parking assistance is switched off automatically - otherwise the sensors would react to the
trailer.
}}
* Option/accessory. 261
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine
trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to
be switched off manually in order that the
sensors do not react to them.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 260)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 260)
Park assist syst* - forward
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's screen indicate distance to
detected obstacles.
(7 mph) or above - the function is reactivated
when the speed falls below 10 km/h (6 mph).
NOTE
Parking assistance is deactivated when the
parking brake is applied or P mode is
selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
The parking assistance system is automatically
activated when the engine is started - the
switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking
assistance is switched off with the button, the
lamp goes out.
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors - the
auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an
obstacle.
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 262)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 263)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 263)
Related information
•
•
•
•
Park assist camera* (p. 264)
The distance covered in front of the car is about
0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for obstacles in
front comes from one of the front loudspeakers.
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 260)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 260)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 261)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 263)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 263)
Park assist camera* (p. 264)
The front parking assistance system is active up
to 10 km/h (6 mph).
If the Parking Assistance System is deactivated
because the car is moving too quickly - 11 km/h
262
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist syst* - fault indication
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's screen indicate the distance to
the detected obstacle.
If the combined instrument panel's
information symbol illuminates with
constant glow and the text message
Park Assist System Service required is
shown then parking assistance is disengaged.
Park assist syst* - cleaning the
sensors
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking.
An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the
centre console's screen indicate the distance to
the detected obstacle.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure
that they work properly. Clean them with water
and car shampoo.
IMPORTANT
Sensor location, rear.
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external sound
sources that emit the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works with.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or
no function.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 260)
Park assist syst* - cleaning the sensors
(p. 263)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 260)
G031402
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles, etc.
Sensor location, front.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Park Assist* (p. 260)
Park assist syst* - function (p. 260)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 262)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 261)
Park assist syst* - fault indication (p. 263)
Park assist camera* (p. 264)
Park assist syst* - forward (p. 262)
Park assist syst* - backward (p. 261)
Park assist camera* (p. 264)
* Option/accessory. 263
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist camera*
Function and operation
Parking camera is an auxiliary system, which is
activated when the reverse gear is selected.
The camera image is shown on the centre console's screen.
NOTE
When a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, the protrusion of the towbar
is included when the function measures the
parking space.
Camera location next to the opening handle.
WARNING
•
The parking camera serves as an aid. It
does not relieve the driver of responsibility when reversing.
•
The camera has blind spots, where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of people and animals in the
vicinity of the car.
The camera shows what is behind the car and if
something appears from the sides.
The camera shows a wide area behind the car
and part of the bumper and any towbar.
Objects on the screen may appear to tilt slightly this is normal.
NOTE
Objects on the display screen may be closer
to the car than they appear to be on the
screen.
If another view is active then the parking camera
system takes over automatically and its camera
image is displayed on the screen.
264
When reverse gear is selected, two unbroken
lines are shown graphically which illustrate where
the car's rear wheels will roll with the current
steering wheel angle - this facilitates parallel
parking, reversing into tight spaces and for hitching a trailer. The car's approximate external
dimensions are illustrated by means of dashed
lines. The park assist lines can be deactivated see section Settings (p. 266).
If the car is also equipped with Parking assistance sensors (p. 260)* then their information is
shown graphically as coloured areas in order to
illustrate distances to detected obstacles, see
heading "Cars with reversing sensors" later in the
text.
The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
car's speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph) forward or
35 km/h (22 mph) backward.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions. Because
of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness
and quality. Poor light conditions can result in a
slightly reduced image quality.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and
ice to ensure optimum function. This is particularly important in poor light.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Park assist lines
Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed
for the driver.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and are
directly related to steering wheel movement,
which shows the driver the path the car will then
take - also when the car is turning.
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer which is not
connected electrically to the car, the lines
on the display show the route the car will
take - not the trailer.
•
The screen shows no lines when a trailer
is connected electrically to the car's electrical system.
•
The parking camera is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo
genuine trailer cable is used.
IMPORTANT
Remember, that with the rear camera view
selected, the monitor only displays the area
behind the car. Be aware of the sides and
front of the car when manoeuvring in reverse.
Boundary lines
The system's different lines.
Boundary line, free reversing zone
"Wheel tracks"
The dashed line (1) frames in a zone up to
about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also the
limit of the car's most protruding parts, such as
door mirrors and corners - also when the car is
turning.
The wide "wheel tracks" (2) between the side
lines indicate where the wheels will roll and can
extend about 3.2 m back from the bumper if no
obstacle is in the way.
}}
265
DRIVER SUPPORT
||
Cars with reversing sensors*
Related information
•
•
•
Park assist camera - settings (p. 266)
Park assist camera - limitations (p. 267)
Park Assist* (p. 260)
Park assist camera - settings
Activate switched-off camera
The camera starts automatically when reverse
gear is selected, but it can also be activated manually as follows:
Coloured fields (one per sensor) show distance.
If the car is also equipped with Parking assistance (p. 260) the distance is shown with coloured fields for each sensor that registers an
obstacle.
The colour of the areas changes with decreasing
distance to the obstacle - from light yellow to yellow, via orange to red.
266
Colour / paint
Distance (metres)
Light yellow
0.7–1.5
Yellow
0.5–0.7
Orange
0.3–0.5
Red
0–0.3
•
Press CAM - the screen shows the current
camera view.
Change setting
The settings for the parking camera can be
changed when the screen shows a camera view:
1.
Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown - the screenchanges to a menu with
various options.
2.
Turn to reach the desired option with TUNE.
3.
Highlight the option by pressing OK/MENU
once and go back out with EXIT.
* Option/accessory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
Towbar
Park assist camera - limitations
The camera can be used to advantage when
hitching a trailer. A park assist line for the towbar's intended "trajectory" toward the trailer can
be shown on the screen - exactly as for the
"wheel tracks".
A choice can be made between showing the
"wheel tracks" or the towbar's trajectory - both
options cannot be shown simultaneously.
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on
the rear of the car could obscure the camera's view.
To bear in mind
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only
looks like a relatively small part of the image is
obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that
is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go
undetected until they are very close to the car.
1.
Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown.
2.
Turn to reach the Tow bar trajectory guide
line option with TUNE.
3.
Highlight the option by pressing OK/MENU
once and go back out with EXIT.
•
Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice and
snow.
Zoom
If precise manoeuvring is required then the camera view can be zoomed in:
•
Clean the camera lens regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - take care not
to scratch the lens.
•
Related information
Press CAM or turn TUNE - repeated press/
turn changes back to the normal view.
If more options are available, they are in a loop
- press/turn until the desired camera view is
shown.
•
•
•
Park assist camera* (p. 264)
Park assist camera - settings (p. 266)
Park Assist* (p. 260)
Related information
•
•
Park assist camera* (p. 264)
Park Assist* (p. 260)
* Option/accessory. 267
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the engine
The engine is started and switched off using the
remote control key and the START/STOP
ENGINE button.
2.
3.
Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed1. (For
cars with automatic gearbox - Depress the
brake pedal.)
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal operating
temperature as quickly as possible, which
minimises exhaust emissions and protects the
environment.
Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
and then release it.
When the engine is started the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its overheating protection triggers.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover.
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/
inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key incorrectly turned - hold the end with the detachable key blade, see Detachable key blade detaching/attaching (p. 171).
1.
1
270
Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and press it in to its end position.
Keyless starting (Keyless drive)*
Follow steps 2-3 for keyless (p. 174) starting of
the engine.
NOTE
A prerequisite for the engine to start is that
one of the car's remote control keys with the
keyless start and lock function is in the passenger compartment or cargo area.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch after starting the engine or
when the car is being towed.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
WARNING
Always remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch when leaving the car, and
make sure that the key position is 0 - in particular if there are children in the car. For
information on how this works - see Key positions (p. 83).
Related information
•
Switching off the engine (p. 271)
If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the engine.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Switching off the engine
Steering lock
Remote start (ERS)*
The engine is switched off using the START/
STOP ENGINE button.
The steering lock makes steering difficult if the
car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise
may be noticed when the steering lock unlocks
or locks.
Remote start (ERS – Engine Remote Start)
means that the car's engine can be started
remotely in order to be able to warm up/cool
down the passenger compartment before departure. Remote start is activated via key and/or via
Volvo On Call*.
To stop the engine:
•
Press START/STOP ENGINE - the engine
stops.
If the gear selector is not in P position or if the
car is moving:
•
Press twice on START/STOP ENGINE or
hold the button depressed until the engine
stops.
Function
•
The steering lock is activated when the driver's door is opened after the engine has
been switched off.
•
The steering lock is deactivated when the
remote control key is in the ignition switch2
and the START/STOP ENGINE button is
depressed.
Related information
•
Key positions (p. 83)
Related information
•
•
•
Starting the engine (p. 270)
The climate control system starts on automatic
settings. A remote-started engine is activated for
a maximum of 15 minutes, then it is switched off.
After two activations of remote start, the engine
must be started in the normal way before remote
start can be used again.
Engine remote start is only available in cars with
automatic gearbox and cars that have a
bonnet switch3 installed.
Key positions (p. 83)
Steering wheel (p. 90)
NOTE
The service life of the remote control key's
battery is affected by the remote start function. In the event of frequent use of remote
start, the battery should therefore be changed
once per year, see Remote control key replacing the battery (p. 172).
2
3
In cars with keyless start and lock system it is enough to have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.
Available in the XC60, cars with alarm, most cars with 4-cylinder engines or if ERS is selected for new construction.
}}
* Option/accessory. 271
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
NOTE
Remote start (ERS) - operation
Follow local/national rules/regulations on
idling. Also take into account the local/
national rules/regulations regarding the noise
level when the engine is running.
To remote-start the engine, the following criteria must be met:
The car must be supervised.
•
The car must not be parked in a closed,
unventilated area - the exhaust gases
may seriously injure humans and animals.
There must be no people or animals
inside or around the car.
Related information
•
•
Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 272)
Remote start (ERS) - symbols and messages
(p. 273)
The key's buttons for remote start.
Unlocking
Follow this immediately afterwards with a
long press - at least 2 seconds - on
button (3).
1.
The direction indicators flash quickly several
times.
2.
The engine starts.
3.
The direction indicators illuminate with a constant glow for 3 seconds to verify that the
engine has started.
NOTE
After remote starting, the car continues to be
locked but with deactivated movement detector*.
Locking
Approach lighting
Unlocking, tailgate
With PCC5 key
Information4
The light indication for Approach lighting6 flashes a few times when the button is pressed and then changes over
to constant glow if all criteria for
remote start have been fulfilled. However, this
does not mean that remote start has started the
engine.
Remote starting the engine
To be able to remotely start the engine the car
must be locked and the bonnet closed.
Proceed as follows:
4 Only on PCC key, see Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 169).
5 For more information on the PCC key, see Remote control key with PCC* - unique functions (p. 169).
6 For more information on Approach lighting, see Remote control key - functions (p. 167) and Approach
272
Briefly press on the key's button (2).
2.
If the conditions for remote start are fulfilled then
the following takes place:
WARNING
•
•
1.
lighting (p. 104).
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
To check whether remote start has started the
engine, the user can press the button (5) - if the
engine has started, there is a light indication by
the buttons (2) and (3).
Active functions
The following functions are activated with a
remote started engine:
•
•
•
Climate control system
Audio/video system
Approach lighting.
Deactivated functions
The following functions are deactivated with a
remote started engine:
•
•
•
•
Headlamps
Position lamps
Number plate lighting
Windscreen wiper.
Remote start is stopped
The following steps switch off a remote-started
engine:
•
The remote control key's button
(1), (2) or (4) is depressed
•
•
•
The car is unlocked
A door is opened
Accelerator pedal or brake pedal is
depressed
•
•
The gear selector is moved out of P position
Active remote start time exceeds 15 minutes.
When a remote-started engine is switched off,
the direction indicators illuminate with a constant
glow for 3 seconds.
Related information
•
•
Remote start (ERS)* (p. 271)
Remote start (ERS) - symbols and messages
(p. 273)
Remote start (ERS) - symbols and
messages
In situations where the ERS function fails or is
interrupted, a symbol is shown in the combined
instrument panel, supplemented by an explanatory text message.
ERS function unavailable
Message
Specification
No remote
start Too many
tries
ERS unavailable because a
maximum of 2 ERS activations in succession are
allowed.
No remote
start Low fuel
level
ERS unavailable because
fuel level too low.
No remote
start Gear not
in P
ERS unavailable because
gear selector is not in P
position.
No remote
start Driver in
car
ERS unavailable because
someone is in the passenger compartment.
No remote
start Low battery
ERS unavailable due to low
battery voltage. Charge the
battery by starting the
engine.
}}
* Option/accessory. 273
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
A
Message
Specification
No remote
start Engine
warning
ERS unavailable due to
warning message from
engine. Contact a workshopA.
Remote start
off Engine
coolant level
low
ERS unavailable due to
error message from cooling system, see Coolant level (p. 353).
No remote
start Door
open
ERS unavailable because a
door/tailgate was not
closed.
No remote
start Bonnet
open
ERS did not activate
because the bonnet was
not closed.
No remote
start Car not
locked
ERS unavailable because
the car was not locked.
No remote star
Key in car
ERS did not activate
because the key was in the
car.
Interrupted ERS function
Message
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A
274
Specification
Remote start
off Gear not in
P
ERS interrupted because
gear selector is not in P
position.
Remote start
off Driver in car
ERS interrupted because
someone is in the passenger compartment.
Remote start
off Engine
warning
ERS interrupted due to
error message from
engine. Contact a workshopA.
Remote start
off Engine
coolant level
low
ERS interrupted due to
error message from cooling system.
Remote start
off Bonnet
open
ERS interrupted because
the bonnet is open.
Remote start
off Low battery
ERS interrupted since the
battery voltage is too low.
Remote start
off Low fuel
level
ERS interrupted since the
fuel level is too low.
Related information
•
•
Remote start (ERS)* (p. 271)
Remote start (ERS) - operation (p. 272)
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Jump starting with another battery
4.
If the starter battery (p. 367) is discharged then
the car can be started with current from another
battery.
Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
11. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery.
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5.
Open the clips on the front cover of the battery in your car and remove the cover, see
Starter battery - replacement (p. 369).
6.
Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2).
7.
Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid short circuits or other
damage:
8.
Connect the other clamp to a grounding
point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at the
top, the outer screw head (4).
1.
Set the car's electrical system in key position
0, see Key positions - functions at different
levels (p. 83).
9.
Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed
securely so that there are no sparks during
the starting attempt.
2.
Check that the donor battery has a voltage of
12 V.
3.
If the donor battery is installed in another car
- switch off the donor car's engine and make
sure that the two cars do not touch each
other.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow
it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the connections between cable
and car during the starting attempt. There is a
risk of sparks forming.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red.
> Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with the
battery's positive terminal or the clamp
connected to the red jump lead.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
}}
275
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Related information
•
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Gearboxes
Manual gearbox
There are two main types of gearbox. Manual
gearbox and automatic gearbox.
The function of the gearbox is to change the
gear ratio depending on speed and power
requirements.
•
•
Manual gearbox (p. 276)
Automatic gearbox, Geartronic (p. 278)
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system components, the working temperature of the
gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of overheating, a warning symbol is illuminated in the
combined instrument panel in conjunction
with a text message being shown. Follow the
recommendation given in the text message.
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 278)
Gearing pattern.
The manual gearbox has 6 gears, the shifting
pattern is imprinted on the gear lever.
•
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
•
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not sufficient to hold the car in all situations.
276
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility
of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear
during normal forward travel.
•
Follow the gearing pattern printed on the
gear lever and start from neutral position, N
before moving it to R position.
•
Engage reverse gear only when the car is
stationary.
Related information
•
•
Gearboxes (p. 276)
Transmission fluid - grade and volume
(p. 408)
Gear shift indicator*
Automatic gearbox
The gear shift indicator notifies the driver when it
is appropriate to engage the next higher or lower
gear.
An essential detail in connection with environmental driving is to drive in the right gear and to
change gear in good time.
An indicator is available as an aid on certain variants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which notifies
the driver when it is appropriate to engage the
next higher or lower gear in order to obtain the
lowest possible fuel consumption.
However, taking into consideration characteristics
such as performance and vibration-free running,
it may be advantageous to change gear at a
higher engine speed. The framed number indicates the current gear.
Combined instrument panel "Digital" with gear
shift indicator.
The framed number indicates the current gear.
With "Analogue" combined
instrument panel, the gear
positions and indicator arrows
are displayed in its centre.
Manual gearbox
Gear shift indicator for manual
gearbox. Only one marker is
illuminated at a time - during
normal driving it is only illuminated in the centre.
At the recommended upshift
the cursor illuminates "+", and at the recommended downshift the cursor illuminates "-"
(marked red in the illustration).
Related information
•
•
Manual gearbox (p. 276)
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 278)
* Option/accessory. 277
STARTING AND DRIVING
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic*
The Geartronic gearbox has two different gear
modes - Automatic and Manual.
Parking position - P
Neutral position - N
Select P position when starting the engine or
when the car is parked.
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in N position.
In order to be able to move the gear selector
from the P position, the brake pedal must be
depressed and key position must be II, see Key
positions - functions at different levels (p. 83).
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P
position is engaged. Also apply the parking brake
(p. 295) when the car is parked.
NOTE
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear positions.
S: Sport mode*.
Combined instrument panel (p. 68) shows the
position of the gear selector using the following
indications: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc.
Gear positions
Automatic gear positions are
indicated on the right of the
combined instrument panel.
(Only one marker is illuminated
at a time - the one showing the
current gear selector position.)
Symbol "S" for Sport mode is ORANGE when the
mode is active.
278
IMPORTANT
The car must be stationary when position P is
selected.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on a slope - the automatic transmission's P
position is not sufficient to hold the car in all
situation.
Reverse position - R
The car must be stationary when R position is
selected.
In order to be able to move the gear selector
from N to another gear position, the brake pedal
must be depressed and key position must be II,
see Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 83).
Drive position - D
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must be
stationary when the gear selector is moved to D
position from R position.
Geartronic – Manual gear positions
(+S-)
The driver can also change gear manually using
the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The car
engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is
released.
The manual gear position is reached by
moving the lever to the side from position D to the end position at "+S-". The
combined instrument panel's symbol
"+S-" changes colour from WHITE to ORANGE
and the digits 1, 2, 3 etc. are shown in a box, corresponding to the gear selected at the time.
•
Move the lever forwards towards "+" (plus) to
change up a gear and release the lever,
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
which returns to its rest position between +
and –.
or
•
Pull the lever back towards "–" (minus) to
change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode "+S–" can be
selected at any time while driving.
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver
allows the speed to decrease lower than a level
suitable for the selected gear, in order to avoid
jerking and stalling.
To return to automatic driving mode:
•
Move the lever to the side to the end position
at D.
Paddles*
As a supplement to manual gear changing with
the gear selector there are also controls located
on the steering wheel, so-called "paddles".
To be able to change gear with the steering
wheel paddles they must first be activated. This is
by means of pulling one of the paddles toward
the steering wheel - the combined instrument
panel then changes indication from "D" to a figure, which indicates the current gear.
To then change gear one step:
•
Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards
the steering wheel - and release.
A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle
provided that the engine speed does not leave
the permitted range.
After each gear change the combined instrument
panel changes figure to show the current gear.
NOTE
Automatic deactivation
If the steering wheel paddles are not used
then they are deactivated after a short time this is indicated when the combined instrument panel switches indication, from the figure for the current gear back to "D".
The exception is during engine braking - then
the paddles are activated as long as engine
braking is in progress.
NOTE
Manual deactivation
If the gearbox has a Sport programme then
the gearbox will only become manual after the
gear selector has been moved forwards or
backwards in its "+S–" position. The combined instrument panel then changes indication from S to show which of the gears 1, 2,
3 etc. is engaged.
The steering wheel paddle shifters can also
be deactivated manually:
•
Both steering wheel "paddles".
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
"+": Selects the next higher gear.
Pull both paddles toward the steering
wheel and hold until the combined instrument panel changes character from the
figure for the current gear to "D".
The paddles can also be used with the gear
selector in Sport mode* - then the paddles are
constantly activated without being deactivated.
}}
* Option/accessory. 279
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Geartronic - Sport mode* (S)7
The Sport programme provides sportier
characteristics and allows higher
engine speed for the gears. At the
same time it responds more quickly to
acceleration. During active driving, the use of a
lower gear is prioritised, leading to a delayed
upshift.
To activate Sport mode:
•
Move the gear selector to the side from D
position to the end position at "+S–" - the
combined instrument panel changes indication from D to S.
Sport mode can be selected at any time while
driving.
Geartronic - Winter mode
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads if
3rd gear is engaged manually.
1.
Depress the brake pedal and move the gear
selector from D position to the end position
at "+S–" - the combined instrument panel
changes indication from D to the figure 18.
2.
Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever forward towards "+" (plus) twice - the display
shifts the indication from 1 to 3.
3.
Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
7 With certain engines only.
8 If the car has Sport mode*
280
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car
moves off with a lower engine speed and
reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-down
position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
Towing
If the car has to be towed - see important information in the section Towing (p. 316).
Related information
•
Transmission fluid - grade and volume
(p. 408)
•
Gearboxes (p. 276)
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration
is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent over-revving the engine, the transmission's control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor, which prevents the kick-down function.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kickdown which would result in an engine speed high
enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens
if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at
high engine speed – the original gear remains
engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can change
one or more gears at a time depending on
engine speed. The car changes up when the
then "S" is shown first.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Gear selector inhibitor
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
There are two different types of gear selector
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.
•
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another position.
G021351
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking
position (P)
In order to be able to move the gear selector
from P to other gear positions, the brake pedal
must be depressed and the key position (p. 83)
must be II.
M: Manual shifting9 - "+/-" or "Sport mode".
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions are
locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector.
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)
If the gear selector is in N position and the car
has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then
the gear selector is locked.
In order to be able to move the gear selector
from the N position to another gear position, the
brake pedal must be depressed and the key position (p. 83) must be II.
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
starter battery, the gear selector must be moved
from the P position so that the car can be moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment
behind the centre console and locate a
hole10 for the key blade (p. 171) in the bottom of the compartment.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can
be moved forwards or backwards between P, R,
N and D.
Search for a spring-loaded button down in
the hole with the key blade; depress the button with the blade and hold.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
Move the gear selector from the P position
and pull up the key blade.
The automatic gearbox has special safety systems:
9 The illustration is schematic.
10 There may be 2 holes - one
for the key blade and one that fixes the rubber mat.
4.
Set the rubber mat back in place.
}}
281
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 278)
Hill start assist (HSA)*11
All-wheel drive - (AWD)*
The foot brake can be released before setting
off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start
Assist) function means that the car does not roll
backwards.
Optimal traction is achieved with all-wheel drive.
All Wheel Drive is always available
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal
to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver accelerates.
Related information
•
Starting the engine (p. 270)
All Wheel Drive (All Wheel Drive) means that the
car is driving all four wheels at the same time.
The power is automatically distributed between
the front and rear wheels. An electronically controlled clutch system distributes the power to the
wheels that have the best grip on the current
road surface. This provides the best traction and
prevents wheel spin. Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to the
front wheels.
All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain,
snow and icy conditions.
11
282
Depends on engine and gearbox combination. HSA not possible with some combinations.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Related information
•
Hill Descent Control (HDC)* (p. 283)
Hill Descent Control (HDC)*
Function
HDC can be compared to an automatic engine
brake. When you release the accelerator on
downhill gradients the car is normally braked by
means of the engine striving for low engine
idling speeds, so-called engine braking. But the
steeper the roadway and the more load in the
car, the faster the car coasts despite engine
braking - the HDC function compensates for this
with automatic brake intervention.
General information on HDC
HDC makes it possible to increase/reduce speed
on steep downhill gradients, with a foot only on
the accelerator pedal, without using the foot
brake. The sensitivity of the accelerator pedal
decreases and becomes more precise by means
of the full actuation of the pedal being restricted
to adjusting engine speed within a limited range.
The brake system brakes itself and provides the
car with a low and even speed, so allowing the
driver to fully focus on steering.
HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients
with an uneven road surface and slippery sections. E.g. when launching a boat on a trailer from
a ramp.
WARNING
HDC does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
HDC On/Off.
HDC is activated or deactivated with one of the
centre console's switches. The lamp within it illuminates when the function is activated.
When HDC is operating, the combined
instrument panel's symbol illuminates
combined with the text message Hill descent
control ON.
With manual transmission, the function works
only on first gear and reverse gear.
With automatic transmission, gear 1 must be
selected in manual gearshift mode (+S-), or R
must be selected. This is indicated by the number
1 or R in the combined instrument panel, see
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 278).
}}
* Option/accessory. 283
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
NOTE
NOTE
HDC cannot be activated on an automatic
gearbox when the gear selector is in position
D.
Operation
HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of
10 km/h (6 mph) forwards with engine braking
and 7 km/h (4 mph) backwards. However, any
speed within the gear's speed register can be
selected using the accelerator pedal. When the
accelerator pedal is released, the car is braked
quickly to 10 or 7 km/h (6 or 4 mph) respectively, irrespective of the hill's gradient and without the need for the foot brake.
The brake lights come on automatically when the
function is operating. The driver can brake or stop
the car at any time by using the foot brake.
With HDC activated you may experience a
delay between acceleration pedal activation
and engine response.
Related information
•
•
•
All-wheel drive - (AWD)* (p. 282)
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 278)
Manual gearbox (p. 276)
Start/Stop*
Some engine and gearbox combinations come
fitted with a Start/Stop function which engages
in the event of e.g. stationary traffic or waiting at
traffic lights - the engine is then switched off
temporarily and restarts automatically when the
journey is due to continue.
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values and it influences all of our
operations. This target orientation has resulted in
several separate energy-saving functions of
which Start/Stop is one, all with the collective
task of reducing fuel consumption, which in turn
helps to reduce exhaust emissions.
General information on Start/Stop
HDC is deactivated:
•
•
with the centre console's On/Off button
•
if a gear other than 1 or R is selected in
manual gearshift mode on an automatic
gearbox.
if a gear other than 1 or R is selected on a
manual gearbox
The function can be disengaged at any time. If it
takes place on a steep downhill gradient then the
braking effect will not release directly, but slowly
instead.
284
The engine is switched off - it becomes quieter and
cleaner.
The Start/Stop function gives the driver the
opportunity for a more active environmentally
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
conscious way of driving the car by means of
being able to allow the engine to stop automatically, whenever appropriate.
The car's MY CAR menu system, under the
DRIVe heading, contains information about Volvo's Start/Stop system, as well as recommendations for energy-saving driving techniques.
Manual gearbox or automatic gearbox
Note that there are differences in the Start/Stop
function depending on whether the gearbox is
manual or automatic.
Related information
•
•
•
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 285)
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 288)
Start/Stop* - function and operation
Conditions
The Start/Stop function is activated automatically when the engine is started with the key.
The Start/Stop function is activated automatically when the
engine is started with the key.
The driver is made aware of
this by the function's symbol
illuminating in the combined
instrument panel and the
On/Off button lamp illuminating.
All of the car's normal systems
such as lighting, radio, etc. work as normal even
with an engine that has stopped automatically,
except that some equipment may have the function temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control
system's fan speed or extremely high volume on
the audio system.
•
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 287)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 286)
Auto-stopping the engine
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 289)
The following is required for the engine to autostop:
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 290)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 370)
A
M/AA
Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral
position and release the clutch pedal the engine stops automatically.
M
Stop the car with the foot brake and
then keep your foot on the pedal - the
engine stops automatically.
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
For certain engine variants the engine may autostop before the car is stationary.
When the engine is auto-stopped, the
combined instrument panel's symbol
for the Start/Stop function illuminates.
Auto-starting the engine
Conditions
M/A
A
With the gear lever in neutral position:
1.
Depress the clutch pedal or press
the accelerator pedal - the engine
starts.
2.
Engage a suitable gear and drive.
Release the foot pressure on the foot
brake - the engine starts automatically
and the journey can continue.
M
A
}}
* Option/accessory. 285
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Conditions
M/A
A
Maintain foot pressure on the foot
brake and depress the accelerator
pedal - the engine auto-starts.
The following option is also available on
a downhill gradient:
A
M+
A
Release the foot brake and let the car
move off - the engine starts automatically when the speed exceeds normal
walking pace.
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
In certain situations, it may
advisable to temporarily switch
off the automatic Start/Stop
function - this is carried out
with a push of this button.
Disengaged function is indicated by
the combined instrument panel's
Start/Stop symbol and the On/Off button's lamp extinguishing.
The Start/Stop function is disengaged until it is
reactivated with the button or until the next time
the engine is started with the key.
286
Related information
•
•
•
Start/Stop* (p. 284)
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 288)
•
•
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 287)
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not
stop
Although the Start/Stop function is activated, the
engine does not always stop automatically.
The engine does not auto-stop if:
Conditions
M/AA
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 289)
the car has not first achieved
approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) after a key
start or the last auto-stop.
M+
A
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 290)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 370)
the driver has opened the seatbelt's
buckle.
M+
A
the capacity of the starter battery is
below the minimum permissible level.
M+
A
the engine does not have normal
operating temperature.
M+
A
ambient temperature is around freezing point or above approx. 30 °C.
M+
A
the windscreen's electric heating is
activated.
M+
A
the environment in the passenger
compartment differs from the preset
values - indicated by the ventilation
fan running at a high speed.
M+
A
the car is reversed.
M+
A
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 286)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Conditions
Conditions
M/AA
M/AA
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts
An auto-stopped engine may restart in certain
cases without the driver having decided that the
journey should continue.
the starter battery temperature is
below the freezing point or is too high.
M+
A
adaptive cruise control Queue Assist
is activated.
A
the driver makes greater steering
wheel movements.
M+
A
the gear selector is in R, S positionC
or "+/-".
A
the exhaust system's particulate filter
is full - the temporarily disengaged
Start/Stop function is reactivated as
soon as an automatic cleaning cycle
has been performed (see Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 306)).
M+
A
the road is very steep.
M+
A
a trailer is connected electrically to
the car’s electrical system.
M+
A
the bonnet has been openedB.
M+
A
A
B
C
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
With certain engines only.
Sport mode.
Conditions
M/AA
Misting forms on the windows.
M+A
The environment in the passenger
compartment deviates from the preset
values.
M+A
M+A
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 289)
There is a temporarily high current
take-off or starter battery capacity
drops below the lowest permissible
level.
Repeated pumping of the brake
pedal.
M+A
The bonnet is openedB.
M+A
The car starts to roll, or there is a
small increase in speed if the car
auto-stopped without being completely stationary.
M+A
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
In the following cases the engine also starts
automatically if the driver has not depressed the
clutch pedal (manual gearbox) or takes his/her
foot off the brake pedal (automatic gearbox):
Start/Stop* (p. 284)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 285)
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 288)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 287)
the gearbox does not have normal
operating temperature.
A
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 290)
the atmospheric air pressure is less
than equivalent to 1500-2500 metres
above sea level - the current air pressure varies with the prevailing weather
conditions.
A
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 370)
}}
* Option/accessory. 287
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Conditions
M/AA
The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened
with the gear selector in D or N position.
A
Steering wheel movementsB.
A
The gear selector is moved out of the
D position to S positionC, R or "+/-".
A
The driver's door is opened with the
gear selector in D position - a "ping"
sound and text message inform that
the Start/Stop function is active.
A
A
B
C
•
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 286)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not
auto-start
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 289)
The engine does not always auto-start after having auto-stopped.
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 290)
•
In the following cases the engine does not autostart after having auto-stopped:
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 370)
Conditions
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
With certain engines only.
Sport mode.
WARNING
Do not open the bonnet when the engine has
stopped automatically - the engine may suddenly start automatically. First switch off the
engine as normal using the START/STOP
ENGINE button before opening the bonnet.
Related information
•
•
•
•
288
M/A
Start/Stop* (p. 284)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 285)
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 288)
A gear is engaged without declutching
- a display text prompts the driver to
set the gear lever in neutral position in
order to enable auto-start.
M
The driver is unrestrained.
M
The driver is unrestrained, the gear
selector is in P position and the driver’s
door is open - a normal engine start
must take place.
A
A
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Start/Stop* (p. 284)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 285)
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 287)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 286)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 289)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 290)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 370)
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop
manual gearbox
If a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed
in accordance with the below:
1.
Check that the driver side's seatbelt is locked
in the seatbelt buckle.
2.
Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine
starts automatically.
3.
In certain cases the gear lever must be set in
neutral position. The combined instrument
panel then shows the text Put gear in
neutral.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Start/Stop* (p. 284)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 285)
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 288)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 287)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 286)
•
Start/Stop* - symbols and messages
(p. 290)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 370)
* Option/accessory. 289
STARTING AND DRIVING
Start/Stop* - symbols and
messages
Text message
The Start/Stop function can show text messages
in the combined instrument panel.
Symbol
290
In combination with this indicator lamp
the Start/Stop function may show text
messages in the combined instrument
panel for certain situations. For some of them
there is a recommended action that should be
performed. The following table shows some
examples.
Message
Info/Action
M/AA
Auto Start/Stop Service
required
Start/Stop is not operational. Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
M+A
Autostart Engine running +
acoustic signal
Activated if the driver's door is opened with auto-stopped engine and the gear selector in D position.
Press start button
The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE
button.
Depress clutch pedal to start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
Depress brake and clutch
pedals to start
The engine is ready to auto-start - waiting for the brake or clutch pedal to be depressed.
M
Put gear in neutral to start
Gear is engaged without declutching - disengage and set the gear lever in neutral position.
M
A
M+A
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbol
A
Message
Info/Action
Select P or N to start
Start/Stop has been deactivated - move the gear selector to N or P position and start the engine as
normal with the START/STOP ENGINE button.
A
Press start button
The engine will not start automatically - start the engine as normal with the START/STOP ENGINE
button and the gear selector in P or N.
A
M/AA
M = Manual gearbox, A = Automatic gearbox.
If a message does not go out following completion of the action then a workshop should be
contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Start/Stop* (p. 284)
Start/Stop* - function and operation (p. 285)
Starting the engine (p. 270)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not auto-start
(p. 288)
Start/Stop* - the engine auto-starts (p. 287)
Start/Stop* - the engine does not stop
(p. 286)
•
Start/Stop* - involuntary stop manual gearbox (p. 289)
•
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 370)
* Option/accessory. 291
STARTING AND DRIVING
Foot brake
The foot brake is used to reduce the car's speed
while driving.
The car is equipped with two brake circuits for
safety reasons. If a brake circuit is damaged then
the brake pedal will engage deeper and a higher
pressure on the pedal is needed to produce the
normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a
brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
If the foot brake is used when the engine is
switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a
higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the
car.
For cars with the Hill start assist (HSA)* (p. 282)*
function, the pedal returns more slowly than
usual to normal position if the car is parked on a
gradient or on an uneven surface.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
load the brakes can be relieved by using engine
braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used if
the same gear is used downhill as up.
292
For more general information on heavy loads on
the car, see Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 404).
Braking on wet roads
When driving for a long time in heavy rain without
braking, the braking effect may be delayed
slightly when next using the brakes. This may
also be the case after a car wash. It is then necessary to depress the brake harder. For this reason, maintain a greater distance to the traffic
ahead.
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads
and after a car wash. The brake discs are then
warmed up, dry more quickly and are protected
against corrosion. Take the prevailing traffic situation into account when braking.
Braking on salted roads
When driving on salted roads a layer of salt may
form on the brake discs and brake linings. This
may extend braking distance. For this reason,
keep an extra-large safety distance to the vehicle
ahead. Also make sure of the following:
•
Brake occasionally to remove any layer of
salt. Make sure that other road users are not
put at risk by the braking.
•
Gently depress the brake pedal when driving
is finished and before the next journey starts.
Maintenance
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in
the Service and Warranty Booklet.
New and replaced brake linings and brake discs
do not provide optimal braking effect until they
have been "worn in" a few hundred kilometres.
Compensate for the reduced braking effect by
depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recommends only fitting brake linings that are approved
for your Volvo.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's components
must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about the
procedure or engage a workshop to carry out
the inspection - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Symbols and messages
Symbol
Specification
Constant glow – Check the brake
fluid level. If the level is low, fill with
brake fluid and check for the cause
of the brake fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when
the engine is started - automatic
function check.
WARNING
If
and
illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the brake system.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest
workshop and have the brake system checked
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be
investigated.
•
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 294)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking
system
•
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 293)
The anti-lock braking system, ABS (Anti-lock
Braking System), prevents the wheels from locking up during braking.
The function allows the steering ability to be
maintained, and it is easier to swerve to avoid a
hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in the
brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the engine has been started when the
driver releases the brake pedal. A further automatic test of the ABS system may be made at
low speed. The test may be experienced as pulses in the brake pedal.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Foot brake (p. 292)
Parking brake (p. 295)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 294)
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 294)
Related information
•
•
Parking brake (p. 295)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 294)
293
STARTING AND DRIVING
Foot brake - emergency brake lights
and automatic hazard warning
flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about heavy braking. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of
- as in normal braking - shining with a constant
glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds
above 50 km/h (31 mph) in the event of heavy
braking. After the car's speed has been slowed
down to below 10 km/h (6 mph) the brake light
returns from flashing to the normal constant glow
- while at the same time the car's hazard warning
lights (p. 100) are activated. These flash until the
driver accelerates the car to a higher speed again
or switches off the hazard warning lights.
Foot brake - emergency brake
assistance
Emergency brake assistance EBA (Emergency
Brake Assist) helps to increase the braking force
and so reduce the braking distance.
EBA detects the driver's braking style and increases the braking force when necessary. The brake
force can be reinforced up to the level when the
ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is
interrupted when the pressure on the brake pedal
is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the
brake pedal is released then all braking
ceases.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Foot brake (p. 292)
Parking brake (p. 295)
Foot brake - emergency brake assistance
(p. 294)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 293)
Related information
•
•
•
•
294
Foot brake (p. 292)
Parking brake (p. 295)
Foot brake - emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers (p. 294)
Foot brake - anti-lock braking system
(p. 293)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
The parking brake prevents the car from rolling
away from stationary by means of mechanically
locking/blocking two wheels.
ing procedure is stopped when the control is
released.
NOTE
An acoustic signal sounds while emergency
braking is active at high speeds.
Function
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the electrically-controlled parking brake is being
applied. The noise can also be heard during the
automatic function checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake is
applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is
applied when the car is moving then the normal
foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four
wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear
wheels when the car is almost stationary.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
brake can neither be released nor applied. Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too
low, see Jump starting with another battery
(p. 275).
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
•
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
Parking brake control - apply.
1.
Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.
2.
Press the parking brake control.
>
The combined instrument panel's
symbol starts flashing - once there is a
constant glow the parking brake is
applied.
3.
Release the foot brake pedal and make sure
that the car is at a standstill position.
•
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it
has automatic transmission, is not sufficient
to hold the car in all situation.
When parking the vehicle, always engage 1st
gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic gearbox).
Emergency brake
In an emergency the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is in motion by pressing
and holding the parking brake control. The brak-
}}
295
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Disengaging the parking brake
NOTE
The parking brake can also be released manually by depressing the clutch pedal instead
of the brake pedal. Volvo recommends that
the brake pedal is used.
Releasing automatically
1.
Start the engine.
2.
Engage 1st gear or reverse gear.
3.
Ease up the clutch and depress the accelerator.
>
The parking brake releases and the
combined instrument panel's symbol
extinguishes.
Parking brake control - release.
Cars with manual gearbox
Releasing manually
1.
Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch12.
2.
Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.
3.
Apply the parking brake control.
>
The parking brake releases and the
combined instrument panel's symbol
extinguishes.
12
296
Cars with automatic gearbox
Releasing manually
1.
Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch12.
2.
Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.
3.
Pull the control.
>
The parking brake releases and the
combined instrument panel's symbol
extinguishes.
For cars with keyless start and lock system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.
Releasing automatically
1.
Put the seatbelt on.
2.
Start the engine.
3.
Depress the foot brake pedal firmly.
4.
Move the gear selector to position D or R
and depress the accelerator.
>
The parking brake releases and the
combined instrument panel's symbol
extinguishes.
NOTE
For safety reasons, the parking brake is only
released automatically if the engine is running
and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The parking brake is released immediately on cars
with automatic gearbox when the accelerator
pedal is depressed and the gear selector is in
position D or R.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car
to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid
this by depressing the control while driving off.
Release the control when the engine achieves
traction.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Replacing the brake linings
Symbols and messages
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electric parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
For information on how the combined instrument
panel's text messages can be shown and
deleted, see Messages - handling (p. 118).
Symbol
Message
Meaning/Action
"Message"
•
Read the combined instrument panel's message.
A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied.
If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen.
•
Handbrake not
fully released
Read the combined instrument panel's message.
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released:
•
Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
•
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Note: A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message.
}}
297
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
Symbol
Message
Meaning/Action
Handbrake not
applied
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied:
•
Try to release and apply the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
•
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door open in
order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged.
Handbrake
Service
required
A fault has arisen:
•
Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
•
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the car has to be parked before a possible fault
has been rectified, then the wheels must be
turned as if parking on a hill and 1st gear
engaged (manual gearbox) or the gear selector
must be in position P (automatic gearbox).
A text message can be acknowledged by briefly
pressing the OK button on the direction indicator
stalk.
Related information
•
298
Foot brake (p. 292)
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving in water
IMPORTANT
Driving in water means that the car is driven
through deep water on a water-covered roadway. Fording must be carried out with great caution.
Engine damage can occur if water enters the
air filter.
In depths greater than 35 cm, water could
enter the transmission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the
service life of these systems.
The car can be driven through water at a maximum depth of 35 cm at a maximum speed of
walking pace. Extra caution must be exercised
when passing through flowing water.
Damage to any component, engine, transmission, turbocharger, differential or its internal
components caused by flooding, hydrostatic
locking or oil shortage, is not covered by the
warranty.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed and
do not stop the car. When the water has been
passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and
check that full brake function is achieved. Water
and mud for example can make the brake linings
wet resulting in delayed brake function.
•
If necessary, clean the contacts for the electric heater and trailer coupling after driving in
water and mud.
•
Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time - this could
cause electrical malfunctions.
Overheating
Under special conditions, for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk
that the engine and drive system may overheat in particular with a heavy load.
For information about overheating when driving
with a trailer, see Driving with a trailer* (p. 308).
•
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of
the grille when driving in hot climates.
•
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system is too high then a warning symbol is
illuminated in the combined instrument panel's information display and a text message
High engine temperature Stop safely is
shown there - stop the car in a safe way and
allow the engine to run at idling speed for
several minutes in order to cool down.
•
If the text message High engine
temperature Turn off engine or Engine
coolant level low Stop safely is shown
then the engine must be switched off after
stopping the car.
•
In the event of overheating in the gearbox a
built-in protection function is activated which,
amongst other things, illuminates a warning
symbol in the combined instrument panel,
and its display shows the text message
Transmission hot Reduce speed or
Transmission hot Stop safely Wait for
cooling - follow the recommendation given
and lower the speed and stop the car in a
In the event of the engine stalling in water, do
not try restart - tow the car from the water to
a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. Risk of engine breakdown.
Related information
•
•
Recovery (p. 318)
Towing (p. 316)
}}
* Option/accessory. 299
STARTING AND DRIVING
safe way and allow the engine to run at idling
speed for a few minutes in order to allow the
gearbox to cool down.
•
If the car overheats, the air conditioning may
be switched off temporarily.
•
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
Driving with open tailgate/boot lid
Overload - starter battery
When driving with the tailgate open, toxic
exhaust fumes can be sucked into the car
through the cargo area.
The electrical functions in the car load the starter
battery (p. 367) to varying degrees. Avoid using
the key position II (p. 83) when the car is
switched off. Instead use position I - which uses
less power.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has been
switched off.
Related information
•
Loading (p. 156)
Also, be aware of different accessories that load
the electrical system. Do not use functions which
use a lot of power when the car is switched off.
Examples of such functions are:
•
•
•
•
ventilation fan
headlamps
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low then the combined instrument panel's information display
shows the text Low battery charge Power
save mode. The energy-saving function then
shuts down certain functions or reduces certain
functions such as the ventilation fan and/or
audio system.
–
300
In which case, charge the starter battery by
starting the car and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is
more effective during driving than running
the engine at idling speed while stationary.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Before a long journey
Winter driving
Before a long journey, it makes good sense to
go through the following points:
For winter driving it is important to perform certain checks in order to ensure that the car can
be driven safely.
•
Check the following in particular before the cold
season:
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is
a risk of snow or ice.
•
Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption (p. 413) is normal.
•
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil or
other fluid).
•
•
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
Carrying a warning triangle (p. 330) is a
legal requirement in certain countries.
Related information
•
•
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 350)
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 327)
•
The engine coolant (p. 353) must contain
50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine
against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To avoid health risks,
different types of glycol must not be mixed.
•
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
condensation.
•
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting
in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. For more
information on suitable oils, see Engine oil adverse driving conditions (p. 404).
Lamp replacement - general (p. 356)
battery and its capacity is reduced by the
cold.
Use washer fluid (p. 366) to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
Related information
•
Winter driving (p. 301)
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
•
The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the starter
301
STARTING AND DRIVING
Fuel filler flap - Opening/closing
Fuel filler flap - manual opening
Filling up with fuel
The fuel filler flap can be opened/closed as follows:
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually when
electric opening from the passenger compartment is not possible.
Important things to consider when refuelling.
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the
lighting panel - the flap opens when the button is
released.
1.
Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo
area (same side as fuel filler flap) and locate
the green cord with handle.
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in
the event of high outside temperatures. Open the
cap slowly.
In the combined instrument panel's display the arrow on the symbol indicates
which side of the car the fuel cap is located.
2.
Pull the cord gently straight back until the
fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".
•
•
IMPORTANT
Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until
a click confirms that it is closed.
•
Filling up with fuel (p. 302)
1.
Filling up with fuel (p. 302)
Choose fuel that is approved for use in the
car.
See information on approved fuels in the
respective section on petrol (p. 304) and
diesel (p. 304).
Related information
•
After refuelling - refit the cap and turn it until
one or more clicking sounds are heard.
Filling up with fuel
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is required
to disengage the hatch lock.
Related information
302
Opening/closing the fuel cap
2.
Do not overfill the tank but stop refuelling
when the pump nozzle cuts out the first time.
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTE
Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
Filling with a fuel can13
Fuel - handling
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting
fuel splashes in the eyes.
Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into
the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an openable
cover and the funnel's pipe must be slid past the
cover before filling can begin.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of
water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
•
•
Fuel filler flap - manual opening (p. 302)
Fuel - handling (p. 303)
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels
which are not recommended will invalidate
Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary
service agreements; this is applicable to all
engines.
WARNING
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
Related information
IMPORTANT
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended
by Volvo must not be used as engine power and
fuel consumption is negatively affected.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are
highly toxic and could cause permanent injury
or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that could
affect the car's performance.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Fuel - diesel (p. 304)
Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 306)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 413)
Fuel tank - volume (p. 411)
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when
refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark
build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to
fire and injury.
13
Only applies to a car with diesel engine.
303
STARTING AND DRIVING
Fuel - petrol
IMPORTANT
•
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damaging the catalytic converter.
Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a diesel engine.
Only use petrol from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must
fulfil the EN 228 standard.
•
Fuel containing metallic additives must
not be used.
•
Do not use any additives which have not
been recommended by Volvo.
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel
must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard.
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in
the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur and metals.
IMPORTANT
•
Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by
volume ethanol is permitted.
•
EN 228 E10 petrol (max
10 percent by volume ethanol) is
approved for use.
•
Ethanol higher than E10 (max.
10 percent by volume ethanol) is not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.
Octane rating
•
•
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum performance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C, fuel
with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.
304
Fuel - diesel
Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a petrol engine.
Related information
•
•
•
Fuel - handling (p. 303)
•
Fuel tank - volume (p. 411)
Economical driving (p. 307)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 413)
At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C) a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may
lead to ignition problems. The fuel qualities that
are sold must be adapted for season and climate
zone, but in the event of extreme weather conditions, old fuel or moving between climate zones,
paraffin precipitate may occur.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler
pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and
water.
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
Diesel fuel must:
engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with
diesel:
well as to use genuine parts developed specifically for this purpose.
1.
Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch and push it in to the end position. For
more information, see Key positions (p. 83).
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or
if you suspect that the car has been filled with
contaminated fuel. For more information, see
Volvo service programme (p. 342).
•
fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435
standards
•
have a sulphur content not exceeding
10 mg/kg
2.
•
Press the START button without depressing
the brake and/or clutch pedal.
have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME14
(B7).
3.
Wait approx. one minute.
4.
To start the engine: Depress the brake
and/or clutch pedal and then press the
START button again.
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
•
•
•
•
Special additives
Marine diesel fuel
Heating oil
FAME15 and vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations and
generate increased wear and engine damage
that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
Empty tank
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments to
carry out a check. Do this before starting the
14
15
16
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
•
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk
of air pockets in the fuel supply.
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Related information
•
•
•
Fuel - handling (p. 303)
Diesel particle filter (DPF) (p. 306)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 413)
Draining condensation from the fuel
filter16
The fuel filter separates condensation from the
fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine operation.
For optimum performance, it is important to follow the service intervals for fuel filter change as
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester
Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.
Applicable to five-cylinder engines only.
305
STARTING AND DRIVING
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission control.
The car should then be driven for approximately
20 minutes more.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances in
cold weather then the engine does not reach
normal operating temperature. This means that
regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not
take place and the filter is not emptied.
When the filter has become approx. 80% full of
particles, a yellow warning triangle is shown in
the combined instrument panel, and the message
Soot filter full See manual is shown in its
information display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car
until the engine reaches normal operating temperature, preferably on a main road or motorway.
306
Fuel tank - volume (p. 411)
NOTE
The particles in the exhaust gases are collected
in the filter during normal driving. So-called
"regeneration" is started in order to burn away
the particles and empty the filter. This requires
the engine to have reached normal operating
temperature.
Regeneration of the particle filter is automatic
and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may take a
little longer at a low average speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration.
•
The following may arise during regeneration:
•
a smaller reduction of engine power may
be noticed temporarily
•
fuel consumption may increase temporarily
•
a smell of burning may arise.
When regeneration is complete the warning text
is cleared automatically.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it
may be difficult to start the engine and the filter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that
the filter will need to be replaced.
Related information
•
•
•
Fuel - handling (p. 303)
Fuel - diesel (p. 304)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 413)
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Catalytic converters
Economical driving
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
purify exhaust gases. They are located close to
the engine so that operating temperature is
reached quickly.
Drive economically and eco-consciously by driving smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your
driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
•
Drive at a steady speed and keep a good distance to other vehicles and objects to minimise braking.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/
rhodium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a
chemical reaction without being used up themselves.
•
Use the ECO Guide* which indicates how
fuel-efficiently the car is being driven, see
Eco guide & Power guide* (p. 72).
•
High speed results in increased fuel consumption - the wind resistance increases
with speed.
•
Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to
the current traffic situation and road - lower
•
Do not run the engine to operating temperature at idling speed, but rather drive with a
normal load right after starting - a cold
engine consumes more fuel than a warm
one.
•
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results, see Tyres approved tyre pressures (p. 415).
•
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.
•
Do not use winter tyres when the winter season is over.
•
Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.
•
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel
economy. For more information, see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 413).
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content
of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This
value is fed into an electronic system that continuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to
air directed to the engine is continuously
adjusted. These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient combustion, and together with
the three-way catalytic converter reduce harmful
emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and
nitrous oxides).
engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption. Use the gear indicator (p. 277)17.
Related information
•
•
Fuel - petrol (p. 304)
Fuel - diesel (p. 304)
}}
* Option/accessory. 307
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
•
•
A roof load and space box increase air resistance, leading to higher consumption remove the load carriers when not in use.
Avoid driving with open windows.
For more information about Volvo Car Corporation's environmental philosophy, see Environmental philosophy (p. 22).
For more information about fuel consumption,
see Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 413).
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important
systems such as the power steering and
brake servo.
Driving with a trailer*
When driving with a trailer there are a number of
important points to think about regarding e.g. the
towing bracket, the trailer and how the load is
positioned in the trailer.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information, see Weights (p. 400).
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then
the car is delivered with the necessary equipment
for driving with a trailer.
•
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
•
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your
Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for
driving with a trailer.
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towing bracket complies with
the specified maximum towball load.
•
Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load. For information on the tyre pressure, see Tyres approved tyre pressures (p. 415).
Related information
•
•
Fuel - handling (p. 303)
•
Fuel tank - volume (p. 411)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 413)
•
17
308
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual
when driving with a trailer.
•
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km.
•
The brakes are loaded much more than usual
on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift
to a lower gear and adjust your speed.
•
For safety reasons, the maximum permitted
speed for the car when coupled with a trailer
should not be exceeded. Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and
weights.
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more
than 12%.
Trailer cable
An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket
has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin
electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by
Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the
ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indicators
are broken, then the combined instrument panel's symbol for direction indicators flashes faster
than normal and the information display shows
the text Trailer indicator malfunction.
Applies to manual gearbox.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light are
broken then the Trailer brake light
malfunction text is shown.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer* - manual gearbox
(p. 309)
Level control*
•
The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant
height irrespective of the car's load (up to the
maximum permissible weight). When the car is
stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
Driving with a trailer* - automatic gearbox
(p. 310)
•
•
Towing bracket/Towbar* (p. 310)
Lamp replacement - general (p. 356)
Driving with a trailer* - manual
gearbox
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
•
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see Towing capacity and towball load
(p. 401).
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights
are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle
regulations can further limit trailer weights
and speeds. Towbars can be certified for
higher towing weights than the car can
actually tow.
Do not run the engine at higher revolutions
than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) otherwise the oil temperature may become
too high.
Diesel engine 5-cyl
•
In the event of a risk of overheating the optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000 rpm
for optimal circulation of the coolant.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer* (p. 308)
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer
weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be
difficult to control in the event of sudden
movement and braking.
* Option/accessory. 309
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving with a trailer* - automatic
gearbox
Starting on a hill
1.
Depress the foot brake.
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot
climate there may be a risk of overheating.
2.
Move the gear selector to driving position D.
3.
Release the parking brake.
4.
Release the foot brake and start driving off.
•
An automatic gearbox selects the optimum
gear related to load and engine speed.
•
In the event of overheating a warning symbol
is illuminated in the combined instrument
panel with a message that is shown in the
information display - follow the recommendation given.
Related information
•
Automatic gearbox - Geartronic* (p. 278)
Towing bracket/Towbar*
A towing bracket means that it is possible to e.g.
tow a trailer behind the car.
If the car is equipped with a detachable/removable towbar, the installation instructions for the
loose section must be followed carefully, see
Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal
(p. 312).
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
Steep inclines
•
Do not lock the automatic transmission in a
higher gear than the engine "can cope with"
- it is not always a good idea to drive at a
high gear with low engine revolutions.
Parking on a hill
1.
Depress the foot brake.
2.
Activate the parking brake.
3.
Move the gear selector to position P.
4.
Release the foot brake.
•
Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a hitched
trailer. Always use the parking brake.
•
310
Block the wheels with chocks when parking
a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
•
Follow the installation instructions carefully.
•
The detachable section must be locked
with the key before setting off.
•
Check that the indicator window shows
green.
Important checks
•
The towbar's towball must be cleaned and
greased regularly.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
the towball must not be lubricated.
This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack
that is clamped in around the towball.
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving with a trailer* (p. 308)
Detachable towbar* - storage
Detachable towbar* - specifications
Store the detachable towbar in the cargo area.
Specifications for detachable towbar.
Specifications
Towbar storage space.
G021485
•
G031713
Related information
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and store
it in the appointed location in the car, firmly
fastened with its strap.
Related information
•
•
•
Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 311)
Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal
(p. 312)
Driving with a trailer* (p. 308)
}}
* Option/accessory. 311
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
•
Driving with a trailer* (p. 308)
Detachable towbar* - attachment/
removal
The attachment/removal of the detachable towbar is performed in the following way:
Attaching
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
A
1036
B
111
C
855
D
428
E
109
F
326
G
Side member
H
Ball centre
Remove the protective cover by first turning
. Then slide the
the screws a quarter turn
cover diagonally downward and forward in
order to release and finally pull it backwards
to remove it
.
Related information
312
•
Detachable towbar* - attachment/removal
(p. 312)
•
Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 311)
* Option/accessory.
Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
G000000
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked position.
Remove the key from the lock.
G021488
G021490
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key clockwise.
G021489
G021487
STARTING AND DRIVING
The indicator window must show green.
The indicator window must show red.
}}
313
STARTING AND DRIVING
Check that the towbar is secure by pulling it
up, down and back.
WARNING
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it must
be detached and reattached in accordance
with the previous instructions.
IMPORTANT
G021495
G021494
||
Safety cable.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable
in the intended bracket.
Removing the towbar
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towbar should be clean
and dry.
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while
pulling the towbar rearward and upward.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
the towball must not be lubricated.
WARNING
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
314
Push in the locking wheel
and turn it
anticlockwise
until you hear a click.
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the
car, see Detachable towbar* - storage
(p. 311).
* Option/accessory.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA18
The trailer stability assist TSA (Trailer Stability
Assist) function is designed to stabilise the car
and trailer combination if it begins to snake.
TSA- the function is included in the stability system (p. 191) ESC19.
Function
Refit the protective cover by wedging the
cover's hooks into the bumper's rear edge.
Push the cover upward until the bolts are in
. Finally, turn the bolts
the correct position
a quarter turn
so that the cover is
attached. It is important that the handle of
the bolts is set transversely during assembly.
Related information
•
•
•
Detachable towbar* - storage (p. 311)
Detachable towbar* - specifications (p. 311)
Driving with a trailer* (p. 308)
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs
at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring
at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
•
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
•
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole.
•
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Operation
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even
impossible to suppress. This makes the car/
trailer combination difficult to control and there is
a risk that you could, for example, end up in the
wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
18
19
Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.
(Electronic Stability Control) - Electronic stability control.
The trailer stability assist function continually
monitors car movements, particularly lateral
movements. If snaking is detected, the front
wheels are individually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is often
enough to help the driver regain control of the
car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the TSA
system comes into action, the car/trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine
power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combination is
stable once again, the system stops regulating
and the driver once again has full control of the
car. For more information, see Electronic stability
control (ESC) - operation (p. 192).
Miscellaneous
Engagement of TSA may take place at higher
speeds.
NOTE
TSA function is switched off if the driver
selects Sport mode, see Electronic stability
control (ESC) - general (p. 191).
TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses sudden
steering wheel movements to try to rectify the
snaking because, in such a situation, the system
}}
* Option/accessory. 315
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the
driver that is causing the snaking.
The ESC19 symbol in the combined
instrument panel flashes when the TSA
system is working.
Related information
•
Electronic stability control (ESC) - general
(p. 191)
Towing
WARNING
During towing, one vehicle is towed by another
vehicle using a tow rope.
•
Check that the steering lock is unlocked
before towing.
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
towing before the towing begins.
•
The remote control key must be in key
position II - in position I all airbags are
deactivated.
•
Never remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch when the car is
being towed.
1.
Activate the car's hazard warning flashers.
2.
Attach the tow rope in the towing eye.
3.
Unlock the steering lock by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch and
giving a long press on the START/STOP
ENGINE button - key position II is activated,
see Key positions (p. 83) for more information about key positions.
4.
The remote control key must remain in the
ignition switch while the car is being towed.
5.
Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal - thereby
avoiding unnecessary jerking.
6.
Be prepared to brake to stop.
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off - the
brake pedal needs to be depressed
about 5 times more heavily and the steering is
considerably heavier than normal.
Manual gearbox
Prior to towing:
–
Move gear lever into neutral and release the
parking brake.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic
Prior to towing:
–
19
316
(Electronic Stability Control) - Electronic stability control.
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the parking brake.
STARTING AND DRIVING
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
•
Do not tow cars with automatic transmission at speeds higher than 80 km/h
(50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80
km.
Towing eye
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded
socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of
the bumper, front or rear.
•
Open the variant with a recess using a
coin or similar inserted in the recess, turning it outwards. Then turn out the cover
completely and remove it.
•
The second variant has a marking along
one side or in a corner: Press the marking
with a finger and fold out the opposite
side/corner at the same time using a coin
or similar - the cover turns around its axis
and can then be removed.
Attaching the towing eye
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to bump start the engine. Use
a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged
and the engine does not start, see Jump starting
with another battery (p. 275).
Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange.
Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the
wheel wrench.
IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow-start the engine.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and return
it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.
Related information
•
•
•
The cover for the towing eye's attachment
point is available in two variants which must
be opened in different ways:
Hazard warning flashers (p. 100)
Towing eye (p. 317)
Recovery (p. 318)
Take out the towing eye that is located under
the floor hatch in the cargo area - in some
cases it may be hidden under the sill.
The towing eye may be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible. If the slope of the
recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the
ground clearance under the car is inadequate,
then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it
up using the towing eye. Raise the car using the
recovery vehicle's lifting device if necessary.
}}
317
STARTING AND DRIVING
||
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
assistance.
Related information
•
•
Towing (p. 316)
Recovery (p. 318)
Recovery
Recovery means that the vehicle is transported
away by means of another vehicle.
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The towing eye may be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible. If the slope of the
recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the
ground clearance under the car is inadequate,
then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it
up using the towing eye. Raise the car using the
recovery vehicle's lifting device if necessary.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transported
with the wheels rolling forward.
318
Related information
•
Towing (p. 316)
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres - maintenance
New tyres
Wear and maintenance
Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is
to carry load, provide grip on the road surface,
dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
wear.
Correct tyre pressure (p. 322) results in more
even wear. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate
and road condition affect how quickly your tyres
age and wear.
Driving characteristics
To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns arising, the front and rear
wheels can be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx.
5000 km and then at 10000 km intervals.
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure
and speed rating are important for how the car
performs.
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are
hardly ever or never used. The function can
therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that
are stored for future use. Examples of external
signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for
use are cracks or discoloration.
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin
to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For
this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible
when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of
manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), and this is stated
with four digits, for example 1510. The tyre in the
figure was manufactured in week 15 of 2010.
Summer and winter wheels
When summer and winter wheels are changed
the wheels should be marked with which side of
the car they were mounted on, for example L for
left and R for right.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted for checking if you are
uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth)
between tyres have already occurred, then the
least worn tyres must always be fitted on the rear.
Understeer is normally easier to correct than
oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than having the
rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This is
why it is important for the rear wheels never to
lose grip before the front wheels.
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
Storage
Wheels with tyres fitted must be stored lying
down or hanging up - never standing up.
320
WHEELS AND TYRES
Related information
Tyres - dimensions (p. 324)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 325)
Tyres - load index (p. 325)
Tyres - direction of rotation
NOTE
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to
only turn in one direction have the direction of
rotation marked with an arrow.
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the
same type and dimension, and also the same
make.
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 321)
Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified in the tyre pressure table (p. 415).
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 322)
Related information
G021778
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 324)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 325)
Tyres - load index (p. 325)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 320)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 322)
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
The tyre must always rotate in the same direction
throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be
switched between front and rear positions, never
between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If
the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking
characteristics and capacity to force rain and
slush out of the way are adversely affected. Tyres
with the greatest tread depth should always be
fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk
of skidding).
321
WHEELS AND TYRES
•
Tyres - tread wear indicators
Tread wear indicators show the status of the
tyre's tread depth.
Tyres - maintenance (p. 320)
Tyres - air pressure
Tyres can have different air pressures which are
measured in bar.
Check the air pressure in the tyres
The tyre pressures must be checked every
month.
G021829
This also applies to the car's spare wheel.
Tread wear indicators.
A tread wear indicators is a narrow elevation
across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread
pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters
TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread
depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread will be level in
height with the tread wear indicators. Change to
new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that
tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip
in rain and snow.
Related information
•
•
•
•
322
Tyres - dimensions (p. 324)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 325)
Tyres - load index (p. 325)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 321)
WHEELS AND TYRES
•
Tyre pressure for the car's recommended
tyre dimension.
•
•
ECO pressure1.
Tyre pressure label
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
Spare tyre pressure (Temporary Spare).
Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel consumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs the
car's driving characteristics. Driving on tyres with
tyre pressure that is too low could result in the
tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and
driving characteristics.
NOTE
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a
natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.
Tyres - load index (p. 325)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 320)
Tyres - tread wear indicators (p. 322)
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 415)
G021830
Check the tyre pressure on cold tyres. "Cold
tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature
as the ambient temperature. After several few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
Tyres - dimensions (p. 324)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 325)
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which
pressures the tyres should have at different loads
and speed conditions. This is also specified in the
tyre pressure table, see Tyres - approved tyre
pressures (p. 415).
Fuel economy, ECO pressure
When carrying a light load (max. 3 people) and at
speeds of up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO
pressure can be selected to give the best possible fuel economy. If the best possible noise and
travelling comfort conditions are sought, the
lower comfort pressures are recommended
instead.
(See approved tyre pressures(p. 415).)
1
ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.
323
WHEELS AND TYRES
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions
Tyres - dimensions
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
accordance with the examples in the table
below.
The car's tyres have a certain dimension, see the
examples in the table below.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle.
This means that certain combinations of wheel
(wheel rim) and tyre are approved.
Dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Example
of designation: 235/60 R18 103 V.
235
Tyre width (mm)
60
Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre
width (%)
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimensions,
for example: 7Jx16x50.
Rim width in inches
R
Radial ply
J
Rim flange profile
18
Rim diameter in inches
16
Rim diameter in inches
103
50
Off-set in mm (distance from wheel centre to wheel contact surface against the
hub)
Codes for the maximum permitted tyre
load, tyre load index (LI)
V
Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
240 km/h (149 mph).)
7
Related information
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 324)
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 415)
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
with certain combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
324
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 325)
Tyres - load index (p. 325)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 321)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 320)
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 415)
•
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 324)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres - load index
Tyres - speed ratings
W
270 km/h (168 mph)
Load index indicates a tyre's ability to carry a
certain load.
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed and therefore belongs to a particular
speed rating (SS - Speed Symbol).
Y
300 km/h (186 mph)
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a
load index (LI). The car's weight determines the
load capacity required of the tyres. Lowest permissible index is specified in the tyre load index
table, see section "Specifications" in the printed
owner's manual.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 324)
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 415)
Tyres - speed ratings (p. 325)
Tyres - maintenance (p. 320)
Tyre speed class must at least correspond with
the car's top speed. The table below indicates the
maximum permitted speed that applies for each
speed rating (SS). The only exception to these
regulations is the winter tyre (p. 326)2, where a
lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is
chosen, the car must not be driven faster than
the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q
can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h
(100 mph)). Traffic regulations determine how
fast a car can be driven, not the speed rating of
the tyres.
WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which have
the same or a higher load index (p. 325) (LI)
and speed rating (SS) than specified. If a tyre
with too low a load index or speed rating is
used, it may overheat.
Related information
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 324)
Tyres - load index (p. 325)
Tyres - direction of rotation (p. 321)
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified in
the table.
2
Q
160 km/h (100 mph) (only used on winter tyres)
T
190 km/h (118 mph)
H
210 km/h (130 mph)
V
240 km/h (149 mph)
Both those with metal studs and those without.
325
WHEELS AND TYRES
Wheel bolts
Winter tyres
Wheel bolts are used to fasten the wheels at the
hubs and are available in different versions.
Winter tyres are tyres that are adapted for winter
road conditions.
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140
Nm. Overtightening or loose tightening may
damage the nuts and the bolts.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.
Check the torque with a torque wrench.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel
bolts.
Locking wheel bolts*
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both aluminium and steel rims. Under the cargo area floor
there is space for the sleeve for the lockable
wheel bolts.
Related information
•
Wheel and wheel rim dimensions (p. 324)
Winter tyres
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on
engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the
correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four
wheels.
mends not to drive on winter tyres that have a
tread depth of less than 4 mm.
Using snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h (31 mph) with
snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
NOTE
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent
chains designed for the car model, and tyre
and rim dimensions. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an
authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow
chains may cause serious damage to your car
and lead to an accident.
Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo
dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types
are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into
the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
IMPORTANT
Only single-sided snow chains are permitted.
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or similar that
are properly suited to the car model, tyre size
and wheel rim size. In the event of uncertainty
Volvo recommends that you consult an
authorised Volvo workshop.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands on tyres
than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom-
326
Related information
•
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 327)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Changing wheels - removing wheels
The car's wheels can be changed for e.g. winter
wheels/winter tyres.
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for use temporarily and must be
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as possible. The car's handling may be altered by the use
of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller
than the normal wheel. The car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to
high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If
the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you
cannot use snow chains at the same time. On allwheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be
disconnected. The spare wheel must not be
repaired.
The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is
stated in the tyre pressure table (p. 415).
Taking out the spare wheel under the
cargo area floor
1.
Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear
and forwards.
2.
Undo the retaining screw.
3.
Lift out the foam block with its tools.
4.
Lift out the spare wheel.
Removing
Set up warning triangle (p. 330) if a wheel is
replaced in trafficked location. The car and jack*
must be on a firm horizontal surface.
1.
Apply the parking brake, (p. 295) and
engage reverse gear, or position P if the car
has an automatic gearbox.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is
free from dirt.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack* that
belongs to the car model in question, which is
indicated on the jack's label.
The label also indicates the jack's maximum
lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting
height.
2.
Take out jack*, wheel wrench*, removal tool
for wheel covers* and plastic wheel bolt cap
removal tool. They will be found in the foam
block. If another jack is selected, see Raising
the car (p. 345).
IMPORTANT
•
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) with a spare wheel on the car.
•
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
well with the outside down. The same bolt runs
through to secure the spare wheel and the foam
block. The foam block contains all the tools needed to change the wheels.
}}
* Option/accessory. 327
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
4.
Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench* to the stop position.
WARNING
Never position anything between the ground
and the jack, nor between the jack and the
car's jacking point.
7.
There are two jacking points on each side of
the car. Wind up the jack* so that the flange
in the bodywork ends up in the notch in the
head of the jack.
Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
3.
328
Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground to
prevent them from rolling. Use heavy wooden
blocks or large stones for example.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed all the way
into the wheel bolt wrench.
5.
Remove the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts with the intended tool.
6.
Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlockwise with the wheel wrench*.
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level.
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
8.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on
the jack.
It is important that the procedure for fitting the
wheel is carried out correctly.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must stand in a safe place.
Installation
NOTE
The normal car jack is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture, changing to winter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the
specific car model may be used to raise the
car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or
for a longer time than is required just to
change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the equipment.
Check that the jack sits in the anchorage as
illustrated and that the foot is positioned vertically under the anchorage.
IMPORTANT
The jacking point is the rearmost of the two
rear recesses.
9.
Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove
the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.
Changing wheels - fitting
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on
the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must stand in a safe place.
1.
Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
and hub.
2.
Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
wheel bolts.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Changing wheels - fitting (p. 329)
Jack* (p. 331)
Warning triangle (p. 330)
Wheel bolts (p. 326)
}}
* Option/accessory. 329
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
3.
Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
When changing to another tyre
dimension
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updating the software at each change of tyre dimension. A software download may be necessary
both when changing to larger and smaller dimensions, and also when switching between summer
and winter wheels.
Warning triangle
The warning triangle is used to warn other road
users of a stationary vehicle.
Storage and folding up
Related information
•
•
•
•
4.
Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tightened
properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check the torque with a torque wrench.
5.
Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 327)
Jack* (p. 331)
Warning triangle (p. 330)
Wheel bolts (p. 326)
NOTE
330
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tools
Jack*
Amongst other things, the car contains towing
eye, jack* and wheel wrench*.
Use the jack to raise the car when changing a
wheel.
The original jack should only be used for changing to the spare wheel. The jack's thread must
always be well greased.
NOTE
Lift the floor hatch and take out the warning
triangle.
Take the warning triangle from the case, fold
out and assemble the two loose sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
Located under the cargo area floor are the car's
towing eye, jack* and wheel wrench*. There is
also space here for the sleeve for the locking
wheel bolts and tools for the plastic wheel bolt
caps.
The normal car jack is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture, changing to winter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the
specific car model may be used to raise the
car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or
for a longer time than is required just to
change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the equipment.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 335)
Towing eye (p. 317)
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 327)
Wheel bolts (p. 326)
Jack* (p. 331)
}}
* Option/accessory. 331
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
Tools - returning into place
First aid kit*
Tyre pressure monitoring*3
The first aid box contains first aid equipment.
The tyre pressure monitoring system warns with
an indicator symbol in the combined instrument
panel when the pressure is too low in one or
more of the car's tyres.
For certain markets the tyre pressure monitoring
is standard in accordance with legal requirements. The system does not replace normal tyre
maintenance.
Indicator symbol for tyre pressure monitoring.
The tools and jack* must be returned to their correct places after use. The jack needs to be
cranked together to the correct position in order
to have space.
Related information
A case with first aid equipment is located under
the floor in the cargo area.
•
Tyre monitoring (TM)* (p. 333)
The foam block and spare wheel are replaced in
the reverse order to taking out. Note that there is
an arrow on the upper foam block. It must point
forwards in the car.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
Related information
•
•
332
Warning triangle (p. 330)
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 335)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyre monitoring (TM)*4
The TM (Tyre Monitor) system senses tyre rotation speed in order to determine whether the
tyres have the correct tyre pressure.
System description
If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyre's diameter
is changed and, as a result, so is its rotation
speed. By comparing the tyres with each other
the system can determine whether one or more
tyres have pressure that is too low.
The system does not replace normal tyre maintenance.
IMPORTANT
If a fault occurs in the TM system the indicator symbol
in the combined instrument
panel will flash for approx. 1 minute and then
illuminate with a constant glow. A message is
also shown in the combined instrument panel.
Deleting the messages
1. Check the tyre pressure in all tyres with a
tyre pressure gauge.
2.
Inflate the tyre/tyres to the correct pressure
in accordance with the tyre pressure label on
the driver's side door pillar (between front
and rear doors).
3.
Recalibrate the TM system in MY CAR.
Messages
If the tyre pressure is too low then an indicator
symbol ( ) illuminates in the combined instrument panel and one of the following messages is
shown:
• Tyre pressure low Check, adjust and
calibrate
• Tyre pressure system Service required
• Tyre pressure system Currently
unavailable
3
4
Standard in certain markets.
Standard in certain markets.
NOTE
WARNING
•
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
•
The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
damage in advance.
TM calibration
In order for TM system to work correctly, a reference value for the tyre pressure must be determined. This must be done each time the tyres are
changed or the tyre pressure is adjusted by recalibrating the system in MY CAR.
For example, the tyre pressure should be
adjusted when driving with a heavy load or for
high-speed driving (above 160 km/h (100 mph)).
Following which, the system must be recalibrated.
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure
should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres"
means the tyres are the same temperature as
the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours
after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
}}
* Option/accessory. 333
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
Recalibration
Settings are made using the centre console's
controls, see MY CAR (p. 118).
1.
Stop the engine.
2.
Inflate all tyres to the desired pressure in
accordance with the tyre pressure label on
the driver's side door pillar (between front
and rear doors).
Or see the tyre pressure table.
3.
Start the engine and let the car stand still.
4.
Open the menu system MY CAR and select
the menu Tyre monitor.
5.
Select Start calibration and press OK.
6.
Press OK after all tyres have been checked
and adjusted in order to start calibration.
7.
Drive the car.
> Recalibration is carried out automatically
while the car is being driven and can be
interrupted at any time. If the engine is
switched off while recalibration is in progress then it is resumed when the car is
driven again. The system provides no confirmation when the calibration is complete.
The new reference value applies until steps 1-7
are repeated.
334
NOTE
Remember that the TM system must be recalibrated at each tyre change or if the tyre
pressure is adjusted. If new reference values
are not stored then the system cannot function properly.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
•
All-green: the system is operating normally
and the tyre pressure in all tyres is slightly
above the recommended level.
•
Yellow wheel: corresponding tyre's pressure
is too low.
•
All wheels yellow: two or more tyres have
pressure that is too low.
•
All wheels grey and the message Tyre
pressure system Currently unavailable:
the tyre pressure system is temporarily deactivated. It may be necessary to drive the car
for a short time above 30 km/h (20 mph)
before the system becomes active again.
•
All wheels grey and the message Tyre
pressure system Service required: an
error has occurred in the system. Contact a
Volvo dealer or workshop.
System and tyre status
The current status of the system and the tyres
can be checked in the centre console's screen.
1.
Open the menu system MY CAR.
2.
Select the Tyre monitor menu.
> Status for tyre pressures is shown with a
colour code.
The status is colour-coded for each tyre in
accordance with the following:
Related information
•
Tyres - air pressure (p. 322)
WHEELS AND TYRES
Emergency puncture repair*
The emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary
Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal a puncture
and check and adjust the tyre pressure
(p. 415).
The emergency puncture repair kit (p. 336) consists of a compressor and a bottle of sealant. The
sealing works as a temporary repair. The sealing
fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.
Related information
Emergency puncture repair kit* location
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - location
(p. 335)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 336)
The emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary
Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal a puncture
and check and adjust the tyre pressure.
•
Emergency puncture repair* - operation
(p. 337)
•
Tools (p. 331)
Location of the emergency puncture
repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the
wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger slits, cracks or
similar damage.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
The emergency puncture repair kit is located
under the floor in the cargo area.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 336)
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 335)
* Option/accessory. 335
WHEELS AND TYRES
Emergency puncture repair kit* overview
Overview of the component parts of the emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit
(TMK).
The parts are stored under the floor in the cargo
area.
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
Sealing fluid bottle
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair kit* - location
(p. 335)
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 335)
Replace the bottle with sealing fluid before the
expiration date has passed and after use. Treat
the old bottle as environmentally hazardous
waste.
WARNING
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural
rubber-latex.
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
WARNING
Label, maximum permitted speed
•
In the event of skin contact with the sealing fluid, it must be washed off immediately with soap and plenty of water.
•
Sealing fluid that makes contact with an
eye must be rinsed away immediately with
eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If
the discomfort persists then the eye
should be examined by a doctor.
Switch
Electrical cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
336
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Emergency puncture repair* operation
1.
Sealing a puncture with the emergency puncture
repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).
Set up the warning triangle and activate the
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed
in a trafficked location.
5.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or similar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to
seal the hole.
Emergency puncture repair
2.
Detach the label for maximum permitted
speed (which is fitted on one side of the
compressor) and affix it to the steering
wheel. You should not drive faster than
80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre
repair kit has been used.
3.
Check that the switch is in position 0, and
take out the electrical cable and the air hose.
4.
Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the
compressor, and unscrew the cork from the
bottle.
WARNING
•
In the event of skin contact with the sealing fluid, it must be washed off immediately
with soap and plenty of water.
•
Sealing fluid that makes contact with an
eye must be rinsed away immediately with
eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If the
discomfort persists then the eye should be
examined by a doctor.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The
seal is broken automatically when the bottle is
screwed in.
For information on the function of the parts, see Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview (p. 336).
Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bottle holder.
> The bottle and the bottle holder are
equipped with a reverse catch to prevent
sealant leakage. When the bottle is
screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from
the bottle holder again. Bottle removal
must be performed at a workshop, Volvo
recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
6.
Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed on, and screw in
the air hose's valve connection to the bottom
of the thread on the tyre's air valve.
}}
* Option/accessory. 337
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
7.
Plug the electrical cable into the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
NOTE
Make sure that none of the other 12 V sockets is in use when the compressor is operating.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
8.
Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be switched
off immediately. The journey should not be
continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
338
9.
Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km at a
maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
The compressor must not be operated for
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
NOTE
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during
the first few rotations of the tyre.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum 3.5 bar.
(Release air with the pressure reducing valve
if the tyre pressure is too high.)
WARNING
Make sure that nobody is standing near the
car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto
them when the car is driven away. The distance should be at least two metres.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole
in the tyre is too big. The journey should not
be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre
centre is recommended.
15. Follow-up inspection:
Connect the air hose on the tyre's air valve
again and check the tyre pressure with the
pressure gauge, see Emergency puncture
repair* - rechecking (p. 339).
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
electrical cable.
12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre's air valve
and refit the dust cap on the tyre.
13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
fluid.
Related information
•
•
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 335)
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
(p. 339)
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 336)
* Option/accessory.
WHEELS AND TYRES
Emergency puncture repair* rechecking
3.
1. Plug the electrical cable into the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
When a tyre has been sealed with the emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit
(TMK), a subsequent check must be made after
approx. 3 kilometres of driving.
2. Start the compressor and inflate the tyre
to the pressure specified in accordance
with the tyre pressure table.
Check tyre pressure
Take out the tyre sealing equipment. The compressor must be switched off.
1.
2.
Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
•
•
•
5
3. Switch off the compressor.
4.
Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.
Take out the air hose and screw in the
valve connection to the bottom of the thread
on the tyre's air valve.
If the tyre pressure is below 1.3 bar5 then
the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Contact a
tyre centre.
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar5,
the tyre must be inflated to the pressure
specified in accordance with the tyre
pressure table, see Tyres - approved tyre
pressures (p. 415).
If the tyre needs to be inflated:
Remove the tyre sealing equipment, fit the
protective cap on the air hose and fold the
hose in the box.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5.
Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise
the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit
has been used. Volvo recommends a visit to
an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection
of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance
is 200 km). The staff there can determine
whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it
needs to be replaced.
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
1 bar = 100 kPa.
}}
* Option/accessory. 339
WHEELS AND TYRES
||
Related information
•
•
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 335)
Emergency puncture repair* - operation
(p. 337)
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 336)
Emergency puncture repair kit* inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated using the
compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit
(p. 336).
5.
Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the
air hose's valve connection to the bottom of
the thread on the tyre's air valve.
Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in
accordance with the tyre pressure table, see
Tyres - approved tyre pressures (p. 415).
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
6.
Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and the electrical cable.
Plug the electrical cable into the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
7.
Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
1.
The compressor must be switched off. Make
sure that the switch is in position 0 and take
out the electrical cable and air hose.
2.
3.
IMPORTANT
The compressor must not be operated for
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running
in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient
ventilation.
Related information
•
•
•
Emergency puncture repair* (p. 335)
Emergency puncture repair kit* - overview
(p. 336)
Emergency puncture repair* - rechecking
(p. 339)
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
4.
340
Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I.
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
Book service and repair*1
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service programme as specified
in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Manage service, repair and booking information
directly in your Internet-connected car.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo
workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel,
special tools and service literature to guarantee
the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Related information
•
1
2
342
Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair (p. 355)
This service1 provides a convenient way to book a
service and workshop visit directly in the car. Car
information is sent to your dealer, who can prepare the workshop visit. The dealer will contact
you to schedule an appointment time. For certain
markets, the system reminds you of a scheduled
appointment time as it approaches and the navigation system2 can also guide you to the workshop when the time comes.
4.
Prerequisite for booking from car
• To send and receive booking information
from and to the car, the car must be connected to the Internet, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement for information about
how to connect the car to the Internet.
•
Since the booking information is sent over
your private phone subscription, you will be
asked whether you want to send the information. The question is asked once and then
applies to the selected connection for a limited time.
•
For the service to work and for the system to
communicate via the car's screen, notifications/pop-up messages must be accepted.
In the normal view for the MY CAR source,
press OK/MENU and then Service & repair
Display notifications.
Before the service can be used
Volvo ID and my profile
• Register a Volvo ID. For more information
and how to create a Volvo ID, see Volvo ID
(p. 21).
•
Log in to the owner portal My Volvo, go to
your profile and carry out the following:
1.
Check that the car is connected to your profile.
Choose preferred communication channel
(phone). Booking information is always sent
to the car and to you via email.
Using the service
2.
Check that your contact information is correct.
All menus and settings are accessed from the
normal view in MY CAR by pressing OK/MENU
and then Service & repair.
3.
Select the Volvo dealer you want to contact
for service and repair.
When it is time for service, and in some cases
when the car is in need of repair, this is notified
Applies to certain markets.
Applies to Sensus Navigation.
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
in the combined instrument panel (p. 68) and via
a pop-up menu in the screen.
• Postpone - The pop-up menu is shown the
next time the car is started.
Book a service or repair manually1
1. Press the MY CAR button in the centre console and select Service & repair Dealer
information Request service or repair.
> Vehicle data is sent automatically to your
dealer.
Service message in the screen.
Meaning of the answer options in the screen's
pop-up menu:
• Yes - A booking enquiry is sent to your
dealer who then comes back with a booking
proposal. The service lamp and service message in the combined instrument panel are
extinguished.
• No - No more pop-up messages will be
shown in the screen. The message in the
combined instrument panel remains. After
this option has been selected, it is possible
to start the manual booking in the car, see
below.
1 Applies to certain markets.
2 Applies to Sensus Navigation.
3 Vehicle Identification Number
2.
The dealer sends a booking proposal to the
car.
3.
Accept or request a new booking proposal.
After the booking has been accepted the booking information is stored in the car, see My bookings. The car will automatically communicate with
you via the screen by means of reminders about
the booking and guide you to the workshop visit.
You can also book a workshop visit via My Volvo.
Go to "My bookings" and select "Update" in
order to gain access to bookings from My Volvo.
My bookings1
Show booking information in the car's screen.
Accept or request a new booking proposal.
–
Select Service & repair
My bookings.
Call the dealer1
With a Bluetooth® phone connected to the car,
you can call your dealer. For connecting the
phone, see the Sensus Infotainment supplement.
–
Select Service & repair Dealer
information Call dealer.
Using the navigation system1, 2
Enter your workshop as destination or waypoint
in the navigation system.
–
Select Service & repair Dealer
information Set single destination.
–
Select Service & repair Dealer
information Add as waypoint.
Sending vehicle data1
Vehicle data are sent to a central Volvo database
(not your dealer) from which Volvo dealers can
retrieve vehicle information using the car's identification number (VIN3). The number is printed in
the car's service and warranty booklet, alternatively inside the windscreen's bottom left-hand
corner.
–
Select Service & repair
Send car data.
}}
343
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Booking information and vehicle data
When you decide to book a service from your car,
the booking information and vehicle data will be
sent. Vehicle data information consists of information within the following areas:
•
•
•
•
•
•
service requirement
function status
fluid levels
Meter reading
the car's vehicle identification number (VIN3)
The car's software version.
Related information
•
3
344
Volvo ID (p. 21)
Vehicle Identification Number
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Raising the car
When raising the car it is important that the jack
or lifting arms are fitted in the intended points on
the car's underbody.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a jack
is selected other than the one recommended
by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with
the equipment.
}}
345
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Jacking points (arrows) for the jack that belongs to the car and lifting points (marked in red).
If the car is raised with a front workshop jack
then this must be positioned under one of the
four lifting points furthest in under the car. If the
car is raised with a rear workshop jack then it
must be positioned under one of the lifting
points. Ensure that the workshop jack is positioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack.
Always use axle stands or similar.
If the car is raised with a two-pillar workshop lift
then the front and rear lifting arms can be positioned under the outer lifting points (jacking
points). Alternatively, the inner lifting points can
be used at the front.
Related information
•
346
Changing wheels - removing wheels (p. 327)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Bonnet - opening and closing
Move the catch to the left and open the bonnet. (The catch hook is located between the
headlamp and radiator grille, see illustration.)
The bonnet can be opened when the handle by
the pedals has been pulled backward and the
lock by the radiator grille has been moved to the
left.
WARNING
Engine compartment - overview
The overview shows some service-related components.
Engine compartment 4-cyl.
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
Related information
•
•
Engine compartment - checking (p. 349)
Engine compartment - overview (p. 347)
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ
depending on model and engine variant.
Engine oil filler pipe
G031911
Coolant expansion tank
Power steering fluid reservoir
Radiator
Pull the handle by the pedals. An information
symbol illuminates in the combined instrument panel's display when the bonnet is
open, see Combined instrument panel meaning of indicator symbols (p. 73).
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located
on the driver's side)
Starter battery
Relay and fuse box
}}
347
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Washer fluid filler pipe
Engine compartment 5-cyl. diesel
WARNING
The car's electrical system must always be in
key position 0 when work is being performed
in the engine compartment; see Key positions
- functions at different levels (p. 83).
Air filter
WARNING
The ignition system has very high voltage and
output. The voltage in the ignition system is
highly dangerous. The car's electrical system
must always be in key position 0 when work is
being performed in the engine compartment;
see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 83).
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil
when the car's electrical system is in key
position II or when the engine is hot.
Related information
•
•
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ
depending on model and engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Power steering fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler pipe
Reservoir for brake and clutch fluid (located
on the driver's side)
Starter battery
Relay and fuse box
Washer fluid filler pipe
348
Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 347)
Engine compartment - checking (p. 349)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Engine compartment - checking
Engine oil - general
Some oils and fluids should be checked at regular intervals.
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can be
applied.
Regular checking
Coolant
Engine oil
Power steering fluid
Washer fluid
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment, behind
the radiator) may start automatically some
after the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine
is hot.
Related information
•
•
•
•
•
•
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
•
•
•
•
When driving under adverse conditions, see
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions (p. 404).
Volvo recommends:
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise you
will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty
liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade
and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 347)
Engine compartment - overview (p. 347)
Coolant - level (p. 353)
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 350)
Power steering fluid - level (p. 354)
Washer fluid - filling (p. 366)
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/
high oil level or low oil pressure. Certain engine
variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the
combined instrument panel's warning symbol for
low oil pressure is used
. Other variants
have an oil level sensor, when the driver is
}}
349
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
informed via the instrument's warning symbol
and display texts. Certain variants have
both systems. Contact a Volvo dealer for more
information.
Engine oil - checking and filling
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance
with the intervals specified in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
4-cyl.
The oil level is detected with the electronic oil
level sensor.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions,
Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade
than the one specified, see Engine oil - adverse
driving conditions (p. 404).
Message and graphic in the display. The left-hand display is shown in the digital combined instrument panel
and the right-hand in the analogue.
For filling capacities, see Engine oil - grade and
volume (p. 405).
Message
Related information
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 350)
Engine oil level
Filler pipe4.
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up
between service intervals.
No action needs to be taken on engine oil level
until a message is shown in the combined instrument panel's display, see the following illustration.
4
350
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see Menu navigation combined instrument panel (p. 115).
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. The oil level may
be too high.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
IMPORTANT
If notified of low oil level, only fill with the volume specified, for example, 0.5 litres.
NOTE
The system cannot directly detect changes
when the oil is filled or drained. The car must
have been driven approx. 30 km and have
been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine
switched off and on level ground before the
oil level indication is correct.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
2.
Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position Oil level.
> You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
5-cyl. diesel
For more information on menu navigation,
see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 115).
NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil
level (time after engine shutdown, the car's
inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not
met, the message Not available will be
shown. This does not mean that there is
something wrong in the car's systems.
Filler pipe5.
No action needs to be taken on engine oil level
until a message is shown in the combined instrument panel's display, see the following illustration.
Measuring the oil level, 4-cyl.
If the oil level needs to be checked then it should
be carried out in accordance with the following
sequence.
1.
5
Activate key position II; see Key positions functions at different levels (p. 83).
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
}}
351
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
IMPORTANT
2.
In the event of the message Oil level low
Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres.
NOTE
The oil level is only detected by the system
during driving. The system cannot directly
detect changes when the oil is filled or
drained. The car must be driven about 30 km
before the oil level display is correct.
Message and graphic in the display. The left-hand display is shown in the digital combined instrument panel
and the right-hand in the analogue.
Message
Engine oil level
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see Menu navigation combined instrument panel (p. 115).
WARNING
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. The oil level may
be too high.
For more information on menu navigation,
see Menu navigation - combined instrument panel (p. 115).
WARNING
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)
appears as shown in the illustration below.
The level must never be above MAX or below
MIN, as this could lead to engine damage.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
Measuring the oil level, 5-cyl. diesel
If the oil level needs to be checked then it should
be carried out in accordance with the following
sequence.
1.
352
Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position Oil level.
> Information is then displayed on the
engine's oil level; see the following illustration, which shows the message and
graphic in the display. The left-hand display is shown in the digital combined
instrument panel and the right-hand in the
analogue.
Activate key position II; see Key positions functions at different levels (p. 83).
The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill more oil
if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recommended filling
level is 4.
Related information
•
Engine oil - general (p. 349)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Coolant - level
The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature. The
heat that is transferred from the engine to the
coolant can be used to heat the passenger compartment.
Checking the level
The coolant level must lie between the MIN and
MAX marks on the expansion tank. If the cooling
system is not filled sufficiently, excessively high
temperatures could occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine.
NOTE
Check the coolant level regularly when the
engine is cold.
Filling
When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. Never top up with water
only. The risk of freezing increases with both too
little and too much coolant concentrate.
If there is coolant under the car, if there is coolant smoke, or if more than 2 litres have been
filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of
engine damage when starting due to a defective
cooling system.
IMPORTANT
•
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and
other salts may cause corrosion in the
cooling system.
•
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
•
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
•
Mix the coolant with approved quality tap
water. In the event of any doubt about
water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in
accordance with Volvo recommendations.
•
When changing coolant/replacing cooling system components, flush the cooling
system clean with approved quality tap
water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.
•
The engine must only be run with a wellfilled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the
cylinder head.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
For capacities and for standards regarding water
quality; see Coolant - grade and volume (p. 407).
353
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Brake and clutch fluid - level
Filling
Brake and clutch fluid level should be between
the reservoir MIN and MAX marks.
Power steering fluid - level
The power steering fluid level must be between
the reservoir's MIN and MAX marks. The fluid
does not need to be changed.
Checking the level
Brake and clutch fluid have a common reservoir.
The level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks that are visible inside the reservoir. Check
the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
The fluid should be changed annually on cars
driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent braking, such as driving in mountains or tropical climates with high humidity.
For capacities and recommended brake fluid
grade, see Brake fluid - grade and volume
(p. 410).
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid. Volvo recommends that the reason for the loss of
brake fluid is investigated by an authorised
Volvo workshop.
The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side.
The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover
over the cold zone in the engine compartment.
The round cover must be removed first before the
reservoir cap can be reached.
Turn and open the cover located on the covering.
Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid.
The level must be between the MIN and
MAX marks, which are located on the inside
of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
354
IMPORTANT
Keep the area around the power steering
fluid reservoir clean when checking. The cover
must not be opened.
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
require changing. The level must be between the
MIN and MAX marks.
For recommended fluid grade, see Power steering fluid - grade (p. 410).
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
WARNING
If there is a fault in the power steering system
or if the engine is switched off and the car
has to be towed, the steering is much heavier
than normal. Read about what applies for towing (p. 316).
Climate control system - fault
tracing and repair
Related information
•
Volvo service programme (p. 342)
The air conditioning system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
Fault tracing and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent
tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used during leak detection.
Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
355
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Lamp replacement - general
Several of the car's bulbs can be replaced by
the driver. For replacement of LED lamps and
xenon lamps, please contact a workshop.
The bulbs are specified (p. 363). The following
list contains locations of bulbs and other light
sources that are specialised, such as LED6
lamps, or are unsuitable for changing for some
other reason, except at a workshop7:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6
7
356
active xenon headlamps - ABL (xenon lamps)
daytime running lights/position lamps, front
WARNING
approach lighting, door mirrors
Interior lighting apart from Courtesy lighting
front
Position lamps, rear
side marker lamps
Direction indicators, rear.
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
WARNING
The car's electrical system must be in key
position 0 for bulb replacement; see Key positions - functions at different levels (p. 83).
Cornering lights
side direction indicators, door mirrors
NOTE
On cars with xenon headlamps, the replacement of xenon lamps must be carried out at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. Working with xenon lamps
demands extreme caution because the headlamp is equipped with a high voltage unit.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recommend
visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
•
Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 357)
Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps
(p. 361)
•
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror lighting
(p. 362)
•
Lamp replacement - lighting in cargo area
(p. 362)
•
Lamp replacement - number plate lighting
(p. 362)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Lamp replacement - headlamps
When securing, check that the long lock pin is
engaged - it should be engaged in both eyes.
All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the
engine compartment. First loosen and remove
the whole headlamp.
1.
Plug in the connector, a clicking sound
should be heard.
Removing the headlamp
2.
Set the car's electrical system in key position 0,
see Key positions - functions at different levels
(p. 83).
Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins.
Check that they are firmly inserted.
3.
Check the lighting.
Detach the headlamp connector by pressing
down the clip with your thumb.
At the same time, guide out the connector
with your other hand.
5.
6.
Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.
Lift out the headlamp and place it on a soft
surface to avoid scratching the lens.
Replace the bulb in question.
Securing the headlamp
The headlamp must be mounted and the connector firmly connected before the lighting is
switched on or the remote control key is inserted
into the ignition switch.
Related information
•
•
•
Lamp replacement - general (p. 356)
Lamp replacement - cover for main/dipped
beam bulbs (p. 358)
Lamps - specifications (p. 363)
Pull the headlamp straight forward.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the connector.
357
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Lamp replacement - cover for main/
dipped beam bulbs
Main/dipped beam bulbs are accessed by
releasing the headlamp's larger cover.
•
Lamp replacement - extra main beam
(p. 360)
Lamp replacement - dipped beam
The dipped beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.
NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
Before starting to replace a bulb, see Lamp
replacement - headlamps (p. 357).
1.
Unscrew the cover's four screws using a Torx
tool, size T20 (1). They should not be loosened completely. (3 - 4 turns are sufficient.)
1.
Detach the headlamp (p. 357).
2.
Remove the cover (p. 358).
2.
Slide the cover to one side.
3.
Unplug the connector from the bulb.
3.
Remove the cover.
4.
Detach the bulb by pressing the holder
downwards.
5.
Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it in.
It can only be secured in one position.
Reinstall the cover in reverse order.
Related information
•
•
•
358
Lamp replacement - headlamps (p. 357)
Lamp replacement - dipped beam (p. 358)
Lamp replacement - main beam (p. 359)
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 363)
Lamp replacement - main beam
The main beam bulb is fitted inside the headlamp's larger cover.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 363)
NOTE
Applies to cars with halogen headlamps.
1.
Detach the headlamp (p. 357).
2.
Remove the cover (p. 358).
3.
Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise and
then pulling straight out.
4.
Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5.
Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It
can only be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
359
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Lamp replacement - extra main
beam
The extra main beam bulb is fitted inside the
headlamp's larger cover.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 363)
Lamp replacement - direction
indicators front
Undo the lamp holder for the direction indicator
lamp by turning it anticlockwise.
NOTE
Applies to cars with Xenon headlamps*.
Detach the headlamp (p. 357).
2.
Detach the bulb holder by turning anticlockwise.
3.
Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the
bulb.
4.
Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and
turning anticlockwise.
1.
Detach the headlamp (p. 357).
2.
Remove the cover (p. 358).
3.
Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4.
Detach the bulb holder by pulling it straight
out.
5.
Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise.
5.
Replace the bulb and fit the new one in the
socket. It can only be secured in one position.
6.
Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
360
1.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 363)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Lamp replacement - rear lamp
Brake light and reversing lamp
The bulb for the rear fog lamp is reached from
behind the bumper.
Lamp replacement - location of rear
lamps
The overview shows the location of the lamps at
the rear.
Bulbs for brake lights and reversing lamps are
replaced from inside the cargo area.
Rear fog lamp
The bulbs for both brake light and reversing lamp
are replaced from inside the cargo area.
1.
Open the panel.
2.
Detach the bulb holder by turning anticlockwise.
The bulb for the rear fog lamp is reached from
behind the bumper.
3.
Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and
turning anticlockwise.
1.
Detach the bulb holder by turning anticlockwise.
4.
Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise.
Reversing lamp (p. 361)
2.
Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and
turning the bulb anticlockwise.
5.
Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.
Brake light (p. 361)
3.
Fit a new bulb, press down and turn clockwise.
•
Lamp replacement - location of rear lamps
(p. 361)
4.
Fit the bulb holder and turn clockwise.
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 363)
Brake light (LED)
Position lamps (LED)/Side marker lamps
(LED)
Indicator
Fog lamp (p. 361)
Related information
Related information
•
•
Lamp replacement - general (p. 356)
Lamps - specifications (p. 363)
361
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Lamp replacement - number plate
lighting
Lamp replacement - lighting in
cargo area
Lamp replacement - vanity mirror
lighting
The number plate lighting is located under the
tailgate handle.
The cargo area lighting is located in the tailgate.
The vanity mirror's lamps are fitted inside the
lamp lenses.
G031942
Removal of lamp lens
1.
Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
2.
Carefully detach the whole bulb housing and
withdraw it.
3.
Replace the bulb.
4.
Refit the whole bulb housing and screw it
into place.
1.
Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so that
the lamp housing comes loose.
2.
Replace the bulb.
1.
3.
Check that the bulb illuminates and press
back the lamp housing.
Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens and
gently prize up the lock lugs on the edge.
2.
Snap off the lamp lens.
3.
Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb
straight out to the side and replace with a
new one. Note! - Do not squeeze the bulb
too hard with the pliers. Otherwise, the bulb
glass could then break.
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 363)
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 363)
Attaching the lamp lens
362
1.
Refit the lamp lens.
2.
Press it into place.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Related information
•
Lamps - specifications (p. 363)
Lamps - specifications
Lighting
WA
Type
The specifications apply to bulbs. For replacement of LED lamps and xenon lamps, please
contact a workshop.
Reversing lamp
21
P21W LL
Rear fog lamp
21
H21W LL
Lighting
WA
Type
Dipped beam, halogen
55
H7 LL
Main beam, Halogen
65
H9
Extra main beam,
ABL
65
H9
Front direction indicators
24
PY24W
Courtesy lighting
front
3
T10 Socket
W2.1x9.5d
Glovebox lighting
5
Socket SV8.5
Length 43 mm
Vanity mirror lighting
2
T5 Socket
W2x4.6d
Cargo area lighting
10
Socket SV8.5
Length 43 mm
Number plate lighting
5
C5W LL
Brake light
21
P21W LL
A
Watt
Related information
•
Lamp replacement - general (p. 356)
363
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Wiper blades
The wiper blades sweep water away from the
windscreen and rear window. Together with the
washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure
visibility for driving.
The windscreen wiper blades must be in service
position when they are to be replaced.
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the service
position, make sure that they are not frozen
down.
1.
Service position
Wiper blades in service position.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades
(for scraping off ice from the windscreen, for
example) they must be in service position.
8
364
Not required in cars with keyless start and lock system.
Insert the remote control key in the ignition
switch8 and briefly press the START/STOP
ENGINE button to set the car's electrical
system to key position I. For detailed information on key positions, see Key positions functions at different levels (p. 83).
2.
Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button again to set the car’s electrical system
in key position 0.
3.
Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk switch
up and hold it in position for
approx. 1 second.
> The wipers then move to standing straight
up.
The wipers return to their starting position when
you briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button to set the car’s electrical system to key
position I (or when the car is started).
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the wipers are activated. This is
to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
Replacing the wiper blades
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service
position. Press the button located on the
wiper blade mounting and pull straight out
parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is
heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4.
Fold the wiper arm back towards the windscreen.
The wipers return from service position to their
starting position when you briefly press the
START/STOP ENGINE button to set the car’s
electrical system to key position I (or when the
car is started).
G032770
Replacing the wiper blades, rear
window
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the passenger side.
1.
Fold out the wiper arm.
2.
Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
3.
Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever to
detach the blade more easily.
4.
Press the new wiper blade into position.
Check that it is firmly installed.
5.
Lower the wiper arm.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see
Car wash (p. 387).
}}
365
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
IMPORTANT
Check the blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper
blades.
Washer fluid - filling
Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps
and windows. Washer fluid with antifreeze must
be used when the temperature is below freezing
point.
Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended
by Volvo - with frost protection during cold
weather and below freezing point.
IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent
with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8,
in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral
water).
Related information
•
Washer fluid - filling (p. 366)
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the
temperature is below freezing to avoid freezing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
Volume:
Topping up the washer fluid takes place by opening the blue cap.
•
•
The windscreen and headlamp washers share a
common reservoir.
Related information
NOTE
When there is approx. 1 litre of washer fluid
remaining in the reservoir, a message to top
up the washer fluid will be shown in the combined instrument panel, together with the
symbol
.
366
•
•
•
Cars with headlamp washing: 6.5 litres.
Cars without headlamp washing: 4.5 litres.
Wiper blades (p. 364)
Wipers and washers (p. 104)
Bonnet - opening and closing (p. 347)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Starter battery - general
The starter battery is used to drive the starter
motor and other electrical equipment in the car.
The starter battery is a traditional 12 V battery.
The service life and function of the starter battery
is influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions, etc.
•
Never disconnect the starter battery when
the engine is running.
•
Check that the cables to the starter battery
are correctly connected and properly tightened.
Voltage (V)
Cold start
(A)
capacityA
12
-
CCAB
Size, L×W×H (mm)
Capacity (Ah)
A
B
720
278×175×190
70
IMPORTANT
When replacing the starter battery in cars
with the Start/Stop function, a battery of
EFB9 type must be fitted.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the support battery, a battery
of AGM10 type must be fitted.
IMPORTANT
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure
you replace it with a battery with the same
cold starting capacity and type as the original
battery (see the label on the battery).
NOTE
The starter battery's container size should be
consistent with the original battery's dimensions.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention immediately.
IMPORTANT
When charging the starter battery or the support battery (p. 370), only use a modern battery charger with controlled charging voltage.
Fast charging function must not be used
since it may damage the battery.
In accordance with EN standard.
Cold Cranking Amperes.
9 Enhanced Flooded Battery.
10 Absorbed Glass Mat.
}}
367
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
IMPORTANT
NOTE
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotainment system may be temporarily disengaged,
and/or the message in the combined instrument panel's information display about the
starter battery's state of charge may be temporarily inapplicable, following the connection
of an external starter battery or battery
charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger - only the car chassis
may be used as the grounding point.
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
There are information and warning symbols on
the batteries.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to be
recharged if the car is not used for a longer
time or when it is only driven short distances.
Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
Symbols on the batteries
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to a
battery charger with automatic trickle charging.
See Jump starting with another battery
(p. 275) for a description of how the cable
clamps must be attached.
Battery - symbols
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
owner's manual for the car.
Store the battery out of the
reach of children.
Related information
•
•
Battery - symbols (p. 368)
Starter battery - replacement (p. 369)
The battery contains corrosive acid.
368
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Starter battery - replacement
The starter battery in the car can be replaced
without the help of a workshop.
Removal
Risk of explosion.
First of all: Take the remote control key from the
ignition switch and wait at least 5 minutes before
any electrical connections are touched - this is
because the car's electrical system needs to
store the necessary information to control modules.
Must be taken for recycling.
NOTE
An expended starter battery or support battery must be recycled in an environmentally
safe manner since it contains lead.
Related information
•
•
Starter battery - general (p. 367)
Battery - Start/Stop (p. 370)
Open the clips on the front cover and remove
the cover.
}}
369
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Release the rubber moulding so that the rear
cover is free.
Fitting
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
with a support battery in addition to the starter
battery.
Remove the rear cover by screwing one
quarter turn and lifting it away.
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful battery for starting and one support battery that
helps during the Start/Stop function's starting
sequence.
WARNING
Connect and remove the positive and negative cables in the correct order.
Detach the black negative cable.
Detach the red positive cable.
Detach the ventilation hose from the battery.
1.
Lower the battery into the battery box.
2.
Move the battery inward and to the side until
it reaches the rear edge of the box.
3.
Tighten the clamp that holds the battery.
4.
Connect the ventilation hose.
> Check that it is correctly connected to
both battery and outlet in the body.
5.
Connect the red positive cable.
6.
Connect the black negative cable.
7.
Press in the rear cover. (See earlier section
"Removal".)
8.
Fit the rubber moulding. (See "Removal".)
9.
Align the front cover and secure it with the
clips. (See "Removal".)
Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp.
Move the battery aside.
Battery - Start/Stop
Lift it up.
For more information on the Start/Stop function,
see Start/Stop* (p. 284).
For more information on the car's starter battery,
see Jump starting with another battery (p. 275).
The following table shows specifications for the
starter battery and support battery respectively in
cars with Start/Stop function.
For more information on the car's starter battery,
see Starter battery - general (p. 367) and Jump
starting with another battery (p. 275).
370
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Battery
Start, 12 V
Cold
start
capacityA
- CCAB
(A)
Support, 12 V
Start, 12 V
760D
120E
Capacity
(Ah)
170F
8E
70
8
120
Size,
L×W×H
(mm)
278×175×190
150×90×106E
A
B
C
D
E
150×90×130F
F
In accordance with EN standard.
Cold Cranking Amperes.
Manual gearbox.
Automatic gearbox.
Manual gearbox in combination with Start/Stop function that
only auto-stops when the car is completely stationary.
Others.
Right-hand drive
car:
150×90×106
10F
Right-hand drive
car:
Right-hand drive
car:
Left-hand drive
car:
Support, 12 V
•
The higher the current take-off in the car,
the more the alternator must be working
and the batteries charging = Increased
fuel consumption.
•
When the capacity of the starter battery
has fallen below the lowest permissible
level then the Start/Stop function is disengaged.
Left-hand drive
car:
Left-hand drive
car:
720C
NOTE
Battery
IMPORTANT
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to
high current take-off means:
•
The engine starts automatically13 without the
driver depressing the clutch pedal (manual
gearbox).
•
The engine starts automatically without the
driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake
pedal (automatic gearbox).
When replacing the starter battery in cars
with the Start/Stop function, a battery of
EFB11 type or stronger must be installed.
When replacing the support battery, a battery
of AGM12 type must be fitted.
11
12
13
Enhanced Flooded Battery.
Absorbed Glass Mat.
Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
}}
371
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Location of the batteries
IMPORTANT
NOTE
If the following instruction is not observed
then the Start/Stop function may temporarily
cease to work after the connection of an
external battery or battery charger:
•
A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car.
If the starter battery has been discharged so
much that the car has no normal electrical
functions and the engine is then jump-started
with an external battery or a battery charger,
the Start/Stop function will continue to be
activated. If the Start/Stop function then
auto-stops the engine shortly after, there is a
great risk that engine auto-start will fail due
to insufficient battery capacity, because the
battery has not had the opportunity to
recharge.
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external battery or battery
charger - only the car chassis may be
used as the grounding point.
See Jump starting with another battery
(p. 275) for a description of how the cable
clamps must be attached.
If the car has been jump-started, or if there is
insufficient time to charge the battery with a
battery charger, the recommendation is to
temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function
until the battery has been recharged by the
car. In an outside temperature of +15 °C, the
battery needs to be charged for at least
1 hour by the car. In a lower outside temperature, the charging time may increase to
3-4 hours. The recommendation is to charge
the battery using an external battery charger.
Starter battery14
Support battery
The support battery normally requires no more
service than the normal battery that is used for
starting. A workshop should be contacted in the
event of questions or problems - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
For more information on charging the starter
battery, see Starter battery - general (p. 367).
Related information
•
14
372
See Starter battery - general (p. 367) for detailed description of the starter battery.
Battery - symbols (p. 368)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Electrical system
Fuses - general
The electrical system is single-pole and uses the
chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
The size, type and performance of the starter battery depend on the car's equipment and function.
IMPORTANT
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure
you replace it with a battery with the same
cold starting capacity and type as the original
battery (see the label on the battery).
Related information
•
•
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in
the circuit. Volvo recommends that you visit an
authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Changing
1.
Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2.
Pull out the fuse and check from the side to
see whether the curved wire has blown.
3.
If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
Starter battery - replacement (p. 369)
Starter battery - general (p. 367)
Location of central electrical units
Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
electrical units under the glovebox change sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Under the glovebox
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
Cargo area
Engine compartment cold zone (only Start/
Stop)
Related information
•
•
•
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 375)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 379)
Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox (p. 381)
}}
373
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
374
•
•
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 383)
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 385)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses - in engine compartment
Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine
and brake functions, amongst other things.
}}
375
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
General fuses, engine compartment
Function
AA
Function
AA
Primary fuse for the central
electronic module (CEM)
under the gloveboxB
50
Heated windscreen*B , righthand side
40
ABS pump
40
Primary fuse for the central
electronic module (CEM)
under the glovebox
50
ABS valves
20
60
Headlamp washers*
20
Primary fuse for central electrical unit in cargo areaB
10
Primary fuse for relay/fuse
box under the glovebox
60
Headlamp levelling*; Active
Xenon headlamps - ABL*
20
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses.
Primary fuse for relay/fuse
box under the gloveboxB
60
Primary fuse for the central
electronic module (CEM)
under the glovebox
•
-
ABS
5
Adjustable steering force*
5
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses.
Positions (see preceding illustration)
Engine compartment, upper
Engine compartment, front
Engine compartment, lower
These fuses are all located in the engine compartment box. The fuses in (C) are located under
(A).
•
Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type
and should be replaced by a workshop15.
•
Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "Mini
Fuse" type.
15
376
Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi Fuse"
type and must only be replaced by a workshop15.
-
Electric additional heater*B
100
Heated windscreen*B , lefthand side
40
Engine control module; Transmission control module; Airbags
10
Windscreen wipers
30
Heated washer nozzles*
10
Parking heater*
25
-
-
Ventilation fanC
40
Headlamp control
5
-
-
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Function
AA
-
-
-
-
Relay coils
5
Auxiliary lamps*
20
Horn
15
Relay coil in main relay for
engine management system
(4-cyl.); Engine control module
(4-cyl.)
5
Relay coil in main relay for
engine management system
(5-cyl. diesel); Engine control
module (5-cyl. diesel)
10
Transmission control module
15
Supporting coolant pump (4cyl. diesel)
15
Relay coils in central electrical
unit in engine compartment
cold zone Start/Stop
5
-
-
Function
AA
Function
AA
Glow control module (5-cyl.
diesel)
10
15
Engine control module (4-cyl.)
20
Lambda-sond, front (4-cyl.);
Lambda-sond, rear (4-cyl. petrol)
Engine control module (5-cyl.
diesel)
15
Lambda-sonds (5-cyl. diesel);
Control module, radiator roller
cover (5-cyl. diesel)
Engine control module (4-cyl.)
20
Ignition coils (4-cyl. petrol)
15
Mass air flow sensor (4-cyl.);
Thermostat(4-cyl. petrol);
EVAP valve (4-cyl. petrol);
Cooling pump for EGR (4-cyl.
diesel)
10
Diesel filter heater (diesel)
20
Solenoid clutch A/C (4-cyl.);
Glow control module (4-cyl.
diesel); Oil pump (4-cyl. diesel)
7.5
Mass airflow meter (5-cyl. diesel); Control valves (5-cyl. diesel)
15
10
Solenoid clutch A/C (5-cyl.
diesel); Valves (5-cyl. diesel);
Oil level sensor
10
Crankcase ventilation heater
(5-cyl. diesel); Oil pump automatic gearbox (5-cyl. diesel
Start/Stop)
Coolant pump (4-cyl. petrol)
50
Glow plugs (diesel)
70
Valves (4-cyl.); Oil pump (4-cyl.
petrol); Lambda-sond, centre
(4-cyl. petrol); Lambda-sond,
rear (4-cyl. diesel)
15
}}
* Option/accessory. 377
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
A
B
C
D
AA
Cooling fan (petrol)
60/80D
Cooling fan (diesel)
80
Power steering
100
Ampere
For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is empty
- see instead Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone
(p. 385).
For cars with the Start/Stop function this fuse location is empty
- see instead Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold zone
(p. 385).
Depending on cooling fan variant.
Related information
•
•
•
378
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 379)
Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox (p. 381)
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 383)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses - under glovebox
Fuses under the glovebox protect the infotainment system and seat functions, amongst other
things.
Positions
Function
Function
AA
Primary fuse for audio control module*; Primary fuse for fuses 16-20:
Infotainment
40
Windscreen washers; Rear window
washer
25
-
-
AA
Function
AA
-
-
Control panel, front passenger door
20
-
-
20
-
-
Control panel, rear passenger door,
right
15
Control panel, rear passenger door,
left
20
12 V socket, cargo area*
Control panel, driver's door
20
Keyless system*
20
}}
* Option/accessory. 379
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
AA
Function
AA
Power seat, driver's side*
20
Seat heating, front driver's side
15
Power seat, passenger side*
20
Parking assistance*; Parking camera*; BLIS*
5
AWD control module*
15
Active chassis Four-C*
10
-
-
Infotainment Control Module or
ScreenB
5
Audio control unit (amplifier)*; TV*;
Digital radio*
10
Audio control module or Control
module SensusB
15
Telematics*; Bluetooth*
5
-
-
Panoramic roof with sun blind*;
Interior lighting roof; Climate sensor*
5
12 V socket, tunnel console
15
Seat heating, rear right*
15
Seat heating, rear left*
15
Seat heating, front passenger side
380
A
B
Ampere
Certain model variants.
Related information
•
•
•
•
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 375)
Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox (p. 381)
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 383)
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 385)
15
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses - in the control module under
the glovebox
Fuses in the control module under the glovebox
protect airbag and collision warning system
functions, amongst other things.
Positions
Function
AA
Rear window wiper
15
Interior lighting; Driver's door control panel, power windows; Power
seats*
7.5
Function
AA
Function
AA
Combined instrument panel
5
10
Adaptive cruise control, ACC*; collision warning system*
10
Central locking system, fuel filler
flap
Heated steering wheel*
15
Interior lighting; Rain sensor*
7.5
Heated windscreen*
15
Steering wheel module
7.5
Unlocking, tailgate
10
}}
* Option/accessory. 381
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
AA
Folding head restraint*
10
Fuel pump
20
Movement detector for alarm*; Climate panel
5
Steering lock
15
Siren*; Data link connector OBDII
5
-
-
Airbags
10
Collision warning system*
5
Accelerator pedal sensor; Dimming
interior rearview mirror*; Seat heating, rear*
Related information
•
•
•
•
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 375)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 379)
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 383)
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 385)
7.5
Electric additional heater*
A
382
Infotainment control module (Performance); Audio (Performance)
15
Brake light
5
Panorama roof with sun blind*
20
Immobiliser
5
Ampere
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses - in cargo area
Fuses in the cargo area protect the electric parking brake, amongst other things.
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.
Positions
Function
Function
AA
Electric parking brake, left
30
Electric parking brake, right
30
Rear window defroster
30
Trailer socket 2*
15
Power operated tailgate*
20
AA
Function
AA
40
-
-
Trailer socket 1*
-
-
-
-
-
A
-
-
Related information
-
-
•
•
-
Ampere
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 375)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 379)
}}
* Option/accessory. 383
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
384
•
Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox (p. 381)
•
Fuses - in the engine compartment's cold
zone (p. 385)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Fuses - in the engine
compartment's cold zone
Fuses in the engine compartment's cold zone
are fitted in cars with the Start/Stop function.
•
Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse"
type and must only be replaced by a workshop16.
•
Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and
must only be replaced by a workshop16.
•
Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type.
For more information on Start/Stop - see Start/
Stop* (p. 284).
16
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Positions
Function
Main fuse for central electrical
unit in the engine compartment
Function
AA
175
AA
Main fuse for central electronic
module (CEM) under the glovebox, relay/fuse box under the glovebox, central electrical unit in
cargo area
175
Electric additional heater*
100
}}
* Option/accessory. 385
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Function
AA
•
Fuses - in the control module under the glovebox (p. 381)
Primary fuse for the central electronic module (CEM) under the
glovebox
50
•
Fuses - in cargo area (p. 383)
Primary fuse for relay/fuse box
under the glovebox
60
Heated windscreen*
60
Primary fuse for central electrical
unit in cargo area
60
Ventilation fan
40
-
-
-
-
Start relay
-
A
30
-
Support battery
70
Central electronic module (CEM) reference voltage support battery
5
Ampere
Related information
•
•
386
Fuses - in engine compartment (p. 375)
Fuses - under glovebox (p. 379)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Car wash
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean as the dirt does not attach as firmly. It
also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the
car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
Handwashing
•
•
•
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
substances that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. For example, use soft
paper or sponge soaked in plenty of water.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discoloration.
risk of water stains that may need to be polished away is reduced.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality.
Clean them regularly, when refuelling for
example.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but
use water and a non-scratching sponge
instead.
Hose down the underbody.
Rinse the whole car until the loose dirt has
been removed in order to reduce the risk of
scratches from washing. Do not spray directly
onto the locks.
•
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that the surfaces
must not then be warmed up by the sun!
•
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
•
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap
solution or car shampoo.
•
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a
water scraper. If you avoid allowing water
droplets to dry in strong sunlight then the
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way
of washing the car, but it cannot reach everywhere. Washing the car by hand is recommended
to achieve a good result, or to supplement automatic car washes with washing by hand.
NOTE
The car must only be washed by hand over
the first few months. This is because the paint
is more delicate when it is new.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle
does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface
of the car. Do not spray directly onto the locks.
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the car,
including the parking brake, to ensure that
moisture and corrosion do not attack the
brake linings and reduce braking performance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush. The
heat from the friction causes the brake linings to
warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting
in very damp or cold weather.
}}
387
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Wiper blades
IMPORTANT
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as
well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair
the service life of wiper blades.
Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent
with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than
11.5. This may result in discolouration of anodised aluminium parts such as roof rack and
around the side windows.
For cleaning:
- Set the wiper blades to the service position, see
Wiper blades (p. 364).
Never use metal polishing agent on anodised
aluminium parts, this can result in discolouration and destroy the surface treatment.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, such as glossy trim mouldings.
When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully.
The frames around the side windows, the car's
roof rails and the door frames at the windows*
are produced in anodised aluminium. This means
that they should only be washed using a cleaning
agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
This is in order to avoid discolouration.
388
Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with
a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
After washing, discolouration at the base of the
spokes may remain due to metal dust from the
brake discs attaching in the wheel rim's paint.
Paint cleaner works in many cases, with very fine
polishing using a soft cloth.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated aluminium rims.
Related information
•
•
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 389)
Cleaning the interior (p. 390)
Water and dirt-repellent coating (p. 389)
* Option/accessory.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Polishing and waxing
IMPORTANT
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or
to give the paintwork extra protection.
Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo
should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or
similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is
not covered by Volvo warranty.
The car does not need to be polished until it is
at least one year old. However, the car can be
waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the
car in direct sunlight.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and
tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More
stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid
or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both
polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
Related information
•
Car wash (p. 387)
Water and dirt-repellent coating
The windows are treated with a surface coating
that improves visibility in difficult weather conditions.
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
There is natural wear of the waterrepellent coating.
Maintenance:
•
Never use products such as car wax,
degreaser or similar on glass surfaces as this
could ruin their water-repellent properties.
•
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface.
•
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
•
Treatment with a special finishing agent
available from Volvo dealers is recommended
in order to maintain the water-repellent properties on the side windows. This should be
used first after three years and then each
year.
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice
from the windows. Use the heating to remove
ice from the door mirrors, see Windows and
rearview and door mirrors - heating (p. 109).
}}
* Option/accessory. 389
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
||
Related information
•
Car wash (p. 387)
Rustproofing
Cleaning the interior
The car received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body are
made of galvanised sheet metal. The underbody
is protected by a wear-resistant anti-corrosion
compound. A thin, penetrating rustproofing fluid
was sprayed into the exposed members, cavities, closed sections and side doors.
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
IMPORTANT
•
Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g.
dark jeans and suede garments) may
stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is
important to clean and treat these parts
of the upholstery as soon as possible.
•
Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit to
clean the interior, since this may damage
the upholstery as well as other interior
materials.
•
Never spray the cleaning agent directly
onto components that have electrical buttons and controls. Wipe them instead
using a moistened cloth containing the
cleaning agent.
•
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage
the fabric upholstery.
Inspection and maintenance
The car's anti-corrosion protection does not normally need to be maintained, but keeping the car
clean always helps to further reduce the risk of
corrosion. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solutions must always be avoided on the glossy trim
components. Any stone chips should be rectified
as soon as they are discovered.
Related information
•
Paint damage (p. 392)
Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery
Volvo offers a comprehensive fabric care product
for fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery which,
when used in accordance with the instructions,
preserves the properties of the upholstery. The
390
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
fabric care product is available for purchase from
a Volvo dealer.
Leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve
its original appearance.
Leather upholstery is a natural product that
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over
time. Regular cleaning and treatment are
required in order that the properties and colours
of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a
comprehensive product, Volvo Leather Care Kit/
Wipes, for the cleaning and treatment of leather
upholstery which, when used in accordance with
the instructions, preserves the leather's protective
coating.
To achieve best results, Volvo recommends the
cleaning and application of the protective cream
once to four times per year (or more if required).
The Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available for
purchase from a Volvo dealer.
Leather steering wheel
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plastic.
Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is recommended
for cleaning the leather steering wheel.
Interior plastic, metal and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly moistened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is
recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers. A special cleaning agent available
from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult
cleaning.
Related information
•
Car wash (p. 387)
Seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from a Volvo
dealer. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before
allowing it to retract.
Inlay mats and floor mat
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay
mat is secured with pins.
Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay
mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each
pin.
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by the
driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
the pins so that it does not get caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats must be cleaned with agents recommended
by a Volvo dealer.
391
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Paint damage
Repairing minor paint damage such as
stone chips and scratches
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked regularly.
The most common types of paintwork damage
are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
Touching up minor paintwork damage
To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork
should be rectified immediately.
•
Primer17 - for e.g. bumpers, there are special
adhesive primers available in spray cans.
•
Base coat and clear coat - are available in
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks18.
•
•
Masking tape.
Fine sand paper17.
Exterior colour code
Any secondary exterior colour code
It is important that the correct colour is used. For
product label location, see Type designations
(p. 396).
Colour code
The label for colour code is located on the car's
door pillar and is visible when the right-hand rear
door is opened.
17
18
392
G021832
Materials that may be needed
If required.
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
Before work is started, the car must be clean and
dry as well as at a temperature above 15 °C.
1.
Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
If the damage has reached down to a metal
surface (sheet steel), it is preferable to use a
primer. In the event of damage to a plastic
surface, an adhesive primer should be used
for better results - spray into the spray can's
cap and brush thinly.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
2.
Before painting, gentle polishing using a very
fine polishing agent may be carried out
locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven
edges). Clean the surface thoroughly and
allow to dry.
3.
Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, matchstick or similar. Finish with base
coat and clear coat once the primer has
dried.
4.
For scratches, proceed as above, but mask
around the damaged area to protect the
undamaged paintwork.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with base coat and
clear coat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
Related information
•
Rustproofing (p. 390)
393
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
Type designation, vehicle identification number,
etc., i.e. information unique to the car, can be
read on a label in the car.
396
SPECIFICATIONS
Label location
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facilitate all
}}
397
SPECIFICATIONS
||
contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding
the car and when ordering spare parts and
accessories.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and locations
in the car. The information that applies to your
particular car can be found on the decal on
the car.
Decal for type designation, vehicle identification number, permissible maximum weights
and code designation for exterior colour and
date of manufacture. The decal is positioned
on the door pillar, and will be visible when the
right-hand rear door is opened.
Label for A/C system.
Label for parking heater.
Decal for engine code and the engine's
serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Decal for gearbox type designation and serial
number.
Manual gearbox
Automatic gearbox
Decal for the car's identification number VIN (Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in the
registration document.
398
Related information
•
•
•
Weights (p. 400)
Engine specifications (p. 403)
Specifications for air conditioning (p. 412)
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be
read in the table.
Dimensions
mm
Dimensions
mm
A
Wheelbase
2774
H
Rear track
1586
B
Length
4644
I
Load width, floor
1090
C
Load length, floor, folded rear seat
1789
J
Width
1891
D
Load length, floor
972
K
Width including door mirrors
2120
E
Height
1713
L
F
Load height
802
Width including folded-in door
mirrors
1891
G
Front track
1632
399
SPECIFICATIONS
Weights
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a
label in the car.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories, and
towball load (p. 401) (when a trailer is hitched)
influence the load capacity and are not included
in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to cars
in the standard version - i.e. a car without
extra equipment or accessories. This means
that for every accessory added the loading
capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly
by the weight of the accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load
capacity are the different equipment levels
(e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well
as other accessories such as towbar, load
carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary
lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille,
carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc.
For information on label location, see Type designations
(p. 396).
Max. gross vehicle weight
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular
car.
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 100 kg.
Related information
•
•
400
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 401)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 413)
SPECIFICATIONS
Towing capacity and towball load
Towing capacity and towball load for driving with
a trailer can be read in the tables.
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Max. weight braked trailer
NOTE
The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing
bracket is recommended for trailers heavier
than 1800 kg.
Engine
Engine codeA
Gearbox
Max. weight braked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
All
All
All
0–1200
50
T5
B4204T11
Automatic, TG-81SC
1600
75
T5 AWD
B4204T11
Automatic, TG-81SC
1800
90
T5
B4204T41
Automatic, TG-81SC
1600
75
T6
B4204T9
Automatic, TG-81SC
1800
90
T6 AWD
B4204T9
Automatic, TG-81SC
2000
90
D3
D4204T4
Manual, M66
1800
90
D3
D4204T4
Automatic, TG-81SC
1800
90
D4
D4204T14
Manual, M66
1800
90
D4
D4204T14
Automatic, TG-81SC
1800
90
D4 AWD
D5244T21
Manual, M66
1800
90
}}
401
SPECIFICATIONS
||
Engine
Engine codeA
Gearbox
Max. weight braked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
D4 AWD
D5244T21
Automatic, TF-80SD
2000
90
D4 AWD
D5244T17
Manual, M66
1800
90
D4 AWD
D5244T17
Automatic, TF-80SD
2000
90
D5 AWD
D5244T22
Manual, M66
1800
90
D5 AWD
D5244T20
Automatic, TF-80SD
2000
90
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 396).
A
Max. weight unbraked trailer
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
750
50
Related information
•
•
•
402
Weights (p. 400)
Driving with a trailer* (p. 308)
Trailer Stability Assist - TSA (p. 315)
* Option/accessory.
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine specifications
Engine specifications (output etc.) for each
respective engine alternative can be read in the
table.
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Engine
Engine codeA
Output
(kW/rpm)
(hp/rpm)
(Nm/rpm)
T5 / T5 AWD
B4204T11
180/5500
245/5500
350/1500–4800
4
T5
B4204T41
180/5500
245/5500
350/1500–4800
T6 / T6 AWD
B4204T9
225/5700
306/5700
D3
D4204T4
110/4250
D4
D4204T14
140/4250
A
B
C
Output
Torque
Bore
Stroke
Swept volume
(mm)
(mm)
(litres)
82.0
93.2
1,969
10.8:1
4
82.0
93.2
1,969
8,6:1
400/2100-4800
4
82.0
93.2
1,969
10.3:1
150/4250
350/1500-2500
4
82.0
93.2
1,969
15.8:1
190/4250
400/1750-2500
4
82.0
93.2
1,969
15.8:1
5
81.0
93.2
2.400
16.5:1
420/1500-3000B
No. of cylinders
Compression ratio
D4 AWD
D5244T21
140/4000
190/4000
D4 AWD
D5244T17
120/4000
163/4000
420/1500–2500
5
81.0
93.2
2.400
16.5:1
D5 AWD
D5244T22
162/4000
220/4000
420/1500-3500
5
81.0
93.2
2.400
16.5:1
D5 AWD
D5244T20
162/4000
220/4000
440/1500-3000
5
81.0
93.2
2.400
16.5:1
440/1500-2750C
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 396).
• manual gearbox
• Automatic gearbox
Related information
•
•
Coolant - grade and volume (p. 407)
Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 405)
403
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine oil - adverse driving
conditions
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level (p. 350) more frequently for
long journeys:
•
•
•
•
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise you
will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact.
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hotter
than +40 °C.
The above also apply to shorter driving distances
at low temperatures.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty
liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade
and viscosity is not used.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection for
the engine.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo recommends:
Related information
•
•
404
Engine oil - grade and volume (p. 405)
Engine oil - general (p. 349)
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine oil - grade and volume
Engine oil grade and volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Volvo recommends:
Engine
Engine codeA
Oil grade
Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
D4 AWD
D5244T21
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
approx. 5.9
D4 AWD
D5244T17
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
approx. 5.9
D5 AWD
D5244T22
approx. 5.9
D5 AWD
D5244T20
approx. 5.9
}}
405
SPECIFICATIONS
||
Engine
Engine codeA
Oil grade
Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
A
T5 / T5 AWD
B4204T11
T5
B4204T41
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
approx. 5.9
T6 / T6 AWD
B4204T9
approx. 5.9
D3
D4204T4
D4
D4204T14
Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine; see Type designations (p. 396).
Related information
406
•
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 404)
•
Engine oil - checking and filling (p. 350)
approx. 5.9
approx 5.2
approx 5.2
SPECIFICATIONS
Coolant - grade and volume
Related information
Approved coolant volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
•
Coolant - level (p. 353)
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by
Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the packaging.
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Volume
EngineA
(litres)
D4 AWD
D5244T17
D4 AWD
D5244T21
D5 AWD
D5244T22
D5 AWD
D5244T20
D3
D4204T4
D4
D4204T14
T5 / T5 AWD
B4204T11
T5
B4204T41
T6 / T6 AWD
B4204T9
8.9
8,9 (9,2B)
8,3 (8,7B)
B
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the
engine; see Type designations (p. 396).
Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater.
1
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
A
407
SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission fluid - grade and
volume
The prescribed transmission fluid and volume for
each respective gearbox alternative can be read
in the table.
Manual gearbox
Manual gearbox
M66
A
B
Volume (litres)
approx.
1.9A
approx. 1.45B
Prescribed transmission fluid
BOT 350M3
Applies to 5-cylinder engines.
Applies to other engines.
Automatic gearbox
Automatic gearbox
TF-80SD
TG-81SC
A
B
approx 7.0
approx.
6.6A
approx. 7.5B
Prescribed transmission fluid
AW1
AW1
Petrol engines
Diesel engines
Automatic gearbox
TG-81SC
408
Volume (litres)
Volume (litres)
approx 6.6
Prescribed transmission fluid
AW1
SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE
The transmission fluid does not need to be
changed under normal driving conditions.
However, it may be necessary under adverse
driving conditions.
Related information
•
Engine oil - adverse driving conditions
(p. 404)
•
Type designations (p. 396)
409
SPECIFICATIONS
Brake fluid - grade and volume
Power steering fluid - grade
Brake fluid is the term for the medium in a
hydraulic brake system that is used to transfer
pressure from the master brake cylinder to the
mechanical brakes.
Power steering fluid is the denomination of the
medium used in the car's power steering system.
Prescribed grade: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6
or equivalent.
Volume: 0.6 litres
Related information
•
410
Brake and clutch fluid - level (p. 354)
Prescribed grade: Power steering fluid recommended by Volvo.
Related information
•
Power steering fluid - level (p. 354)
SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel tank - volume
Fuel tank volume for each respective engine
alternative can be read in the table.
Engine
Volume (litres)
Prescribed grade
Petrol engine
approx. 70
Fuel - petrol (p. 304)
Diesel engine
approx. 70
Fuel - diesel (p. 304)
Related information
•
•
Filling up with fuel (p. 302)
Engine specifications (p. 403)
411
SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications for air conditioning
Decal for R1234yf
Symbol
The climate control system in the car uses a
refrigerant, either R1234yf or R134a, depending on market. Information about which refrigerant the car's climate control system uses can be
seen on a decal, located on the inside of the
bonnet.
Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and
lubricants in the air conditioning system can be
read in the tables below.
A/C decal
Decal for R134a
A trained and certified technician is
required in order to service the
mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Flammable refrigerants
The label is fitted on the inside of the bonnet.
Symbol explanation R1234yf
Symbol
Meaning
Caution
Mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
The label is fitted on the inside of the bonnet.
412
Meaning
Lubricant type
Refrigerant
Cars with refrigerant R134a
Engine
Weight
Prescribed grade
5-cylinder diesel
720 g
R134a
other
800 g
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
SPECIFICATIONS
Cars with refrigerant R1234yf
Related information
Weight
Prescribed grade
•
750 g
R1234yf
•
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Compressor oil
Engine
Volume
4-cylinder
60 ml
PAG SP-A2
5-cylinder
110 ml
PAG SP-A2
Climate control system - fault tracing and
repair (p. 355)
Type designations (p. 396)
Fuel consumption and CO2
emissions
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions can be
affected negatively by several causes.
Examples of reasons for increased fuel consumption are as follows:
•
•
•
IMPORTANT
The A/C system's evaporator must never be
repaired or replaced with a previously used
evaporator. A new evaporator must be certified and labelled in accordance with SAE
J2842.
The driver's driving style.
If the customer has specified wheels larger
than those fitted as standard on the model's
basic version then rolling resistance increases.
•
High speed results in increased wind resistance.
•
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
Prescribed grade
Evaporator
If the car is equipped with extra equipment
that affects the car's weight.
A combination of the above-mentioned examples
can result in significantly increased consumption.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel quality are factors that considerably increase the car's fuel consumption.
}}
413
SPECIFICATIONS
||
414
Related information
•
•
Economical driving (p. 307)
Weights (p. 400)
SPECIFICATIONS
Tyres - approved tyre pressures
Approved tyre pressures for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
XC60
Tyre size
Engine
Speed
(km/h)
235/65 R 17
All engines
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
Load, 1-3 persons
Max. load
ECO pressureA
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front/rear
(kPa)B
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
0 - 160C
240
240
270
270
270
160+D
240
240
270
270
-
max. 80E
420
420
420
420
-
235/60 R 18
235/55 R 19
255/45 R 20
Temporary Spare Tyre
A
B
C
D
E
Economical driving.
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
0 - 100 mph
100+ mph
max 50 mph
Related information
•
•
•
Tyres - dimensions (p. 324)
Tyres - air pressure (p. 322)
Type designations (p. 396)
415
SPECIFICATIONS
Performance
Top speed can be read in the table below.
Engine
(km/h)
(mph)
T5
B4204T41
210
130
T5
B4204T11
210
130
T5 AWD
B4204T11
210
130
T6
B4204T9
210
130
T6 AWD
B4204T9
210
130
D4
D4204T14
210
130
D5 AWD
D5244T20
210
130
A
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine.
NOTE
If there are no performance data then they
are available in the accompanying supplement.
Related information
•
416
Top speed
Engine codeA
Engine specifications (p. 403)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
A
ACC – Adaptive cruise control
Active bending lights
Active chassis - FOUR-C
Active main beam
Active xenon headlamps
Active Yaw Control
204
98
190
96
98
191
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS
driver's side
passenger side
36
34
34, 36
AIRBAG
34
Airbag system
warning symbol
32
31
Air cleaning
material
passenger compartment
132
131, 132
Adaptation of headlamp beam
99
Adapting driving characteristics
190
Air conditioning
139
Adaptive Cruise Control
change cruise control functionality
deactivate
fault tracing
function
managing speed
overtaking
overview
radar sensor
setting the time interval
standby mode
temporary deactivation
204
213
211
214
205
207
210
206
217
209
209
209
Air conditioning, fluid
volume and grade
412
Air conditioning system
repair
355
Air distribution
Recirculation
table
133
140
141
Air quality system IAQS
132
Additional heater
electric
fuel-driven
Adjusting the steering wheel
149, 150
149
90
Alarm
alarm indicator
alarm signals
automatic re-arming
checking the alarm
reduced alarm level
remote control key not working
185, 187
186
187
187
169
188
187
Allergy and asthma inducing substances.
132
All Wheel Drive, (AWD)
282
All Wheel Drive (AWD)
282
Approach lighting
104, 168
Automatic car washes
387
Automatic gearbox
manual gear positions (Geartronic)
towing and recovery
trailer
278
278
316
310
Automatic relocking
178
AWD, All Wheel Drive
282
B
Backrest
front seat, lowering
rear seat, folding
Bag holder
Battery
jump starting
maintenance
overload
remote control key/PCC
start
support
symbols on the battery
warning symbols
BLIS
85
85
88
158
275, 300, 367
275
367
300
172
367
370
368
368
240, 241
417
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Bonnet, opening
347
Book service and repair
342
Booster seat
lowering
raising
seating position
Brake and clutch fluid
54
53
52
354
Cargo area
cargo cover
lighting
mounting points
protective net
162
102
158
159
Cargo cover
162
Cargo grille
161
Car key memory
165
Brake fluid
grade and volume
410
Car upholstery
390
Brake light
100
Car washing
387
Catalytic converter
Recovery
307
317
Chassis settings
190
Checking the engine oil level
350
Brakes
292, 294
Anti-lock braking system, ABS
293
brake light
100
brake system
292, 293, 294
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA
294
filling brake fluid
354
handbrake
295
symbols in the combined instrument
panel
293
bulbs, specifications
363
Children
child safety locks
child seat and airbag
child seats and side airbags
location in car
safety
Child safety locks
C
Camera sensor
Car care
Leather upholstery
418
224, 236
387
391
43
51
37
51
43
184, 185
Child seat
integrated two-stage booster seat
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
52
55
Child seats
recommended
43
45
size classes for child seats with ISOFIX
fixture system
types
upper mounting points for child seats
56
57
59
City Safety™
222
Cleaning
automatic car wash
car washing
rims
seatbelts
upholstery
387
387
388
391
390
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)
132
Climate control
actual temperature
auto-regulation
general
personal preferences
sensors
temperature control
130
138
130
133
131
138
Clock, adjustment
CO2 emissions
Collision
Collision warning
Collision warning system
function
general limitations
operation
78
413
41
229, 230
230
235
233
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Pedestrian detection
Radar sensor
232
217, 223
Collision Warning System with Auto
Brake
229
Colour code, paint
392
Combined instrument panel
68, 69
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)
132
D
Daytime running lights
94
Compass
calibration
111
111
Deadlock
deactivation
temporary deactivation
Condensation in headlamps
387
Defroster
139
Detachable towbar
storage
311
407
Diesel
run out of fuel
304
305
Coolant, checking and filling
353
Diesel particle filter
306
Cooling system
overheating
299
299
Dimensions
399
Dipstick, electronic
350, 351
Cornering lights
99
Direction indicator
101
191
Direction indicators
101
41
direction of rotation
321
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor
281
Controls lighting
93
Control symbols
69, 71
Coolant
volume and grade
Corner Traction Control
Crash, see Collision
Cruise control
deactivate
managing speed
resume set speed
temporary deactivation
198
200
199
200
199
CTA
242
Cyclist detection
231
Display lighting
Distance Warning
Limitations
Symbols and messages
183
183
183
93
201
202
203
Door mirrors
automatic dimming
resetting
108
109
109
Driver Alert Control
operation
248
249
Driver Alert System
248
Driving
cooling system
with the tailgate open
301
299
300
Driving in water
299
Driving with a trailer
towball load
towing capacity
308
401
401
E
ECC, electronic climate control
EcoGuide
Ecolabelling, FSC, owner's manual
135
72
25
Economical driving
307
ECO pressure
415
Electrical socket
cargo area
155
159
Electrical system
373
Electric parking brake
low battery voltage
295
419
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Electronic climate control - ECC
332
330
Emergency puncture repair
action
inflating the tyres
rechecking
335
337
340
339
Emergency puncture repair kit
location
overview
335
336
Emissions of carbon dioxide
413
Engine
deactivate
overheating
start
Start/Stop
420
135
Emergency equipment
first aid kit
warning triangle
271
299
270
284
Engine compartment
Brake and clutch fluid
Check
coolant
Engine oil
overview
power steering fluid
354
349
353
349
347
354
Engine drag control
191
Engine oil
adverse driving conditions
filter
grade and volume
Engine oil, filling
Engine specifications
349, 404
404
349
405
137
Fault tracing for the camera sensor
225
First aid
332
First aid kit
332
Fluids, capacities
366, 407, 408, 410,
411, 412
Fluids and oils
350
403
Foot brake
407, 408, 410, 412
99
292, 293, 294
FOUR-C - Active chassis
Engine and passenger compartment heater
messages
147
timer
145
Engine block heater
Error messages in BLIS
244
Engine block heater and passenger compartment heater
direct start
144
immediate stop
145
ERS - Remote Start
271
Engine braking, automatic
283
Fan
ECC
Fog lamp
rear
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control
Driver Alert Control
Lane Departure Warning
LKA
see Messages and symbols
143
F
215
250
254
259
215, 297
Ethanol content
maximum 10 percent by volume
304
exhaust gases, toxic, sucked in
300
External dimensions
399
FSC, ecolabelling
Fuel
fuel consumption
fuel economy
fuel filter
190
25
303, 304
413
322, 323
305
Fuel-driven heater
timer
145
Fuelling
filling
fuel cap
fuel filler flap
fuel filler flap, manual opening
302
302
302
302
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Fuel tank
volume
411
Glovebox
locking
154
180
Fuse box
373
Gross vehicle weight
400
Heat-reflecting windscreen
GSI - Gear selector assistance
277
High engine temperature
299
High-pressure headlamp washing
105
Hill Descent Control
283
Fuses
changing
General
in cargo area
in engine compartment
In the control module under the glovebox
in the engine compartment's cold
zone
under glovebox
373
373
383
375
381
385
379
G
Gearbox
automatic
manual
276
278
276
Gear selector inhibitor
281
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disengagement
281
Gear shift indicator
277
Geartronic
278
Glass
laminated/reinforced
25
H
steering wheel
windscreen
91
109
20
Hill Start Assist
282
Handbrake
295
Home safe light duration
103
Hazard warning flashers
100
Horn
HDC
283
Headlamp beam
adaptation
height adjustment
99
93
Headlamp control
92
Headlamp levelling of headlamps
93
Headlamp pattern, adjusting
99
Headlamp pattern adjustment
99
Headlamps
head restraint
centre seat, rear
lowering
Heated washer nozzles
Heating
rearview and door mirrors
rear window
seats
357
87
87, 89
105
109
109
136, 137
91
I
IAQS - Interior Air Quality System
132
Immobiliser
166
Indicator symbols
Inflatable curtain
Information button, PCC
Information display
Inlaid mats
73
38
169
68, 69
155
Instrument lighting
93
Instrument overview
left-hand drive car
right-hand drive car
62
65
Instruments and controls
62, 65
421
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)
Air cleaning
132
Interior lighting
102
Interior rearview mirror
automatic dimming
110
110
Intermittent wiping
104
Internet-connected car
book service and repair
342
Jack
331
Journey statistics
127
Jump starting
275
K
Kerb weight
400
Key
164, 166
Key blade
171, 172
174, 175, 176, 177, 270
Keyless - locking
Keyless start (keyless drive)
Keyless - unlocking
422
90
Key positions
83
L
Labels
175
174, 175,
176, 177, 270
176
396
Laminated glass
25
Lamps
Lane assistance
operation
J
Keyless drive
Keypad in the steering wheel
356
252, 253, 257
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
251, 252
Lane Keeping Aid - LKA
255, 256
Lane keeping assistant
operation
258
Laser sensor
226
Leather upholstery, washing instructions
391
Light indications, PCC
169
Lighting
active bending lights
98
active xenon headlamps
98
approach lighting
104, 168
automatic lighting, passenger compartment
102
Automatic main beam
96
bulbs, specifications
363
controls
92, 102
controls lighting
cornering lights
daytime running lights
display lighting
headlamp levelling
home safe lighting
instrument lighting
in the passenger compartment
main/dipped beam
position lamps
rear fog lamp
tunnel detection
93
99
94
93
93
103
93
102
95
93
99
95
Lighting, bulb replacement
bulb holder, rear
cargo area
dipped beam (cars with halogen headlamps)
direction indicators, front
main beam (cars with active xenon
headlamps)
main beam (cars with halogen headlamps)
number plate lighting
vanity mirror
LKA - Lane Keeping Aid
Loading
cargo area
General
long load
roof load
356
361
362
358
360
360
359
362
362
255, 256
156
156
157
158
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Lock
locking
unlocking
Messages
178
178, 179
Lockable wheel bolts
326
Lock confirmation
166
Locking/unlocking
glovebox
inside
tailgate
180
179
180
M
Main/dipped beam
95
Main beam, automatic activation
96
maintenance
Rustproofing
118
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control
215
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake
228, 238
Driver Alert Control
250
Engine block heater and passenger
compartment heater
147
Lane Departure Warning
254
LKA
259
Messages in BLIS
244
Messages in the information display
117
Meters
fuel gauge
speedometer
tachometer
Mileage
Manual gearbox
GSI - Gear selector assistance
Towing and recovery
trailer
276
277
316
309
misting
attending to the windows
Misting
condensation in headlamps
387
Manual gear positions (Geartronic)
278
Mood lighting
103
Max. roof load
400
MY CAR
118
Menus
Combined instrument panel
menu overview
86
115
116
Oil, see also Engine oil
Oil level low
Option/accessory
Output
outside temperature gauge
Overheating
Owner's manual, ecolabelling
404, 405
350
16
403
77
299, 308
25
P
68, 70
68, 70
68, 70
390
Memory function in seat
O
119
130
PACOS
36
Paddle on the steering wheel
90
Paintwork
colour code
damage and touch-up
392
392
Panic function
168
Panorama roof
opening and closing
sun blind
ventilation position
113
112
114
Park Assist
backward
fault indicator
260, 262
261
263
423
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
function
parking assistance sensors
Park assist camera
settings
264
266
Parking brake
295
Passenger compartment filter
131
Passenger compartment heater
143
Passenger compartment lighting
automatic
Protective grille
161
Recommendations during driving
Puncture
335
Recommended child seats
table
Q
301
45
Recovery
318
Refrigerant
355
306
Queue Assist
211
Regeneration
Queue assistance
211
Remote control immobiliser
167
Pedestrian detection
229
Radar sensor
Limitations
205
217
Remote control key
battery replacement
detachable key blade
functions
loss
range
Personal Car Communicator
170
Rain sensor
105
Remote control key system, type approval 188
Petrol grade
304
Raising the car
345
Remote Start - ERS
271
389
Rear bulbs
location
Resetting, trip meter
122, 125
361
Rear seat
Heating
137
111
108
109
109
110
109
PCC – Personal Car Communicator
functions
range
Polishing
Position lamp
Power guide
102
167
170, 174
93
72
Power operated tailgate
181
Power panorama roof
112
R
Power steering fluid
Checking the level
grade
354
410
Rearview and door mirrors
compass
door
electrically retractable
heating
interior
Power windows
resetting
106
108
Rear window
heating
Power seat
424
260
263
86
164, 165, 166
172
171, 172
167
164
169, 174
Resetting the door mirrors
109
Resetting the power windows
108
Retractable power door mirrors
109
Reverse gear inhibitor
277
Road sign information
Limitations
operation
244
248
245
Roll-over protection
ROPS (Roll Over Protection System)
Roof load, max. weight
41
400
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ROPS (Roll Over Protection System)
Rustproofing
41
390
S
Sensus
364
Starter battery
changing
369
Service programme
342
Steering force, speed related
190
Set time interval
201
Steering force level, see Steering force
190
37
Steering lock
271
37
Service position
Side airbag SIPS
82
Safety lock
children
43
Skidding
301
Safety mode
moving the car
start attempt
41
43
42
slippery driving conditions
301
Soot filter
306
Steering wheel
heating
keypad
paddle
steering wheel adjustment
Seat, see Seats
85
SOOT FILTER FULL
306
Stone chips and scratches
392
Seatbelt
loosen
pregnancy
putting on
rear seat
seatbelt reminder
seatbelt tensioner
28
29
30
29
30
30
31
spare wheel
installation
327
329
Storage spaces
glovebox
tunnel console
154
154
Seatbelt reminder
30
Speed ratings, tyres
325
Support
31
Spin control
191
Support battery
370
Switching off the engine
271
Seatbelt tensioner
Seats
head restraints, rear
heating
Heating
lowering the front backrest
lowering the rear backrest
power
SIPS airbag
85
87
137
136
85
88
86
Speed limiter
alarm for speed exceeded
deactivation
getting started
temporary deactivation
Stability and traction control system
operation
195
197
197
195, 196
196
191, 193
192
Stability system
191
Stains
390
Start/Stop
function and operation
the engine does not stop
284
285
286
90
91
90
90
90
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment
152
Sun blind
panorama roof
Symbols
indicator symbols
warning symbols
112
15
69, 71, 73
69, 71
425
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake
Driver Alert Control
Lane Departure Warning
LKA
215
228, 238
250
254
259
T
Tailgate
close
Locking/unlocking
Open
power
312, 314
Towing
towing eye
316
317
Towing bracket
specifications
310, 311
311
Towing capacity and towball load
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control
214
TSA - trailer stability assist
192, 315
Tunnel console
12 V socket
cigarette lighter and ashtray
401
Tunnel detection
Towing eye
317
TPMS - Tyre Pressure Monitoring
332
Type approval
radar system
remote control key system
Traction control
191
Trailer
cable
driving with a trailer
snaking
308
308
308
315
Trailer stability assist
192
154
155
154
95
219
188
Type designations
396
Tyre dimension
324
Tyre load index
325
Tyre monitoring
333
Tyre pressure label
322
Temperature
actual temperature
130
Trailer Stability Assist
315
Tyre pressure monitoring
332, 333
Temperature control
138
Transmission
276
Through-load hatch
157
TM - Tyre Monitor
333
Transmission oil
volume and grade
408
Tools
331
Transponder
20
416
Tread depth
326
Tyres
direction of rotation
maintenance
pressure
puncture repair
specifications
tread depth
tread wear indicators
tyre pressure monitoring
winter tyres
321
320
322, 415
335
415
326
322
332, 333
326
Top speed
Total airing function
426
181
181
180
181
181
Towbar - detachable
attachment/removal
130, 179
Tread wear indicators
Trip computer
Towbar
detachable, attachment
detachable, removal
312
314
Towbar, see Towing equipment
310
Trip meter
Trip meter, resetting
322
119, 121, 124, 127
77, 119
122, 125
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Parking brake applied
seatbelt reminder
Warning
U
75
30, 75
75
Unlocking
from the inside
from the outside
179
178
Warning sound
collision warning system
Unlocking with the key blade
176
Warning symbols
69, 71, 75
Warning triangle
330
Washer fluid
366
Washer nozzles, heated
105
Washers
rear window
washer fluid, filling
windscreen
106
366
105
V
Vanity mirror
lighting
155
102
Ventilation
133
Vibration damper
310
233
Volvo ID
21
Water and dirt-repellent coating
Volvo Sensus
82
Water-repellent surface, cleaning
389
Waxing
389
W
Warning lamp
Adaptive Cruise Control
collision warning system
stability and traction control system
Warning lamps
Airbags – SRS
alternator not charging
Fault in brake system
Low oil pressure
205
233
191
75
75
75
75
389
Wheels
installation
removal
snow chains
329
327
326
Whiplash injury, WHIPS
39
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion
seating position
whiplash protection
39
40
39
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Windscreen
heating
389
109, 139
Windscreen washing
105
Windscreen wiper
rain sensor
104
105
Winter driving
301
Winter tyres
326
326
Weights
kerb weight
400
Winter wheels
Wheel bolts
lockable
326
326
Wheel change
327
Wheel rim, dimensions
324
Wiper blades
changing
Cleaning
replacing, rear window
Service position
364
364
365
365
364
Wheel rims
cleaning
388
Wipers and washing
104
427
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
428
TP 22250 (English Int.), AT 1646, MY17, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2016, Copyright © 2000-2016 Volvo Car Corporation